The Search Results of ""
chintz Quilting
additive color mixture Color
Additive color mixture is a term applied to combining colors of light - such as combining a red beam of light with a blue beam of light. If beams of yellow, red and blue light are combined, the result is white light.
color scheme Color
compatible colors Color
expanded palette Color
fugitive color or pigment Color
Glaze Painting
A colored thin layer of transparent paint put on another layer of paint. It is used to change the look and color of the previous surface.
local color Color
The color of something without the affect of any color created from shadowing or exposure to various lighting. Local color is the true color of something. For instance, a rose may appear to be the color of violet in the shade, but its true color (local color) may be red.
luminosity Color
The glow or brightness in a piece of artwork. Luminosity in a painting refers to the created light which can vary in gradation, and other ways (i.e. reflection, and/or amount of diffraction & intensity).
mixed contrast Color
optical mixture Color
Palette Art Materials and General Art Terms
A surface area where a painter is able to freely mix and squeeze paint before applying to paint to a piece of artwork. The term “palette” is also a term that refers to the choice of colors an artist is working with.
primary color Color
reflected color or light Color
saturation Color
The amount of brightness of a hue; the amount of purity of a hue. Chroma. Intensity.
secondary color Color
color shade Color
simultaneous contrast Color
spectrum Color
split primaries Color
style Color
substractive color Color
successive contrast Color
temperature Color
tertiary color Color
tetrad Color
toned support or ground Color
black Color
blue Color
green Color
orange Color
violet Color
red Color
yellow Color
acrylic-backed fabric Interior Decorating
A fabric sprayed professionally with acrylic to provide a durable fabric for upholstery.
antique Art Materials and General Art Terms
Something is said to be an antique when it was created many years ago. An antique may refer to a work of art or just an old object. Often antiques are valuable because of their nostalgic value, limited availability or irreplaceable parts. According to the USA, home furnishings are considered antiques if they are at least 100 years old.
arc lamp Interior Decorating
Art Deco Art Styles/Movements
A period of art that is included a combination of modern decorative art styles. Most of the styles came from the 1920s and 1930s that involved different kinds of avant-garde painting styles from the late 1900s. Characteristics from Russian Constructivism, Italian Futurism and Cubism are all present in this movement’s artwork; the style uses simplification, distortion, abstraction and geometric shapes heavily. Bright intense colors are used to hail the growing use of technology and the development of speed and product industries.
The term also relates to interior design and furniture between the 1920s and 1930s; pale colors were utilized heavily, especially ivory and silvery gray.
broadloom Interior Decorating
bronze mirror Interior Decorating
canopy Interior Decorating
cape cod cottage Interior Decorating
Chenille Textiles
A durable fabric with a luxurious feel often used in rooms for upholstering furniture.
It may also reference a velvety, soft, tufty cord or yarn. It can also be used for items such as embroidery purposes or on carpet edges for fringe embellishments.
country styles Interior Decorating
English country style Interior Decorating
French country style Interior Decorating
colonial American country style Interior Decorating
couture Interior Decorating
Damask Textiles
A heavier type of cloth that contains a reversible 2D pattern woven in it. In is frequently created from items such as silk, rayon, cotton or a mixture of these or other items.
document prints Interior Decorating
faux painting Interior Decorating
grosgrain Interior Decorating
lacquer Interior Decorating
pongee Interior Decorating
pouf/pouffed Interior Decorating
ranch house Interior Decorating
roman shades Interior Decorating
scored concrete Interior Decorating
semi-etagere Interior Decorating
shirr Interior Decorating
terra cotta tile Interior Decorating
louis comfort tiffany Interior Decorating
tone on tone Interior Decorating
valance Interior Decorating
voile Interior Decorating
wedgwood Interior Decorating
wrapped Interior Decorating
accent piping Quilting
acid-free paper Quilting
A material having a life-expectancy of three years that is used for storing quilts.
adhesive template Quilting
album quilt Quilting
alternate plain block set Quilting
amish quilt Quilting
applique Quilting
applique or bandage sheers Quilting
applique stitch Quilting
assembly line piecing Quilting
backstitch Quilting
baltimore-style applique Quilting
basting (thread) Quilting
The method of joining fabric layers together with long hand stitches to prevent shifting.
batting (batt) Quilting
batting, glazed and bonded Quilting
batting, needlepunched Quilting
bearding Quilting
beeswax Quilting
bias Quilting
bias applique Quilting
bias binding Quilting
bias-strip method for triangule-squares Quilting
big corners set Quilting
binding, continuous bias Quilting
binding, French or double Quilting
block-to-block set Quilting
border corner square Quilting
breaking-out-of-the-block set Quilting
buttonhole or blanket stitch Quilting
buttonhole-stitch applique Quilting
calico Quilting
cathedral window Quilting
celtic or bias applique Quilting
center-outward block construction method Quilting
chain piecing Quilting
chintz Quilting
clamshell edging Quilting
clip Quilting
color contrast in printed fabrics Quilting
comforter Quilting
compound patterns Quilting
sashing, continuous Quilting
A piece of fabric that runs the complete length or width between block rows of a quilt. Short sashing is placed perpendicular to the continuous sashing in order to separate the blocks inside each row.
convex curve Quilting
coverlet Quilting
crazy patchwork (quilt) Quilting
cross-hatching Quilting
crosswise grain Quilting
darning presser foot Quilting
diagonal basting stitch Quilting
diagonal set Quilting
diagonal-bar block construction method Quilting
diagonal-bar unit Quilting
easing Quilting
echo quilting Quilting
A kind of outline quilting that is commonly applied on applique quilts. The applique motif is quilted-in-the-ditch and then the following line of the stitching is placed parallel to the first line. This process is repeated for the 3rd, 4th, 5th...stitching lines while always maintaining the same space distance between the lines.
edge finishing Quilting
embroidery Quilting
English paper piecing Quilting
fabric, right side Quilting
feather quilting Quilting
A type of quilting that involves complicated quilting designs. Also known as fancies.
finger-pressing Quilting
finished size Quilting
floating the blocks Quilting
folded-star patchwork Quilting
foundation fabric Quilting
four-patch block Quilting
four-triangle block construction method Quilting
four-triangle unit Quilting
four-triangle/hourglass alternate block set Quilting
free-motion machine quilting Quilting
The method of stitching complicated and curving designs by a machine.
freezer-paper applique Quilting
friendship quilt Quilting
fusible webbing Quilting
goose-chase unit Quilting
grain Quilting
grain line Quilting
grid Quilting
grid method for triangle-squares Quilting
hanging sleeve Quilting
hawaiian applique Quilting
homespun Quilting
in-the-ditch quilting Quilting
A kind of outline quilting completed along an applique edge or seam. Marks are not used for this type of quilting.
invisible machine applique Quilting
ironing Quilting
Italian or corded quilting Quilting
A kind of relief quilting that places a measured piece of cording or thread into a quilted channel. This particular relief quilting started in England, but was later made famous by the Italians and hence sometimes called Italian quilting
lattice strips Quilting
layering Quilting
lengthwise grain (warp threads) Quilting
light box Quilting
linsey-woolsey quilt Quilting
log cabin Quilting
machine applique Quilting
masterpiece quilt Quilting
matching point Quilting
meander quilting Quilting
Loose non-structured lines of stitching that do not usually touch each other.
medallion quilt Quilting
memory quilt Quilting
mitered seam Quilting
Muslin Textiles
A medium weight fabric made out of is plain-woven cotton. White is the color of bleached muslin; unbleached muslin is off-white.
needle marking Quilting
needle-turned applique Quilting
needle Quilting
needling Quilting
nine-patch block Quilting
on point Quilting
one-patch quilt Quilting
one-way design Quilting
outline quilting Quilting
Followig the edge of an applique pattern or patchwork with stitches.
overcasting stitch Quilting
pa ndau Quilting
partial piecing Quilting
patch Quilting
patchwork Quilting
patchwork quilt Quilting
pattern Quilting
pattern drafting Quilting
pearl cotton Quilting
permanent press Quilting
pieced border Quilting
sashing, pieced Quilting
piecing Quilting
pin-basting Quilting
pin-matching Quilting
pleated patchwork Quilting
pouncing Quilting
prairie points Quilting
presser foot Quilting
pressing Quilting
prewashing fabric Quilting
quarter-inch quilting Quilting
quick-cutting Quilting
quick-piecing Quilting
quilt Quilting
quilting Quilting
Quilting is the act of stitching three layers of a quilt together – creating a kind of sandwich that features a decorative design. The act of quilting can be completed by a machine or by hand.
Machine quilting involves a ‘walking foot’ in order to feed the layers of the quilt through the machine. Free motion or freehand quilting is completed with a darning foot. Frequently individuals who choose to use a machine will pair the threads to the fabric that is being quilted. When pairing is not possible, invisible monofilament is used instead.
Hand quilting is often completed on a quilt frame or quilting hoop with needles called ‘betweens’ and thread. To quilt, one hand is placed under the quilt in order to feel for the needle, and the other hand creates the stitches on top. The best hand quilters will create small, consistent stitches that run over the quilt. Straight and uniform stitches are key to make a successful quilt. In general, the stitches should be the same size on both the top and bottom of the quilt.
The design on a quilt is made through a ‘shadow line’. A different shadow line is created depending on whether when uses a machine or one’s hands. In machine quilting, the line will be straighter and rougher looking that quilting by hand, which gives a puckered dotted line. Each method is not better than the other – they each just have a different appearance.
quilting design Quilting
quilting frame Quilting
quilting guide bar Quilting
quilting hoop Quilting
quilting stencil Quilting
quilting thread Quilting
reverse applique Quilting
robbing-Peter-to-pay-Paul Quilting
rotary cutter and mat Quilting
ruching Quilting
ruffled edging Quilting
running stitch Quilting
sampler quilt Quilting
sashing Quilting
sashing with squares Quilting
satin stitch Quilting
scrap quilt Quilting
edges, self-finished Quilting
seminole patchwork Quilting
set or setting Quilting
setting square Quilting
setting triangle Quilting
setting-in Quilting
shadow applique Quilting
sharps Quilting
signature document Quilting
single-block quilt Quilting
pattern, single-line Quilting
slipstitch Quilting
soap slivers/soapstone pencils Quilting
spiral binding Quilting
square knot Quilting
squared/butted corner seam Quilting
square-within-a-square unit Quilting
squaring-off end of fabric Quilting
stained-glass applique Quilting
stippling Quilting
straight of grain Quilting
straight set Quilting
strip or string patchwork Quilting
strip set Quilting
strip-piecing Quilting
tailor's chalk pencil Quilting
tailor's padding stitch Quilting
tall-triangle unit Quilting
template Quilting
thimble Quilting
tied quilt Quilting
trapunto Quilting
trapunto needle Quilting
traveling Quilting
triangle-squares Quilting
tufted quilt Quilting
tufting Quilting
two-bar unit Quilting
two-block set Quilting
two-triangle alternate block set Quilting
two-way fabric designs Quilting
unit-row construction method Quilting
utility quilt Quilting
walking foot/even-feed Quilting
warp Quilting
weft Quilting
whipstitch Quilting
whole-cloth quilt Quilting
wrong side Quilting
yarn needle Quilting
yo-yo patchwork Quilting
zigzag set Quilting
zigzag stitch Quilting
accents Gardening
Plants that function in a design for a garden. These plants attract attention with their exciting colors and foliage.
beneficial insects Gardening
bract Gardening
bud Gardening
bulb Gardening
compost Gardening
corm Gardening
complete fertilizer Gardening
cotyledon Gardening
cultivar Gardening
deadhead Gardening
deciduous Gardening
divide Gardening
diseases Gardening
direct sow Gardening
foliage plants Gardening
genus Gardening
harden off Gardening
hardy Gardening
hardiness zone Gardening
heavy soil Gardening
hybrid Gardening
inflorescence Gardening
island bed Gardening
invasive Gardening
leggy Gardening
loam Gardening
light soil Gardening
manure Gardening
mulch Gardening
native plant Gardening
naturalize Gardening
neutral soil Gardening
nitrogen Gardening
pests Gardening
pH Gardening
phosphorus Gardening
pinching Gardening
potassium Gardening
potbound Gardening
raceme Gardening
rhizome Gardening
runner Gardening
slug Gardening
soil test Gardening
specimen plant Gardening
stolon Gardening
tender Gardening
thinning out Gardening
transplant Gardening
tuber Gardening
true leaves Gardening
umbel Gardening
volunteer Gardening
vermiculite Gardening
weed Gardening
wilt Gardening
air-arc gouging Welding
alloy Welding
aluminum heat-treating Welding
backing ring Welding
backing strip Welding
bare electrode Welding
bead or weld bead Welding
bevel Welding
braze Welding
capillary action Welding
carburizing Welding
cold weld Welding
corrosion Welding
cover glass Welding
covered electrode Welding
crater Welding
crater crack Welding
discontinuity Welding
drop through Welding
duty cycle Welding
dye-penetrant testing Welding
filler metal Welding
flash burn Welding
flashback Welding
flux Welding
fusion welding Welding
gas metal-arc welding Welding
gas tungsten-arc welding Welding
gas welding Welding
hard facing Welding
hardness testing Welding
heat sink Welding
heat-affected zone Welding
heat-treating Welding
interpass temperature Welding
invisible machine applique Welding
joint Welding
keyholing Welding
magnaflux Welding
MIG welding Welding
nitriding Welding
normalizing Welding
overhead position Welding
oxidize Welding
oxygen cutting Welding
peening Welding
penetration Welding
pickling Welding
plating Welding
plug weld Welding
polarity Welding
porosity Welding
preheating Welding
puddle Welding
reducing flame Welding
root of weld Welding
sandblasting Welding
seam welding Welding
shielded-metal arc welding Welding
shop weld Welding
slag Welding
slag inclusion Welding
soldering Welding
spot welding Welding
steel heat-treating Welding
stickout Welding
stitch weld Welding
stress cracking Welding
stress-relief heat-treating Welding
stringer bead Welding
submerged-arc welding Welding
tempering Welding
thoriated tungsten Welding
tungsten electrode Welding
ultrasonic testing Welding
vertical position Welding
weave bead Welding
weldability Welding
X-ray Welding
acoustical materials Carpentry
Kinds of material - such as plaster and tile - absorb sound waves. Acoustical materials are often placed over interior wall surfaces in order to prevent reverberation of the sound waves.
adhesive Carpentry
A kind of substance having the ability to keep material joined through surface attachment. Glue, mastic, and paste are all types of adhesives.
aggregate Art Materials and General Art Terms
Aggregate is the substances combined with cement to create concrete. Materials such as crushed rock, marble dust or sand can be employed separately or together in the mixture. The term may also refer to substances employed to make rough textures in mortar, plaster and stucco.
air conditioning Carpentry
air-entraining agents Carpentry
alteration Carpentry
anchor bolts Carpentry
anchor straps Carpentry
annual rings Carpentry
apron Carpentry
areaway Carpentry
asphalt Carpentry
astragal Carpentry
backband Carpentry
backfill Carpentry
backing board Carpentry
balloon framing Carpentry
baluster Carpentry
balustrade Carpentry
basement Carpentry
base shoe Carpentry
batter Carpentry
batter board Carpentry
bay Carpentry
bay window Carpentry
bearing partition Carpentry
bed molding Carpentry
bench mark Carpentry
bird's mouth Carpentry
blind nailing Carpentry
blind stop Carpentry
blue stain Carpentry
brick construction Carpentry
brick molding Carpentry
brick veneer construction Carpentry
bridging Carpentry
built-up roof Carpentry
butt Carpentry
cabinet Carpentry
cabinet drawer guide Carpentry
cabinet drawer kicker Carpentry
camber Carpentry
cant strip Carpentry
casein glue Carpentry
casement Carpentry
casing Carpentry
caulk Carpentry
chair rail Carpentry
chase Carpentry
check rails Carpentry
cleat Carpentry
collar beam Carpentry
column Carpentry
commerical standard Carpentry
conductors Carpentry
contact cement Carpentry
convenience outlet Carpentry
cope Carpentry
corbel out Carpentry
corner bead Carpentry
corner braces Carpentry
Crossing braces inserted into studs to strengthen corners of the structure of frames.
cornice Carpentry
counterflashing Carpentry
cove molding Carpentry
cripple jack Carpentry
cripple stud Carpentry
cupola Carpentry
curtain wall Carpentry
dead bolt Carpentry
degree day Carpentry
dimension lumber Carpentry
dimensional stability Carpentry
direct gain system Carpentry
door frame Carpentry
door stop Carpentry
dormer Carpentry
drip cap Carpentry
drip groove Carpentry
drop siding Carpentry
dry rot Carpentry
drywall Carpentry
eaves Carpentry
electric moisture meter Carpentry
elevation Carpentry
equilibrium moisture content Carpentry
expansion joint Carpentry
factory and shop lumber Carpentry
fascia Carpentry
fenestration Carpentry
fiber board Carpentry
A term regarding sheet material of various densities. The material is made from vegetable fibers such as cane or wood.
fiber saturation point Carpentry
fire stop Carpentry
fire wall Carpentry
flashing Carpentry
footing Carpentry
foundation Carpentry
framing Carpentry
frieze Carpentry
furring Carpentry
gable Carpentry
gambrel roof Carpentry
glazing Carpentry
glazing compound Carpentry
glue block Carpentry
grade beam Carpentry
ground Carpentry
ground fault interrupter Carpentry
grounding Carpentry
gusset Carpentry
gutter Carpentry
gypsum wallboard Carpentry
half story Carpentry
Hardboard Carpentry
A type of board material made out of wood fiber. It is created into panels that have a density of 50 to 80 lb. per cubit feet. The bits of wood are adhered together through pressure and heat (as opposed to resin and glue. Frequently one side of a hardboard is rough and the other side is smooth.
header Carpentry
headroom Carpentry
heartwood Carpentry
heat transmission coefficient Carpentry
hollow-back Carpentry
hollow core door Carpentry
hose bib Carpentry
I beam Carpentry
indirect gain system Carpentry
insulation Carpentry
interior trim Carpentry
isolated gain system Carpentry
jack rafter Carpentry
jalousie Carpentry
jig Carpentry
joist Carpentry
kerfing Carpentry
knot Carpentry
lally column Carpentry
lath Carpentry
lazy susan Carpentry
leader Carpentry
ledger Carpentry
let in Carpentry
level-transit Carpentry
light construction Carpentry
lintel Carpentry
lock block Carpentry
lookout Carpentry
lumber Carpentry
major module Carpentry
mansard roof Carpentry
masonry Carpentry
matched lumber Carpentry
mechanical core Carpentry
mechanical equipment Carpentry
meeting rail Carpentry
millwork Carpentry
minor module Carpentry
modular coordination Carpentry
moisture content Carpentry
molding Carpentry
moulder Carpentry
mr (moisture resistant) wallboard Carpentry
mullion Carpentry
muntin Carpentry
net floor area Carpentry
newel Carpentry
nominal size Carpentry
The standard commercial dimensions that a piece of timber or lumber is known and purchased at.
nonbearing partition Carpentry
nosing Carpentry
on center Carpentry
oriel window Carpentry
oriented strand board Carpentry
parapet Carpentry
pargeting Carpentry
particleboard Carpentry
party wall Carpentry
passive solar construction Carpentry
penny Carpentry
phase-change materials Carpentry
photosynthesis Carpentry
pier Carpentry
pilaster Carpentry
pile Carpentry
plan Carpentry
plaster Carpentry
plat Carpentry
plate Carpentry
platform framing Carpentry
usual method of building that limits all stud height to only one floor (unlike balloon framing)
plot plan Carpentry
plumbing Carpentry
plumbing stack Carpentry
plunge cutting Carpentry
polystyrene panels Carpentry
polyvinyl resin emulsion glue Carpentry
prefabricated construction Carpentry
preservative (carpentry) Carpentry
A material that stops fungi, borers and insects from deteriorating wood.
purlins Carpentry
push stick Carpentry
quarter-sawed Carpentry
quit-claim deed Carpentry
rafter Carpentry
rail Carpentry
rake Carpentry
reinforced concrete construction Carpentry
relative humidity Carpentry
resilient Carpentry
retaining wall Carpentry
ribbon Carpentry
riser Carpentry
roll roofing Carpentry
roofing Carpentry
roof ridge Carpentry
rotary cut veneer Carpentry
roughing-in Carpentry
rough lumber Carpentry
r value Carpentry
saddle Carpentry
scaffold Carpentry
scale Carpentry
scantling Carpentry
scarfing Carpentry
scotia Carpentry
screed Carpentry
seasoning Carpentry
section drawing Carpentry
septic tank Carpentry
setting block Carpentry
sheathing Carpentry
sheathing paper Carpentry
shim Carpentry
shiplap Carpentry
shoring Carpentry
shutter Carpentry
siding Carpentry
sill Carpentry
sleeper Carpentry
soffit Carpentry
softwoods Carpentry
solar orientation Carpentry
sole plate Carpentry
span Carpentry
specification Carpentry
specific gravity Carpentry
splash block Carpentry
stairway, stair, or stairs Carpentry
station mark Carpentry
stell-frame construction Carpentry
stepped footing Carpentry
stickers Carpentry
stool Carpentry
stoop Carpentry
story pole Carpentry
straightedge Carpentry
stressed skin Carpentry
strike plate Carpentry
strongback Carpentry
structural window wall panel Carpentry
subfloor Carpentry
termite shield Carpentry
terrazzo flooring Carpentry
thermosiphon Carpentry
thermostat Carpentry
three-way switch Carpentry
threshold Carpentry
tie beam Carpentry
toeboard Carpentry
toenailing Carpentry
toe space Carpentry
transformer Carpentry
transom Carpentry
trap Carpentry
trim Carpentry
trimmer Carpentry
trimmer stud Carpentry
triple wall Carpentry
tripod Carpentry
trombe wall Carpentry
truss Carpentry
unicom system Carpentry
unprotected-metal construction Carpentry
urea-formaldehyde resin glue Carpentry
vapor barrier Carpentry
veneered wall Carpentry
veneer plaster Carpentry
vent Carpentry
ventilation Carpentry
vermiculite Carpentry
waferboard Carpentry
wainscot Carpentry
wale Carpentry
wallboard Carpentry
wall tie Carpentry
warp Carpentry
water repellent Carpentry
water table Carpentry
weathering Carpentry
weatherstrip Carpentry
wet wall Carpentry
whaler Carpentry
window unit Carpentry
wire glass Carpentry
wp series molding patterns Carpentry
cellulose acetate Photography
Cellulose acetate is derived from cellulose which is used in the processing of lacquers, plastics, photographic film and textile fibers. Because it is less flammable that celluose nitrate, it is less dangerous to use in film. Moreover, it does not yellow to the same degree as cellulose nitrate does in the daylight; however, cellulose acetate does not last as long, is not as hard and lacks other lacquer properties. Permanent constructions or paintings should not use cellulosic products due to their instability.
Animation Art Cel Animation
A hand-painted sheet made of nitrate or acetate that is put on a background and then photographed. The character’s outline is put on the top of the animation cel and the colors are painted on a cel’s back by hand.
Animation Art Drawing Animation
An original animation production drawing made by an animator. Animation cels are made from this original drawing.
Animation Background Drawing Animation
A drawing created as the foundation for a background painting along with the action and placement of the animated characters.
Animation Cel Setup Print Making
An animation group of cels or single animation cel that is used along with a production background. A cel setup could involve one or multiple levels of cels layed on an animation background.
Clean Up Drawing Print Making
A drawing completed by using other unfinished animation drawings. Cels care made from the rough animated drawings.
Color Model Cel Animation
An animation cel made to ensure correct coloration. Also known as a color test.
Custom Background Print Making
An new animation background made for the express purpose of embellishing a particular animation cel.
Hand-Prepared Background / hand prepared background Animation
An animation background made by a studio artist to finish an animation cel setup.
Key Master Setup Animation
A single animation cel or group of cels along with their original pairing background as shown in the finished animation film.
Layout Drawing Animation
An animation drawing that may either include camera movements as wells as positions of characters, or may include master backgrounds.
Limited Edition Hand Painted Cel Animation
An animation cel made into only a small set number. It is made by a hand-painting technique and is created from either a certain time frame from a cartoon or from the artwork in a film.
Master Set-up Animation
A cel or cels that are both attached to the same animation background in a film; however, the cels are not viewed at the same time in the film.
Nitrate Cel Animation
Animation cels that were used until the 1940’s and 1950’s. Yellowing and rippling on the cels are signs of their aging.
One of One Animation
A high-quality animation production drawing. It is often framed side by side with a hand-painted animation cel that is a limited edition of the drawing.
Pan Cel Animation
A background, drawing or animation cel with measurements up to 12 inches by 30 inches.
Pencil Model Sheet Animation
A number of original animation pencil drawings all grouped on a single sheet. The sheet is used to show the many positions and expressions of an animated character.
Production Cel Animation
A drawing made for the creation or development of an animated film’s production. The drawing may or may not be used in the final film piece.
Production Background Animation
An original background painting in an animation that is put into the final animated film.
The mood and location of a scene is established by a production background.
Production Drawing Animation
A drawing in animation production that explains the artist’s drawings used as the foundation for creating animation cels.
Publicity (Promotional) Animation
An animation cel not used for production that is made for marketing purposes. Characters are drawn in their “best” poses.
Rough Drawing Animation
A drawing completed by an artist to show the pose and position of a character.
Serigraphy Animation
A method by which limited editions are made by carefully screening the hues of an image on the backside of an acetate animation cel or on the top of canvas or art paper with each hue layered one at a time.
Storyboard Drawing Animation
A number of animation art drawings or just one drawing that functions as a visual plot line of the film. Usually these drawings show the main theme or a particular scene in the film.
Studio Background Animation
An animation background that is made for solely showcase or publicity purposes.
A-line gown Fashion
Bodices that are form fitted and contain a seamless waist. From the waistline the bodies flare outward into a full skirt.
back drape Fashion
A piece of material joined to the waist or shoulder to add an elegant extension over the back to the ground. Some back drapes can be removed.
back yoke Fashion
A tailored section of material placed at the shoulder of clothing or at a skirt's top.
ball gown Fashion
A full skirt that starts at the waist and flows into a formal length. They come in various designs.
ballerina neckline Fashion
A low neckline. Dresses that often feature this kneckline include strapless or spaghetti strapped dresses.
Bandeau / Tube Top Fashion
A bandeau (or tube top) is a circular band that is used to cover a woman’s breasts.
basque waist Fashion
Basque waist/V-waist - This dropped waist starts at or just below the natural waistline, and dips in the center creating a "V" shape.
adjust seasoning Cooking
To change the seasoning of a dish or sauce according to one's taste. To adjust the seasoning, taste the item cooking immediately before serving.
adobo Cooking
A Caribbean spice mixture that varies from cook to cook, although oregano is consistent in all batches of the mixture..
adzuki bean Cooking
A maroon dried bean that is oval in shape. It is an Asian bean with a sweeter taste and is frequently used in desserts and made into flour.
al dente Cooking
Pasta is said to be "al dente" when it is firm "to the tooth." It is an Italian phrase that describes the ideal state state of cooked pasta.
aux fines herbes Cooking
A French description of a dish to which has been added a number of fresh herbs, such as parsley, chives and tarragon.
avocado Cooking
A fruit that originated from South and Central America. A ripe avocado is soft to the touch; it is a popular addition to many salads and appetizers.
baba ghanoush Cooking
A dish originating from the Middle East that includes a combination of tahini, lemon juice, garlic, eggplant, and olive oil. It functions as a dip or spread and may be garnished with mint and pomegranate seeds.
baguette Cooking
A long loaf of French bread that is known for its crunchy exterior crust and soft interior.
bake Cooking
To make food inside an oven; cooking with the use of free-circulating dry heat. The term "baking" is usually reserved for desserts and breads. Food is known to be "roasted" at increased temperatures which lends a new dimension to the flavor.
baking potato Cooking
A high starch, low moisture potato from Idaho that showcases a hardy rough skin. French fries and excellent mashed potatoes are two examples of foods made from Idaho potatoes.
baking powder Cooking
A type of baking soda that is a double-action leavener. It becomes chemically active when combined with a liquid and then heated. One can make baking powder be combining baking soda and cream of tartar.
baking sheet Cooking
Sheets of metal used for baking. Ideal baking sheets are insulated and thick. Some sheets are non-stick, meaning that they do not require shortening or butter to grease it before food is placed upon it.
baking soda Cooking
Sodium bicarbonate. Pastries that include acid are ideal for baking soda because it is a good leavener when stimulated by acid. When no acid is present in one's recipe, baking powder is best added instead of baking soda because it contains acid.
bean sauce Cooking
A kind of condiment made out of soybeans; it plays an important role in stir-fry dishes. It is accessible at Asian grocery stores and is frequently found in many supermarkets. "Ground bean sauce" is saltier than its counterpart "whole bean sauce."
bean sprouts Cooking
Sprouts that are edible and come from all kinds of beans and seeds. Examples of bean sprouts include alfalfa, lentil, and radish sprouts. Sprouts keep best in ventilated containers kept in a refrigerator.
beat Cooking
The action of mixing ingredients together quickly and firmly in order to blend them.
bechamel sauce Cooking
A French white sauce. It is created out of milk, butter, and flour whose combination is blended over low heat and slowly cooked.
beef fillet Cooking
A type of cut of meat that is boneless and tender that originates from the tenderloin. Sauteing and grilling are the best ways to cook a beef fillet.
beet Cooking
A root vegetable. Its greens should be removed when storing the vegetable to ensure freshness. Beets come in a variety of sizes and is available year-round.
bell peppers Cooking
Bell peppers that are bright green contain a sharp flavor. If a green pepper is allowed to ripen one or two weeks more, it will turn into an orange, yellow or red pepper and showcase a much milder taste. Also known as sweet peppers.
Bermuda onion Cooking
A sweet and rather large onion that originates from Bermuda. It is ideal for sandwiches and salads because of its sweet taste. Shelf life less than other onions.
biscotti Cooking
A type of crunchy Italian cookie. The dough is baked twice. The first time the dough is baked in a log form. It is then sliced and baked a second time.
black bean Cooking
A kind of dried bean that is squarish in shape and is black with an interior of white. It is frequently used in salads and soups because of its good flavor.
boniato Cooking
A common tuber in Asia and Latin America. Also known as batata. Its flavor is a mixture of a sweet and white potato and is similar in its cooking needs. It can be baked like a potato or boiled.
boning knife Cooking
A type of knife that showcases a thin-blade. It is can be used for piercing meat and boning.
bonito flakes Cooking
Dried flakes from dark fish; the flakes are frequently used in dashi - a Japanese soup stock.
Boston lettuce Cooking
A type of lettuce that is part of the butterhead family. Its flavor is rather bland and the leaves are tender.
braise Cooking
A cooking technique of cooking food by browning it in a small amount of fat and then adding a kind of liquid to the pan. The pan is then covered and the contents are cooked over low heat.
bread crumbs Cooking
Dry bread crumbs and fresh bread crumbs. A flavor may be added to dry bread crumbs and they are lightly toasted. Fresh crumbs are made from a blender or food processor. Any good bread will do to make bread crumbs.
broccoli raab Cooking
Simlar to broccoli, but it contains more leaves and stems and is more bitter. It can be substituted in any recipe that calls for broccoli.
broil Cooking
A cooking technique of cooking food underneath the heat source in order to create a crisp crust while achieving a certain texture and doneness of the interior. The bigger the size of the item to be cooked, the greater the distance the item needs to be from whatever is used to heat the item.
broth Cooking
The foundation of most soups. Broth is created from cooking meat, fish or vegetables in water and then straining the liquid and getting rid of the fat.
brown Cooking
A cooking technique of cooking food rapidly. It is done in order to cook the outside of food while maintaining a moist center. A hot heating source is essential for browning foods.
brown sugar Cooking
A mixture of molasses and white sugar. One cup of sugar plus two tablespoons is a basic recipe for brown sugar. To create darker brown sugar, add more molasses.
caraway seeds Cooking
A brown seed that is small and curved that features a nutty taste. It originates from the parsley family.
cardamom Cooking
A type of sweet spice that originates from India. It belongs to the ginger family and can be purchased in the form of a pod or ground state. To achieve the freshest flavor, it is best to ground one's own cardamom just before use to ensure the best flavor.
cardoon Cooking
A artichoke relative that is common in France, South America and Italy. Its leaves are removed and the stems are eaten.
casserole Cooking
A container that is ovenprofoof and deep; it is used to cook foods gradually.
catfish Cooking
A common white-fleshed fish. Wild catfish contain a muddier flavor as opposed to catfish that have been bred in farms. White flesh is tastier than grayish flesh.
cayenne Cooking
A type of pepper that is made out of finely ground chile pepper. It is also known as red pepper.
celeriac Cooking
A kind of celery that is popular for its root. This root is eaten mostly in purees and salads.
chard Cooking
A beet that is red, white or pink in its midrib. Chard has an unusual acid-sweet flavor.
chayote Cooking
Similar to a zucchini or summer squash. They have a long shelf-life and need to be treated gently. They may be cooked like a summer squash.
cheesecloth Cooking
A cotton gauze that retains its fibers when wet and does not add flavor to the food it covers. It is used to strain liquids and remove small particles.
cherimoya Cooking
Also known as custard apple. A fruit that originates from America. It contains a white interior and a greenish-brown exterior. It is sweet in flavor and contains watermelonish seeds.
choux pastry Cooking
A pastry that when baked is fluffy and frequently filled with a creamy substance. It is made out of butter, water and flour that is cooked on top of the stove before the dough is shaped and baked.
chutney Cooking
A tasty jam that has a range of textures and flavorings. It is served with foods that have a strong taste.
cilantro Cooking
Also known as Chinese parsley. Cilantro comes from the coriander plant's leaves.
cinnamon Cooking
A type of sweet and hot spice. It originates from the bark of tropical evergreen trees. Cinnamon sticks are frequently ground to make cinnamon powder.
cloud ear Cooking
A type of mushroom that contains a woodsy flavor. It is brownish-black in color and can be found in Asian markets.
clove Cooking
A type of spice that is intense and sweet. It comes in both whole and powdered form.
cocoa powder Cooking
A powder that originates from the cocoa bean. It is used frequently in baked foods and is the essential ingredient in the popular drink hot chocolate.
coconut Cooking
A fruit originating from the coconut palm. A firm brown hair shell is encompassed by a husk. Under the shell resides the coconut meat that stores the sweet milky juice. Coconut may be purchased as flakes, as a whole coconut or in shredded pieces.
coconut milk Cooking
A mixture made from mixing shredded coconut meat with hot water. The mixture is simmered until it becomes foamy. The liquid is then strained from the meat. The result is coconut milk.
cod Cooking
A type of mild-flavored white fish. It is very flaky and may be substituted for hake, pollock and haddock.
curry powder Cooking
A combination of not more then twenty spices. Curry powder is best used right away because it loses its intensity quickly. It is often used in many Indian dishes.
currant Cooking
Little grape-like berries that may be black, white or red in their raw form. The ingredient "dried currants" recipes often call for are actually dried zante grape. Raisins may be substituted for dried currants but moisture should be added to the recipe if this is done because raisins absorb moisture.
cumin Cooking
A spice that contains a rather bitter taste and intense aroma. It is common in many items such as stews and curries.
crystallized ginger Cooking
Ginger that has been cooked in a sugary syrup and then covered in coarse sugar.
croutons Cooking
Pieces or slices of bread that are dried in the oven. They may include seasonings or simply be plain. They are popular as toppings on salads.
croquette Cooking
A kind of hamburger created from ingredients that do not include ground meat. It is not important to bread it before cooking.
crepe Cooking
Thin French pancakes that are often filled with sweet additions. Crepe batter is best made a couple hours before frying in order for the batter to develop its ideal consistency.
crème fraiche Cooking
A dairy product that is sweetened with sugar and whipped up to create a nice addition to a dessert.
cream of tartar Cooking
A white powder containing a high acidic level that can be made into baking powder.
cream cheese Cooking
A spreadable and creamy cheese that is popular in many dips and frostings and many other recipes.
cream Cooking
The mix an ingredient rapidly in order to soften it and ensure it is well blended.
cranberry bean Cooking
A off-white bean with reddish streaks. Their flavor is rather nutty and they often replace white or red beans in dishes.
cranberry Cooking
Cranberries are a fruit with a hard texture and tart taste. They are cooked and then sliced or pounded to make relishes. Cranberries rhave an excellent storage reputation - they retain their shape and flavor for several weeks when refrigerated or frozen.
Absorbent Ground Art Materials and General Art Terms
A chalk ground that absorbs oil during the oil painting process; the effect is a matted appearance as well as a quickening of the drying process.
Acrylic Emulsion Art Materials and General Art Terms
A co-polymer or polymer water dispersion of either methacrylic acid, acrylonitrile, or acrylic acid. Emulsions of this kind dry through the processes of water evaporation and film coalescence.
Acrylic Solution Animation
A solution of acrylic resin in a solvent that is not stable. Paint that contains an acrylic solution binder is similar to oil paints.
alkyd Painting
A synthetic resin put in mediums and paint. It functions as a binder that contains the pigment and quickens the drying time.
Alla Prima Painting
An Italian term meaning “at the first.” It is a painting method that involves creating a painting in one sitting without the use of any under painting.
Archival Art Materials and General Art Terms
A terms describing the longevity of a piece of material. A material that is archival lasts longer/maintains its state better than items that are not archival. PH neutral materials and alkaline-buffered materials are examples of archival quality items.
ASTM Art Materials and General Art Terms
Short for “the American Society for Testing and Materials.” It sets a certain standard by which certain paint qualities are tested. Many manufacturers use it as a standard for quality purposes.
Binder Art Materials and General Art Terms
A stable adhesive liquid element in paint that joins pigment particles and the paint film together to keep the overall state of the paint in place.
Bleeding (painting) Art Materials and General Art Terms
The visual effect achieved when a dark color “bleeds” into a lighter color.
Blending (painting/drawing) Art Materials and General Art Terms
Smoothing edges of shapes or colors one into the other in order to create a seamless gradation from one to the next.
Bloom Art Materials and General Art Terms
A visual effect that happens on varnished surfaces in damp places; things become gradually more and more opaque and dull.
Body Color Art Materials and General Art Terms
Opaque paint that has the ability to surface over a color beneath it so none of it can be seen.
Brushwork Painting
The stylistic way in which a brush paints on a surface. It refers to the texture and stroke of a brush.
Canvas Art Materials and General Art Terms
A piece of woven cloth that provides the surface area for paint.
Casein Art Materials and General Art Terms
A protein taken from cow’s milk that is used to made a water-resistant flat film.
Crosshatching Drawing
Sets of closely aligned parallel lines that crisscross at angles to each other. Crosshatching is used to create tone and to model forms.
Cockling Art Materials and General Art Terms
A term referring to the puckering that happens on papers after washes if they are not stretched correctly or if they are not very strong.
collage Art Materials and General Art Terms
Collage refers to adhering two-dimensional objects to an image's surface. Collage should not be confused with assemblage.
Composition Art Materials and General Art Terms
The organization of the art elements in a drawing or painting. These art elements include shape, color, movement, line, tone, color, edges and perspective.
Dispersion Art Materials and General Art Terms
The term refers to the process of creating a homogeneous combination of ingredients in paints. Pigment particles are spread evenly in the paint.
Diluents Art Materials and General Art Terms
Liquids that work as a diluting agent in oil paints. Water is an example of the diluent used in waterbased paints.
Co-Polymers Art Materials and General Art Terms
A molecule of more than one kind of structural unit.
Copal Art Materials and General Art Terms
A hard resin that is put into painting mediums and varnishes.
Damar Art Materials and General Art Terms
A resin produced from conifer trees that is put into varnishes and oil mediums.
Decoupage Art Materials and General Art Terms
The process of cutting designs from paper and then placing them on surfaces in order to create a collage.
Designer Colors Art Materials and General Art Terms
High quality Gouache paints. They are used extensively in commercial art.
Distemper Art Materials and General Art Terms
A combination of chalk, water-based paint and glue. Artists use it mostly for posters and murals.
Drier Art Materials and General Art Terms
A material that starts or quickens the drying process of oil paint, because it encourages oxidation.
Drying Oil Art Materials and General Art Terms
An oil that absorbs oxygen and then changes into a firm film after being exposed to air.
Emulsion Painting
A type of paint that is water-based; it is often applied over ceilings and interior walls. Acrylic resins and vinyl are frequently added to these paints which makes them hardier than their traditional finish counterparts.
Encaustic Art Materials and General Art Terms
A technique in painting that involves a binder that is melted wax.
Fat Art Materials and General Art Terms
A description of paint. “Fat” relates to the high oil content in a particular paint.
Filler Art Materials and General Art Terms
Pigment that is inert which is mixed into paint in order to thicken it. It is also known as an “extender.” Often times it is much cheaper and more efficient for a painter to use a filler especially if the painting requires a large amount of paint.
Fixative Art Materials and General Art Terms
A solution sprayed on drawings to stop any possible blurring, smudging or flaking from happening to it. It is used to “fix” the drawing so it remains honest to the initial drawing. It is best to spray fixatives outdoors to prevent the spray (usually alcohol or shellac) from entering the lungs.
Fresco Painting
A technique used in painting that distributes pigments in water. The pigments are then put on a damp plaster wall. The binder is made from the wall and the support. The two methods of fresco painting are buon fresco and fresco secco.
Fugitive Colors Art Materials and General Art Terms
Colors in dyes or pigments that fade when hit with sunlight.
Gesso Art Materials and General Art Terms
A material of white ground that prepares a support for the future application of paint. Gesso is made up of glue, chalk and white pigment.
Gouache Art Materials and General Art Terms
Non-transparent watercolors which are often used to create illustrations.
Grissaille Art Materials and General Art Terms
A monochromatic painting (usually gray) that is often placed underneath other layers of colored glazes.
Gum Art Materials and General Art Terms
A substance originating from a plant that is soluble in water.
Gum Arabic Art Materials and General Art Terms
A substance taken from Acacia trees that functions as a medium for watercolor paints.
Hygroscopic Art Materials and General Art Terms
A term describing the absorption of moisture from the air.
Impasto Painting
A method of painting that includes heavy, rich color in its paint application.
Imprimatura Art Materials and General Art Terms
A thin layer of tinted paint spread over a ground in order change its value to a middle value and/or to reduce the absorbency of the ground.
Key Art Materials and General Art Terms
A term describing the main values of a painting or drawing. “High key” is the description of a work that remains predominately in lighter values; “Low key” is the description of a work that contains mostly darker values.
Lake Art Materials and General Art Terms
A dye that neither migrates or bleeds, and has been processed either electrically or chemically to join to a particle.
Latex Art Materials and General Art Terms
The spread of a solid polymeric material throughout a solution of water.
Leaching Art Materials and General Art Terms
A method of removing extra liquid through a porous substance.
Lean Art Materials and General Art Terms
A term describing paint that has been diluted with a spirit and thus contains a reduced oil content.
Levigating Art Materials and General Art Terms
A process of pulverizing pigments by washing them with water in order to remove any organic matter or salts that cling to them.
Lightfast Art Materials and General Art Terms
Having the ability to resist bleaching or fading that occurs from light exposure.
Loom State Art Materials and General Art Terms
Canvas not yet prepared for paint application. Priming a canvas or sizing a canvas are examples of how a canvas may be prepared for paint.
Marouflage Art Materials and General Art Terms
A process using glue to join a painting the size of a mural onto a wall; the painting may be created on fabric or paper.
Masstone Art Materials and General Art Terms
Also known as mass color. Masstone is the undiluted pigment color of a paint.
Mat Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of cardboard often used to showcase pieces of artwork. A window cut is removed from its center and it is placed over the piece of artwork. It is then attached to a backboard, such as foam board, to sandwich the artwork and protect it.
Migration Art Materials and General Art Terms
Migration refers to the movement of a dye or pigment in a dried film.
Mixed Media Art Materials and General Art Terms
In the visual arts, mixed media is artwork created out of two or more visual art mediums. Mixed media art should not be confused with multimedia art, because the former refers to artwork that involves multiple traditional visual art media. The latter refers to art created from a combination of non-visual elements with visual art (such as sound and photography) or combinations with various other arts (like dance and literature).
Monomer Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of material having a low molecular weight; it has the ability to chemically react with other materials to create a polymer.
Mosaic Art Materials and General Art Terms
A picture created from small colored pieces of materials such as stone, glass or tile.
Mural Art Materials and General Art Terms
A term referring to a painting completed on a wall surface.
Museum Board Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of ply board created from buffered cellulose or rags of cotton. It is made to create a neutral, stable surface.
Patina Sculpture
The natural effects of time and air exposure on a surface. Specifically, it may refer to the greenish brown effect that takes place on bronze pieces from exposure and aging. This term may also apply to the build up of characteristics that occur on leather products over time.
Pentimento Art Materials and General Art Terms
A certain state of paintings that occurs when pigments containing lead become transparent from aging. The process reveals layers of paint applied earlier on.
Pigments Art Materials and General Art Terms
Colored particles combined with adhesive binders in order to create paint.
Plasticizer Art Materials and General Art Terms
Ingredients mixed into paint in order to increase the paint’s fluidity or to bring it to a state in which it can be quickly dissolved.
Plein Air Art Materials and General Art Terms
A French term that means “open air.” It is applied to paintings that are completed outside right in front of the subject matter.
Polymer Art Materials and General Art Terms
A number of monomers joined together to create repeating forms.
Preservative (paint) Art Materials and General Art Terms
A material that inhibits microorganisms from growing in organic matter.
Primer Art Materials and General Art Terms
A surfacing material used to coat a support to get it ready for paint application.
PVA Art Materials and General Art Terms
A synthetic resin used in varnishes and works as a painting medium. Its full name is polyvinyl acetate.
Refraction Art Materials and General Art Terms
Light that is bent as a result of penetrating various mediums that cause the light to change its course.
Refractive Index Art Materials and General Art Terms
The rate at which the light travels in a vacuum in relation to its traveling speed within a substance.
Resins Art Materials and General Art Terms
A term that relates to fusible transparent materials. They are the main ingredients in plastics and paints.
Saponification Art Materials and General Art Terms
The way in which a paint binder changes into a discolored or transparent state. This process occurs due to alkaline conditions or as a result of the paint being in a moist environment.
Scumbling Art Materials and General Art Terms
A painting technique that involves applying layers of translucent or opaque paint on a painted area. The technique is used to change the hue or look of the surface while maintaining at least a portion of the painted image underneath.
Secco Art Materials and General Art Terms
An Italian term meaning “dry.” It is a technique of creating paintings on walls that involves applying paint directly on dry or lime plaster. The plaster is moistened prior to any paint application.
Xylography Art Materials and General Art Terms
A term referring to woodblock printing. It also may refer to creating wood grain reproductions that are used as a decoration element in homes and businesses.
Whiting Art Materials and General Art Terms
Purified chalk that is ground with water and then dried in order to create pigment.
White Spirits Art Materials and General Art Terms
A turpentine substitute; it is used to dilute oil paint.
Wetting Agent Art Materials and General Art Terms
Also known as a Water Tension Breaker. A substance mixed into water-based paints or water in order to lessen the tension of the liquid’s surface.
Wet on Wet Art Materials and General Art Terms
The process of applying fresh paint on a surface that is still wet with other paint. Also, called "Wet-into-wet". The term applies both to like-and-like paint and mixed techniques (i.e. tempura into wet oil).
Wax Resist Art Materials and General Art Terms
Using a waxy medium to create a design; a wash of color is layered over the design to create a desired effect.
Water Tension Breaker Art Materials and General Art Terms
A substance mixed into water-based paints or water in order to lessen the tension of the liquid’s surface.
Sketch Drawing
A sketch is a quickly drawn, usually simple, drawing that is completed often for practice, as a means to remember information for a future piece of artwork, or as a means to decipher the essence of a person, place or thing. Artists frequently use thumbnail sketches in order to work out the best composition and design for a piece of artwork to save time and prevent mistakes.
Sinopia Art Materials and General Art Terms
A reddish brown chalk that can be used to draw out frescoes. It can also be used to create sketches and preparatory drawings for other works.
Silverpoint Art Materials and General Art Terms
A process of drawing using a piece of silver wire to draw on ground that has been prepared with Chinese white. Da Vinci is one example of an artist who used this method to create many of his drawings. The technique allows one to create many strokes and faulty marks before finding the “ideal” mark on a drawing because the silver wire leaves only a small trace of metal at each stroke.
Shellac Art Materials and General Art Terms
A yellowish resin made into varnish; shellac is created from the secretions of the LAC insect.
Sgraffito Art Materials and General Art Terms
A decorative technique of cutting into a surface in order to reveal other various contrasting colors beneath it.
Sfumato Painting
A type of fine art painting technique that involves the softening of hard outlines through the use of gradual blending of tones into each other through thin glazes; its purpose is to create the illusion of space. Fumare (to smoke) is the Latin origin of the word. Leonardo da Vinci is credit with coining the term. Chiaroscuro is a painting technique that is opposite to it.
Size Art Materials and General Art Terms
A substance spread over a surface that acts as a penetrating sealer. It is used to reduce its absorbency as well as to separate it from other coatings.
Squaring Up Art Materials and General Art Terms
A way to transfer a picture to a bigger or smaller format without changing the picture’s proportions.
Strainer Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of wooden chassis that is used for textile supports. Its corners are firm and stable.
Stretcher Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of wooden chassis used for textile supports. It contains corners that are expandable.
Study Art Materials and General Art Terms
A flushed out painting or drawing created from one section or multiple sections of what the final composition will be.
Support Art Materials and General Art Terms
The main support for a painting, including any items such as cotton, paper, wall…etc
Tempera Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of painting technique that involves egg yolk (or whole egg), an oil mixture, and water as the binder for the paint. The term also refers to inexpensive opaque paints.
Thixotropic Art Materials and General Art Terms
A term referring to materials that are viscous and heavy if left alone; however, if impacted (whether through stirring or shaking it for example) the material will start to move easily.
Toner Art Materials and General Art Terms
A dye that is not laked that can migrate or bleed in paint films that are dry.
Tooth Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of texture that features a small even grain. It allows for some attachment for layers of a medium, such as paint or pastel.
Traction Art Materials and General Art Terms
The traveling or movement of one oil paint layer over another layer of paint.
Tragacanth Art Materials and General Art Terms
A binding agent created from Astragalus plants; the gum functions in pastels and watercolor paints.
Tromple L’oeil Art Materials and General Art Terms
A French term meaning “deceive the eye.” It refers to a painting that is done with immaculate detail so as to deceive the viewer that what he/she is viewing is in actuality the object, not an illusion of the object.
Varnish Art Materials and General Art Terms
A transparent-like liquid that changes into a solid film once it dries.
Veduta Art Materials and General Art Terms
An Italian term that means “view.” It is a close representation of an urban landscape.
Venice Turpentine Art Materials and General Art Terms
A combination of an oil and a resin created from the larch. It usually functions as a means to make diluents and mediums for oil paintings.
Verdaccio Art Materials and General Art Terms
An old Italian term referring to green underpainting.
Volatile Art Materials and General Art Terms
A state of being of a substance is said to be “volatile” if it quickly evaporates.
Watercolor Art Materials and General Art Terms
A painting technique that involves a binder created from water-soluble gum. Opaque and transparent watercolors and their many colors may be used.
Boucle Carpets/Rugs
A fabric that is either woven or knitted that contains a design that is curled or looped.
Coir Carpets/Rugs
A natural matting that is very durable. It is created from the exterior husks of coconuts. Most of them originate from Kerala, India.
Jute Art Materials and General Art Terms
A soft natural matting that is created from the interior bark of corchorus plants from southern India.
Pile (surface) Carpets/Rugs
A surface that is made from carpet threads; the threads may be manipulated in a variety of ways to create the "look." Threads may be twisted, looped, cut...etc to create the desired effect.
Pile Density Carpets/Rugs
Also known as "average pile yarn weight." It is the pile yarn weight within a carpet's unit volume. Carpets are denser when the turfts are nearer to each other. It is desirable for a carpet to have high pile density because the durability of the carpet will be greater.
Seagrass Carpets/Rugs
A type of marine plant that grows in the countries of Vietnam and China.
Sisal Carpets/Rugs
An African and South American low-cost grass that may be tightly or roughly woven together.
Tufted Carpets/Rugs
Pile material attached to a backing material prior to the fixing of a 2nd layer of backing material. It lends more structural strength to the unit.
Twist Carpets/Rugs
Multiple or a couple pieces of yarn twisted together in order to make a carpet. Greater durability and a better maintenance of a carpet's texture are made possible the more closely the yarn threads are twisted together.
Underlay Carpets/Rugs
An underlay is positioned beneath a carpet and aids to shield the carpet from daily wear-and-tear.
Acrylic Eggshell Paint Painting
A type of paint that is water-based and often used to paint interior woodwork. When it dries it gives off a soft sheen because of its silky finish.
acrylic colors Painting
Acrylic colors are created by spreading out pigments in a transport made from a polymethyl methacrylate solution mixed in mineral spirits. They are different from polymer colors (containing acrylic and other resins mixed in water) and may be referred to as plastic paints or straight acrylic colors to differentiate between them. Acrylic colors can be easily taken off with turpentine and mineral spirits; moreover, they dry fast and do not yellow over time. Because of these characteristics, acrylic colors are good for inpainting in order to repair damaged or destroyed parts in conservation work.
Acrylic Primer Painting
A water-based paint used to seal fiberboard and wood. The paint prepares the surface for paint application. If for example, one is painting with oil paint, a primer is needed to prevent the oil in the paint from seeping into the surface of a canvas or board.
Aging Painting
Painting techniques that strive to emulate the effect of usage and time on surfaces.
Base Coat Painting
The first paint application layer on a surface. It is applied prior to decorative paint finishes.
Colorwash Painting
A water-based colored translucent glaze spread over a surface to give a certain effect.
Combing Painting
A painting technique that involves scrapping the teeth of a comb through a surface glaze in order to uncover the surface beneath it.
Crackle Glaze Painting
A type of traditional glaze that involves layering water-based and oil-based paints that dry at different time intervals. The term also refers to pushing a color onto the top layer of varnish; this technique creates thin cracks over the paint application's surface.
Dead Flat Oil Painting
Paint that gives off a matte finish; it is oil-based and is utilized in many traditional ways.
Eggshell Painting
A type of low-sheen finish that can be found in a variety of colors. This type of paint is applied over surfaces similarly to gloss paint.
Gloss Painting
A type of paint that is washable and durable. It can be found in a variety of colors.
Limewash Painting
A type of paint featuring a velvety matte finish once it dries. It gives off a translucent finish and is usually used to tint porous surfaces.
Matte Emulsion Painting
A type of paint that is water-based that features a flat looking finish that does not reflect light.
Matte Emulsion Glaze Painting
A water-based paint that dilutes color. It is often spread over a surface's top coat as a protective layer.
Metallic Emulsion Painting
A type of water-based paint that is used for its decorative effect on surfaces. It can be purchased in several different forms, including in a pot, spray can or tube.
Silk Emulsion Painting
A type of water-based acrylic or vinyl paint that contains a soft sheen. It is a durable, hardwearing paint that comes in either a satin or matte finish.
Oil-based Paint Painting
Oil-based paints including satin, eggshell and wipeable gloss finishes. Each type of oil-based paint is ideal for different purposes. Eggshell and satin are best for wood or walls. Gloss is best for woodwork pieces.
Primers Painting
Paints (either oil-based or water-based) that function as sealers on unpainted surfaces. Primers stop the layers of paint from seeping into a surface.
Scumble Glaze Painting
A colored thin layer of an acrylic glaze or transparent paint over a surface.
Specialist Finish Painting
A type of finish designed for a particular area requiring special treatment. Examples of such areas may include kitchen cupboards or radiators. A kitchen cupboard might require a concrete melamine paint, whereas a radiator may require a silicone paint. Each paint must cater to the particular area it is layered on.
Undercoat Painting
The first layer of paint spread over the primer; it creates the correct color base for the following coat finishes.
Block Printing Paper
A design pattern made from wood blocks featuring a carved pattern template.
Flock Paper
Fibers chopped in small pieces that are dropped over a pattern printed on a section of adhesive material. The aim of flock is to give the appearance of velvet.
Lining Paper Paper
Simple, plain paper that functions as a wallpaper's top layer or as a surface region for paint application.
Prepasted Paper
The bottom side of wallpaper that has been prepared with an adhesive to attach to a wall. When moisted, it adheres to a wall's surface.
Run Number Paper
Every roll of paper contains a run number. The number includes the dye-lot and pattern information. A room generally uses rolls of paper with the same number.
Canvas (textiles) Textiles
A type of long-wearing tightly woven cloth that contains a rougher texture; it often used for practical purposes. Canvas may be made from materials such as acrylics, cottons or a combination of other materials. It is often treated in order to be water-resistant.
Cashmere Textiles
An elegant, very soft fiber made of wool created from Kashmir goats' hair. The goats are bred in Iraq, India, Tibet, China, Mongolia, and Iran.
Felt Textiles
A fabric created from hair, wool or a combination of made-made fibers; it is a non-woven fabric.
Fibre Mix Textiles
A combination of silk and linen, viscose, and cotton; it is created to alter the properties of a material in order to help it maintain its shape.
Fleece Textiles
A sturdy pile fabric created from polyster. It drys fast and will not pull or distort its shape; it is lighter and warmer than its wool counterpart.
Jumbo Chord Textiles
Ribs of corduroy that contain a cut-pile weave; it is created from cotton.
Lycra Textiles
Man-made combinations of fibers of nylon, wool and cotton. It does not easily distort its shape because of its stretching and recovery ability.
Organzas Textiles
A sheer fabric that is softly textured and is made up of various layers that contrast one another. Combinations may include transparency vs .translucency or shine vs. matte.
Ripstock Textiles
A breathable, light fabric that does not tear easily. It may be treated to be waterproof or be surfaced with silver glass bead reflective surface in order to make it more easily seen.
Silk Textiles
A natural fiber that is soft and luxurious; it may be woven into many different types of weights. Most often silk is made from cultivated worms.
Synthetic Fibers Textiles
Man-made threads including acrylic, polyster, and viscose. Synthetic fibers often closely mirror natural fibers but contain properties that enhance their durability and resistance to water and stains.
Textured Textiles
The way in which a fabric is presented; for example, a fabric may be pleated, smocked or crushed.
Tweed Textiles
Woven material created from threads of colored wool; it may be a medium-weight or heavy-weight.
Upholstery Fabric Textiles
Durable fabric created to be resistant to stains and able to withstand heat.
Viscose Textiles
A kind of rayon that features a smooth fabric created from cellulose; viscose resembles silk.
Yarn Textiles
Bunches of threads twisted to create a continuous strand. Yarn is most often used in woven fabrics are used for knitting.
aniline Leather
Debossing Leather
A finish that gives a decorative touch. It is often created using uniform designs from a machine or using special tools. The design is heat-pressed onto the surface of leather. The result is the creation of a series of depressions (as opposed to raised marks in embossing) that add up to form the design.
Embossing Leather
A finish that gives a decorative touch. It is often created using uniform designs from a machine or using special tools. The design is heat-pressed onto the surface of leather. The result is the creation of a series of raised marks (as opposed to depression marks used in debossing) that make up the form of the design.
Exotics Leather
A term referring to the types of leathers from reptiles such as snakes, lizards, and crocodiles. Exotics can be purchased in smaller quantities than hides made into leather made available through the meat industry.
Finishing Leather
There are numerous kinds of ways in which the surface of leather can be finished after tanning. Finishing lends an original appearance to a piece of hide, hides blemishes, changes the surface color and protects the hide from wear. The lower the quality of a hide, the more finishing is needed to create a decent leather.
Grain (Leather) Leather
The grain is a term relating to the degree of quality of a piece of leather. Several factors determine the quality grade, including the level and condition of any marking exposure after the removal of any hair folllicles, and any damage on the leather's surface. A leather contains a better grain if it was taken from a younger animal.
Hair-on-hide Leather
A term referring to the hair follicles not removed from a piece of leather in order to create a 'wild' effect. Every hide contains an original pattern and color.
Imitation Leather Leather
A type of synthetic leather frequently made from vinyl. Imitation leather does not contain as many of the usual characteristics and natural blemishes from real leather.
Laser-cut Leather
A process done by a machine that cuts complex platterns into a piece of leather.
Leather Leather
A broad term referring to all skins and hides that have been tanned. Leather is a natural product; most leather is made available as a by-product of the meat industry. Leather from cows, sheep, pigs and goats are the typical sources of leather. Other types of leather from sources such as crocodiles and snakes are not as readily available, but they can be purchased in small quantities.
Tanning Leather
The process of preparing and preserving the structure of a hide. Hides are prepared through sanitation, a cleaning process and then worked on in order to create a quality consistent product.
Split Leather
Because most hides are too thick for the majority of applications, hides are "split" to create a uniform thickness. The process is done by a series of machine-cut layers which are then shaved to create uniform skins.
Suede Leather
A soft, velvety appearance of a leather surface usually created by buffing a split of good quality.
Reclaimed/Antiqued Carpentry
Wood boards that have been salvaged in order to create something new.
Bamboo Carpentry
A type of grass that takes on the characteristics of wood over an extended amount of time.
Bookmatching Carpentry
Wood veneer sheets that are positioned to create a symmetrical effect.
Cane Carpentry
A multi-purpose and long-wearing climbing palm that thrives in the subtropics and tropics.
Cork Carpentry
Cork is taken from the bark of the evergreen cork tree. To prepare cork, the bark of the tree is first granulated, and then combined with resins. It is then pressed and baked into sheet form or tile. Most of the world's cork comes from Portugal.
Hardwood Carpentry
A group of various evergreen or deciduous trees that thrive in tropical or temperate regions.
Limed/Liming Carpentry
A process that lightens the grain of wood by softening the appearance of timber.
MDF Carpentry
Medium-density fiberboard created from wood particles adhered together with resin.
Abstract Expressionism Art Styles/Movements
Starting in the 1940s in New York City, Abstract Expressionism is often considered the golden age of American art. Strong emotions are conveyed in this style of art through texture and brushstroke on (often) huge canvases. Painting for painting sake is a dominate force in the movement. Jackson Pollock, Willem de Kooning, and Franz Kline are a few of this movement’s well-known artists. Individual expression and the liberty it brings permeates all of the artwork from this movement also known as “New York School.”
abstraction-creation, abstraction creation Art Styles/Movements
A group of abstract artists that got together during the 1930s in Paris. The exact type of abstract artwork that the artists created varied, and included artists involved in suprematism to constructivism. An annual periodical was written by the group under the name Abstraction-Creation.
Classical Art Styles/Movements
A of style of artwork referring to ancient Roman or Greek architexture and art. Most of the artwork focuses upon symmetry and geometry, as opposed to freedom of personal expression.
Byzantine Art Styles/Movements
A style of artwork characterized by big domes, mosaics and arches originating in the 4th Century from the eastern Roman Empire.
Charcoal Art Materials and General Art Terms
Wood that has been burned and compressed; it is a tool used to create drawings. Charcoal is a versatile drawing medium; numerous types of marks can be made. It comes in a few varieties, including soft or hard sticks.
Dry Brush Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of painting technique that involves putting a small amount of paint onto a dry brush. The effect of applying the brush to a surface is a rough, scratchy visual effect.
Pastels Art Materials and General Art Terms
A mixture of gum, water and pigments combined and then pressed to create a stick for artists to use. The sticks can be used over a variety of surfaces, including paper and canvas. There are different kinds of pastels, including oil pastels and chalk pastels. The term also refers to the name of artworks created using the medium of pastels.
Pencil Art Materials and General Art Terms
A tool used to create drawings. It may consist of colored wax, charcoal, or graphite that is in the form of a stick. The stick’s end point may be sharpened and held under a surface of wood. It may also be placed in a mechanical holder for better handling.
Art and Crafts Movement Art Styles/Movements
A style of art in the late 1800s that stressed the ornamentation of interiors. Objects were ornamented, surface coverings will decked with fringes and furniture was decorative. The movement influenced predominately the United States and England. During this time in each country, the concepts of mass production were in full tilt, and so using different kinds of styles in the same product was promoted. A British man named William Morris put down the opulence of these developments and instead promoted using quality craftsmanship and design. It was this reaction to the industrial developments of reproduction that brought about the movement. Artists tried to bring to people’s attention the important of the individual creativity and worth of each human – as opposed to being a nobody in the growing world of development and progress in technology and industry. The arts most influenced by the movement include furniture design, architecture and the decorative arts. Examples of influential artists of the style include John Ruskin, Walter Crane, Frank Wright and Dirk Van Erp.
The Ashcan School Art Styles/Movements
A number of realist paints from the United States began making artwork that started the Ashcan School. The catalyst for the movement was Robert Henri. Henri, along with newspaper illustrators Everett Shinn, William Glackens, and John Sloan, worked together to create was they considered the realities of life as being beautiful and thus true art. Their artwork featured rough urban life, the poor and the disenfranchised in the United States. Their style was loose and not like the refined art pushed in American art academies. Paint was applied thickly and brushstrokes were textured over the canvas.
As time went on, these artists along with Ernest Lawson, Maurice Prendergast, and Arthur Davies worked to created a self-organized and self-selected exhibit that created history in 1908 because it defied the academies and was seen as a symbol of rebellion against the typical art of the day. The exhibition acted as a model for the famous exhibit The Armory Show of 1914, because it did not include prizes or a jury.
Baroque Art Styles/Movements
The Baroque movement began around 1600 in Europe as a result of the formulaic Mannerist style that permeated art during the late Renaissance time period. Baroque art leaned more towards realism and the emotions, and was more simplistic than Mannerist artwork. A big proponent of the style was the Catholic Church, as it was a major patron of art during that time period. Key artists of the movement included Gianlorenzo Bernini, Annibale Carracci, and Caravaggio. Over time, Baroque art was replaced by the Rococo style.
Bauhaus Art Styles/Movements
A design, architecture and art school begun in 1919 in Germany. Its style centered around geometric efficient design and a stress on the significance of the materials used in the art created. Walter Gropius was the catalyst of the movment; he was made the head of two art schools in Weimar which he combined to create the Bauhaus. The school focused on teaching practical craftsmanship and creating good designs that had the potential to be mass-produced. The school moved a couple of times; in 1933 the school was shutdown by the Nazis. The school continues to play an influential role in art today, whether it be typography, weaving, furniture or architecture. Key figures from the school include Marcel Breuer, Paul Klee, Lyonel Feininger, Wassily Kandinsky, and Laszlo Moholy-Nagy.
Black Mountain College Art Styles/Movements
The Black Mountain College, a school located in North Carolina, made history when it became the center for American cultural production in the middle of the 20th Century. The school promoted the artistic and educational experimentation not usually pushed by other schools at the time. Josef and Anni Albers were a couple of the first teachers of the school. After the Bauhaus closed because of the Nazis, they came to the United States. They, along with other individuals such as Walter Gropius, Jacob Lawrence, Willem de Kooning, Robert Motherwell, John Cage, Alfred Kazin, Merce Cunningham, and Paul Goodman, played an enormous role in the minds and lives of the students at the school. The school became the model for what an American experimental education system should be. After reaching its limit in terms of influence of its students and other establishments, the school closed. However, its legacy lives on due to its influence through the generations of students attending other art schools.
Bloomsbury Group Art Styles/Movements
A group formed by friends that shared a common attitude towards life. The group met frequently starting in 1904 in Bloomsbury, London at Thoby Stephen’s home. The meetings were centered around conversations on literature, philosophy, and art. Out of the group emerged artistic and literary styles, as well as theories on psychology and theory. Examples of group members include Clive Bell, John Maynard Keynes, Desmond McCarthy, Leonard Woolf, Saxon Sydney Turner, Lytton Strachey and Virginia Woolf.
Constructivism Art Styles/Movements
1915-1940s
Germany was the main location of the activity stemming from the Constructivism movement that developed from the Russian avant-garde; however the movement also developed in other areas such as the United States and Paris. The movement was dedicated to abstraction and devotion to modernity. The art produced from the movement was non-emotional and often experimental in nature. The artwork was often boiled down to basic elements in order to create order in art which its members thought would lead to greater peace and unity throughout the world. Ben Nicholson, Naum Gabo, Antoine Pevsner, and El Lissitzky are examples of artists that promoted the development and expansion of the movement.
Cubism Art Styles/Movements
1908-1914
Cubism emerged in the year of 1907 in the city of Paris through the efforts of Georges Braque and Pablo Picasso. The movement embraced the idea of viewing objects in a new way: by breaking down subject matter and redefining it through multiple points of view at the same time. The popularity of the movement grew as artists saught to find a new way to represent reality. The first phase of the movement known as the Analytic phase tried to recreate objects as how the mind saw them – as opposed to the eyes. The second phase, titled the Synthetic phase, sought to recreate objects in simple forms and brighter colors. Key artists that continued to develop the ideas of Cubism include: Robert Delaunay, Francis Picabia, Jean Metzinger, Marcel Duchamp and Fernand Léger.
Dada Art Styles/Movements
1916-1920s
The Dada movement included a heavy undercurrent of a spontaneity and chance. It emerged among European writers and artists starting around 1915 and lasting until 1922. The term “Dada” was coined by Tristan Tzara who stabbed a dictionary with a knife in the effort to create a name for the growing movement. Artists and writers of the time were growingly becoming fed up with the killings and atmosphere created from World War One; as a result, they tried to shake people up to take notice and to change things. Key artists of the movement include; George Grosz, Otto Dix, Hans Richter, Jean Arp, and Marcel Duchamp.
Blaue Reiter Art Styles/Movements
1911
Blaue Reiter was formed in order to secure exhibition space for artists seeking to express their individual expressions. The title of the movement was coined by Wassily Kandinsky’s drawing of a blue horseman. Kandinsky, Franz Marc, and Gabriele Munter were the key artists that started the movement in December 1911. They had an exhibition that included several other artists such as Albert Bloch, Robert Delaunay, Elizabeth Epstein, August Macke and Henri Rousseau. A second exhibit followed that was much larger which included the famous artists of Pablo Picasso, Braque, Klee and Goncharova. Thought it did not last long, the movement was significant in that it brought German Expressionism to its highest level of painting. It also encouraged the idea of individual expression and not following any accepted values that might restrain an artist’s creativity.
De Stijl Art Styles/Movements
1917- 1931
De Stijl is an art movement that was devoted to simple forms and complete abstraction. Geometric shapes such as the square, along with primary colors and black and white were the main focuses of the movement’s creative expression. Piet Mondrian, an artist from the Netherlands, was the key catalyst that started the movement. Neo-Plasticism was a manifesto written by Mondrian in 1920 that fueled the movement. Another artist from the Netherlands named Theo van Doesberg worked to expand the influence of the movement’s ideas through his journal De Stijl begun in 1917. Other key artists in the movement include J.J.P. Oud, George Vantongerloo, and Gerrit Rietveld.
Expressionism Art Styles/Movements
Expressionism (1905-1925) is a movement characterized by exaggeration and distortion in order to create an emotional impact. It did not just affect the visual arts, but it also affected other disciplines such as literature, theatre, cinema and dance. The aim of the movement in art was to try to visually express subjective emotions and responses experienced by the artist from the events and forms around him. He does this through the use of manipulating art elements in volatile ways, exaggeration, fantasy, primitivism, and distortion. The reproduction of the visible world were not the aim of the movement; rather, the artist’s own individuality was of the utmost in important in recreating the true meaning of the things according to HIS sensibilities. Expressing something intensely was key. Key artists of the movement include: Max Beckmann, Otto Dix, Lionel Feininger, George Grosz, Ernst Ludwig Kirchner, August Macke, andinsky, Emil Nolde, Max Pechstein, Oskar Kokoschka, Alfred Kubin, and Edvard Munch.
Fauvism Art Styles/Movements
1905-1908
Fauvism was the fore-runner of the avant-garde movements that sprung up in Europe during the 20th century. Unnatural, bright, often unusual combinations were put together in this movement’s artwork. The underlying current of the movement was expressionistic. Distorted landscapes filled with color was typical. The name “Fauvism” was coined when a critic was commenting on a sculpture located in the same space of the group’s first exhibition. The critic’s disdainful comment of, “Donatello among the wild beasts!” caught on and was gladly accepted by the Fauvist artists. Key artists in the movement include Rouault, Derain, Vlaminck, Braque, Dufy and Matisse.
Fluxus Art Styles/Movements
1960-1965
Begun in New York in the 1960s which eventually expanded into Japan and Europe, Fluxus included a fusion of several past movements, including Bauhaus, Zen, and Dada. Expansive gestural marks founded upon artistic notions coupled with burlesque characterized the movement. The most well-known artist of the movement is Yoko Ono. However, the movement is not just a stylistic way of doing art, but a sensibility – an attitude to creating art. Often the artists that align themselves with the movement seek to alter social, political, and aesthetic ideas of how things should or could be done. Other key artists of the movement include: Joseph Beuys, Robert Filliou and Dick Higgins.
Futurism Art Styles/Movements
1909-1944
An avant-garde art movement in Italy that was inspired by technology, modernity and speed. The machine age and war was celebrated, and so was Fascism. Unlike most other art movements, Futurism was different in that it was a self-invented period. Artists of the movement sought to create an understanding of a person’s memories and what one actually sees. The way in which futurist artists represented the world impacted several future art movements such as Russian Constructivism and Cubism, as well as famous artists such as Marcel Duchamp and Robert Delaunay. Examples of futurist artists include: Filippo Tommaso Marinetti, Giacomo Balla, Umberto Boccioni, Carlo Carrà, and Gino Severini.
Group of Seven Art Styles/Movements
Begun in the early 1900s, the Group of Seven emerged when a group of Canadian artists became aware that their style was rather similar. The group of artists that eventually formed put on an exhibit in 1920 that included J.E.H. MacDonald, Franklin Carmichael, Frank Johnston, Arthur Lismer, Lawren S. Harris, Frederick Varley and A.Y. Jackson. They gradually established their original style and became increasingly known around Canada. The legacy that will follow them will include the fact that they were the first group of European descent to visually express the emotional impact of the Artic in paintings.
The group’s exhibitions culminated in 1931 when MacDonald passed away. However, a new group emerged that called themselves the Canadian Group of Artists which included the original members Harris, Casson, Lismer, Jackson, and Carmichael. Both groups continue to play a role in influencing their country’s artworks.
Harlem Renaissance Art Styles/Movements
Begun as a number of literary conversations in Manhattan, this African-American cultural movement eventually became known as the Harlem Renaissance which involved a high level of creativity among African-Americans. The essence of the movement was about celebrating the culture of African-Americans and seeking to express it in a new way. Alain LeRoy Locke, a sociologist, wrote a book entitled, “The New Negro” that had a big influence in encouraging many of the new immigrants moving into northern cities to take pride in their heritage and to express it. Other key men that heavily influenced the movement include the editor W.E.B. Du Bois (editor of The Crisis Magazine) and Marcus Garvey (founder of the Universal Negro Improvement Association).
Hudson River School Art Styles/Movements
(1825-1875 )The Hudson River School refers to a group of American landscape painters that formed together in the years 1825 to 1875. The group was full of patriotic spirit – a trait that gave them a boost in popularity among people of their time. The paintings of the artists were themed around the aesthetic qualities of their homeland. The main promoters of the group included Thomas Cole, Thomas Doughty and Asher B Durand.
Impressionism Art Styles/Movements
1867-1886
A turning point was made in European painting during the mid 1800s when a group titled the “Impressionists” started to use new scientific information regarding the physics of color in their paintings. They paintings they created were completed by filling canvases with small touches of color that mirrored the impressions of light and color the artists saw outdoors. The focus of the painting method was to stress an individual’s way of SEEING the subject matter. The fleeting moment of seeing the subject matter - its essence – was essential. Most of the Impressionist paintings were full of color – tiny details were often not included. Examples of some of the Impressionist painters include: Pierre Auguste Renoir , Edouard Manet, Camille Pissaro, Edgar Degas, Alfred Sisley, Claude Monet and Berthe Morisot. Each artist of the group chose their own subject matter based on their preferences. Degas, for example, chose to focus on horse races and ballet dancers. Monet chose to focus on gentle changes seen in the atmosphere. The movement sparked other smaller art movements, including: Pointillism, Art Nouveau and Fauvism. Pointillism emerged from the idea of using small dots of color which then merged together the further the eye stood from the painting. Seurat was one of the major forerunners of the movement. Other artists associated with movements inside Impressionism include:, Paul Gauguin, Henri Matisse, Henri de Toulouse-Lautrec, Paul Signac, and Camille Pissarro.
Impressionism continued to influence many artists today in encouraging them to look at subject matter in new ways.
Indian River School Art Styles/Movements
In the 1950s and early 1960s artists grouped together to create dramatic and power-filled images portraying scenes in Florida. A major influence on the group was A.E. “Beanie” Backus, a Florida naturalist. The group used materials such as masonite, upson board, canvas board and canvas to create their work. Rather than going through the traditional route of galleries, the artists sold the work themselves along highways for a number of years.
Mannerism Art Styles/Movements
An art movement begun in 1520 and ending around the 1600s. The movement sprang up as a result of the solving of representational problems that artists had puzzled over for centuries. During the Early Renaissance and High Renaissance artists observed from nature in order to create their characteristic styles. As knowledge was learned to solve certain representational issues, artists were able to focus more on style than on nature to guide their particular tastes in artwork. The result was a “manner.” In the Mannerist paintings, several rules went out the window. For example, artists allowed spaces in their work to be ambiguous, there did not need to exist a focal point, and figures were often manipulated through such things as distortions or unnatural twisting of the limbs to suit the taste of the artist. Filled with allegories and colors that clash with one another, Mannerist paintings did not seek to bring serenity to the viewers, but rather a feeling of restlessness. Key Mannerist artists include: Andrea del Sarto, Jacopo da Pontormo, and Correggio
Medieval Art Art Styles/Movements
A time of artwork that was characterized by iconographic painting illustrations of Biblical scenes. The work emerged from the early Christian church influence as well as the Roman Empire heritage. The combination of the two lent a kind of “Barbarian” artistic culture in Northern Europe because it combined with Christian and pagan art.
Early Christian artists of the period took ideas from Roman carvings, metalwork, mosaics and paintings. Much of their work is classified as being completed around 200-500, at which time the Byzantine style started to grow rapidly.
Byzantine art is often considered to be the best artwork developed in the Middle Ages because of its craftsmanship and the quality of materials used. Much of the artwork was destroyed, including many of the fine mosaics and frecos that decorated the doomed churches of the day.
Celtic art in the Middle Ages developed among the people of Britain and Ireland from around the 5th-12th centuries. In the 7th and 8th centuries, there grew a combining of the Anglo-Saxons and Germanic traditions, which in turn created a style of artwork known as “Hiberno-Saxon” (Insular art).
From 300-900 there existed what is known as the Migration Period in the Middle Ages. During this time art made from Eastern-European and Germanic peoples emerged. Several different styles of artwork were then visible, including the Polychrome style, Animal style and Christian artwork.
From 800 to the 11th century, there began Pre-Romanesque art that started when Charlemagne was crowned king. The classical influences of Roman art impacted the artists of this time resulting in Carolingian art – which in turn brought about Gothic and Romanesque art.
Romanesque art is characterized by sturdy buildings with thick walls and rounded arches and windows. The ideas for the structural characteristics were taken from ancient Rome, which is why the art period is called “Romanesque” today.
Gothic art first came about with Gothic architecture in 1140 – a divergent from Romanesque architecture. When the Abbey Church of S. Denis was being renovated in 1144, Gothic sculpture was born. The style grew in Europe and started to replace the Romanesque style. Eventually, Gothic art was mixed into Renaissance art, at which time painting on panels and in fresco became significant in the arts, as well as prints.
Also happening during the Middle Ages were developments in Islamic art. Illustrated manuscripts, textiles, ceramics, metalwork and glass were all forms of Islamic arts being developed. Muslim artists in the Near East, Islamic Spain, and Northern Africa worked in the early formative stage of the period from 600-900 and then diverged in a variety of styles starting in 900 depending on the region in which the artist worked.
Gothic Art Styles/Movements
A style of artwork that emerged between the 12th-16th century in Europe. The term refers to paintings and sculpture that contained a naturalistic style. However, predominately the term “Gothic” is known as an art movement that influenced the architectural style of the day. Intricate ornamentation, such as pointed archways and complex rib vaulting, characterize the Gothic style. The movement started in France and spread through Europe. It replaced the Romanesque architecture style before it because it allowed for stained glass windows rather than traditional mosaic decorations; moreover, it also permitted thinner walls to be built – as opposed to the thick ones in the Romanesque style. Examples of Gothic architecture include Amiens, Reims and Chartres.
Minimalism Art Styles/Movements
Minimalism refers to an art period between the 1950s-1970s that involved sculpture and paintings that focused on simplicity in both form and content. Individual expression was thrown out the window and instead artists focused on creating dramatic and intense experiences for their viewers as a result of the simplicity inherent in the objects. However, although Minimalism emerged around this time, it actually can be seen in effect in the 1700s when the, “Altar of Good Fortune” was created out of a cube and stone sphere by Goethe. In addition, other artists in the 1920s also created some artworks following the Minimalist theme. However, it was not until later the Minimalism came full-blown into the art world by artists such as Dan Flavin, Carl Andre, Ellsworth Kelly and Donald Judd. They were upset with Abstract Expressionism that included cold stark canvases, sculptures and installations. Minimalism has several cousin art movements, including Pop Art, Land Art and Conceptual Art. Conceptual Art tries to communicate a theory, Land Art focuses on simple shapes, and Pop Art tries to communicate the message of the impersonal. It was a popular art period and continues to impact artists today in the development of their ideas. Key artists of the movement include Frank Stella and Ellsworth Kelly.
Modernism Art Styles/Movements
(1890-1940) Modernism is an art movement that left tradition behind and instead utilized creative modes of expression that were different from the styles of the times from which it began. Interest grew in experimenting with new kinds of materials such as paint, and letting one’s ideas and feelings flow out into a visual reality. Portraying what was real was not important, as a result, audiences needed to pay extra attention to what they were looking at in order to understand the artist’s message. Key artists of the movement include Paul Cezanne and Edouard Manet.
Nabis Art Styles/Movements
(1888-1899) The art movement called Nabis was formed from a group of Paris artists. The group included Post-Impressionist illustrators and artists that played a big part in influencing the development of graphic art. The leader of the group was Paul Seriusier; he and the others were devoted to the work of Paul Gaughin and its color technique. They stressed putting a focus on design along with another art movement of the time called Art Nouveau. Key artists of Nabis included: Maurice Denis, Ker Xavier Roussel, Félix Vallotton, Pierre Bonnard, and Édouard Vuillard.
Neoclassical Art Styles/Movements
(1750-1880) A French art movement that began as a reaction against the Baroque style filled with emotions and feelings, and the Rococo style that was rather stuffy and overbred. Its aim was to raise again the ideals of Roman and Greek art that included unemotional and often severe forms. The classic forms from the Roman and Greek era were used to share the artists’ ideas about things such as patriotism, sacrifice, and bravery. Examples of Neo-Classical artists include: Jacques-Louis David, Sir Henry Raeburn, Sir Joshua Reynolds, Jean-Auguste-Dominique Ingres, Thomas Gainsborough, Antonio Canova and Arnold Bocklin. The art movement Romanticism acted as a counter-balanced to this movement and both styles had a big influence on artists of the time and thereafter.
College Art Association
The CAA's Professional Development Fellowship offers grants of $5,000 for students to use for an MFA program. CAA helps find work for the student in year two, as well as awarding a $10,000 subsidy to the employer as part of students' income.
Optical Art Art Styles/Movements
Optical Art is a term referring to sculptures or paintings that appear to almost vibrate because of their optical effect. Using patterns and colors, artists of the movement were able to create visual effects that disoriented its viewers. Key painters in the movement include Bridget Riley and Victor Vasarely. Two sculptors who used illusion of distortion to disorient viewers were Eric Olsen and Francisco Sobrino. The artists used what they knew about perceptive psychology to create their idealized versions of their intended results. Other cousin art movements related to Optical Art include the Constructivist Art and Kinetic movements. As it developed, Optical Art gained favor with the public; however critics were more skeptical of its operation in the art world. One famous exhibit from the Optical Art movement was “The Responsive Eye” exhibit shown in the Museum of Modern Art in New York in 1965. As a result of the exhibit, fashion designers and trendy street stores started to incorporate the style in their products. Soon after, the term became a household name.
Pop Art Art Styles/Movements
Pop Art was characterized with a focus on popular culture that expanded upon the prosperity of the post-war society in the 1950s and 1960s. The movement started in the USA but also expanded to England. The movement used subject matter such as comic strips, soda bottles, and soup cans and turned them into icons of the day. The movement was actually a child of Dadaism; it sarcastically made fun of the art world through its use of urban images, products from grocery stores, and the mass media. Pop Art was about communicating how these objects are themselves works of art. Anything seemed game to include in a Pop artist’s artwork. Andy Warhol brought the movement to the forefront when he made screen prints of the highly recognizable Coke bottle, Campbell soup tin, and famous Hollywood stars. By taking the techniques and methods of the commercial world, Warhol was able to make artwork that appeared machine-made and sleek. Unlike their introverted painting counterparts, Pop artists were extroverted in their sharing of their images with the public. The movement was immensely successful and played a big influence on artists and the public. Other key artists beside Warhol include Claes Oldenburg, Roy Lichtenstein, Roy Hamilton, Jasper Johns, and Robert Rauschenberg.
Neo Expressionism Art Styles/Movements
An art movement that filled the art galleries in the 1970s and 1980s in both the USA and Europe. The term Neo Expressionism refers to a group of varied artists who decided to start painting objects and the figure in a more recognizable way than was the current norm at the time. The movement was a reaction against the stark, abstract intellectualized art made in the 1970s. Thick impasto and the stress on big heavy forms that related to historical narrative regarding allegory, myth and symbolism marked the artwork. The movement was propelled along by advertising methods, marketing techniques and galleries seeking to promote the artwork. Underlying all the artwork was an indifferent, sometimes cold emotional tone that reflected the values of the day, as well as to the actual representation of how objects appeared. The artists used a unique approach to their presentation of objects; the objects communicated a sense of loneliness, indifference and tension. The traditional way of composing a picture was thus put away, and they artists chose not to use rich or vivid color harmonies. Key artists of the period included: Julian Schnabel and David Salle from the USA, Sandro Chia and Francesco Clemente from Italy, and Anselm Kiefer and Georg Baselitz from Germany. Because of its commercialized side and the encouragement of the public to purchase the art, as well as the actual questionable quality of the work, Neo-Expressionism proved to be rather controversial as people strove to understand how to embrace or react against the message and implications it brought.
Post-Impressionism Art Styles/Movements
(1880-1920) Post Impressionism refers to an extension of Impressionism that embraced not limiting itself to just the style characterized by Impressionism. Roger Fry coined the term for artists that included among others Georges Seurat, Paul Gauguin, Vincent van Gogh, Henri de Toulouse-Lautrec, and Paul Cézanne. With the exception of Van Gogh, they were French artists who had participated in Impressionism but gradually had moved into their own unique style of creating artwork. Each expressed theirselves differently, but they all stayed true to using the pure, bright colors and short brushstrokes of Impressionism. Post-Impressionism played a significant role in much of the artwork created in the early 1900s and beyond. Most Post-Impressionists would exhibit at the same time, however each tended to paint by himself. It was Van Gogh and Gauguin that sought to fill their artwork with their own spiritual and individual creativity. Gauguin eventually rejected naturalism in favor of what he saw as a more truer aesthetic in art which involved a thick outline and flat color in his paintings. He painted Tahitians using harmonious, often unusual, color combinations. Van Gogh is credited with sincerely using his art to convey his passionate emotions. He started out using the short brushstrokes of the Impressionists, but eventually turned to wavy, alive lines of color that were distorted. His paintings were filled with brilliant color and heavy paint. Not long after Post-Impressionism, Fauvism and Cubism came into play which used Post-Impressionistic ideas of creating intense emotions through the use of color and manipulation of line. Other key Post-Impressionist painters include Auguste Rodin and
Amedeo Modigliani.
Postmodernism Art Styles/Movements
Postmodernism refers to a wide spectrum of progressions in the fields of philosophy, architecture, art, literature, and culture, and critical theory that grew in relation to modernism. Postmodernists were disillusioned with the repercussions of WWII. They stayed away from anything that might lend itself to containing a focused hierarchy or organization element. Rather, they attached themselves to the idea of being contradictory, diverse, being unified, and being complex in the extreme. Many significant changes were happening socially, culturally and economically in the 1960s. Postmodernism in art stemmed from these changes. In fact, the term was first officially used in 1949 to explain the discontent felt in the architecture of the times, which in turn led to the postmodern architecture movement. The movement then spread to other movements – including art. In relation to art, Postmodernism is an encompassing term that refers to a range of cultural attitudes that embrace the idea of approaching art in a more spontaneous, more populist way. It covers a wide spectrum of art and artists. More than anything, it is more like an attitude and approach to creativity rather than a specific manner or style of artwork. Examples of well-known Post Modernist artists include: Jasper Johns,Frank Stella, Donald Judd, Bridget Riley, and Joseph Beuys.
Pre-Raphaelites Art Styles/Movements
(1848-1920s)
An art movement begun by Holman Hunt and John Everett Millais. They formed a group of artists that desired to emulate painting styles used before the time of Raphael. The initial group of Pre-Raphaelites included: Rossetti, his brother William, James Collinson, Thomas Woolner, Hunt and Millais. The members focused on studying medieval scenes and using powerful symbolism in their work in the desire to inspire others to thoughts of nobleness. At first critics thought that by the name the group was insinuating that they were better artists than Raphael. However, critic John Ruskin saw in their ideas a good thing which helped the group to succeed. The group eventually broke up when Millais' 'Ophelia' (1850-1851) was exhibited with great success at the Academy Exhibition.
Another Brotherhood was created that was founded in Oxford. The group, made up of Rossetti, William Morris and Edward Burne-Jones, created paintings filled with ethereal beautiful women. Millais and Hunt went off in their own individual directions, though they continued the practice of following the ideas of the first group. Other artists caught onto the ideas of the Pre-Raphaelites such as Maxwell Armfield and Frank Cadogan Cowper. Eventually movement fizzled out and other art styles replaced it around the 1920s.
A&B Rolls Film
The negative of a film that is edited. It is cut in relation to a picture and built into rolls A and B to take into consideration invisible splices, immediate changes in regard to the timing of fades and lights, and does not need opticals as it dissolves. Odd numbered shots will be contained in the A roll, and a black leader will be put in place of any missing shots. Even numbered shots will be contained in the B roll, along with black leader where all the shots are on the A roll. The negative passes through the contact printer three times. Each pass will be for either the A roll, the B roll or for the soundtrack. The print is only developed once the elements have been exposed onto print stock.
Academy Aperture Film
Also known as Full Academy Aperture. This is a full frame that is exposed by the camera. It is used in 35mm with an aspect ratio of 1.33. There exists a mask in the projector’s gate that allows the changing of the aspect ratio to 1.85 or 1.66 when the film is projected. This crops the bottom and top of the image. Older films should be projected without the mask because they were never intended to be masked in the first place.
Academy Leader Film
Also known as S.M.P.T.E. leader. Counting from 8 to 3 and then counting with one frame of two, this is the standard countdown leader. At the end of the count there is a single frame beep on the soundtrack. It is used by the lab in order to align the sound at the start of the film, as well as for the projectionist to turn on the lamp at the right time without missing the start of the film.
Automated Dialogue Recording A.D.R. Film
The term refers to dubbing that is completed as a substitution for or as an addition for location sound. Sometimes filmers prefer to use the term perhaps because it sheds light away from the fact that any dubbing was down when the short-hand of it is used in the credits – A.D.R.
Anamorphic Film
A way of making a wide screen image with standard film. It uses a particular type of lens on a projector and camera that compresses an image’s width exposed on a film that is then expanded once projected.
Answer Print Film
The very first print created by the A&B Rolls made with the optical track. Sound and picture are brought together for the first time on the same piece of print stock. If one is not satisfied with the timing of the print’s results, it is called the “First Answer Print.” And then the print can be done again to correct any mistakes. The second print would be called the, “Second Answer Print,” and the third the, “Third Answer Print” ….etc
Apple Box Film
A handy wooden box used to raise equipment or for a camera operator to stand on if need be. There are different sizes of apple boxes, including half apples and quarter apples. Sometimes they are used as seats.
Aspect Ratio Film
The ratio of the frame. Usually aspect ratios are shortened to remove the “- to 1” because they assume the ratio will always be in relation to 1. So a ratio of “1.85 to 1” is just known as “1.85.” A squarish image is taken by cameras in 16mm and 35mm with an aspect ratio of 1.33. In 35mm, this ratio is called the Academy Aperture. Frequently in 35mm the image is shot with this ratio and then masked in the projector, which will then create a wider image. In the USA, this is 1.85, and in Europe this is 1.66.
A.S.A Film
Also known as the American Standards Association – the group that first standardized the ratio of film speed measurement. It refers to a particular kind of film’s sensitivity to light; the number is specific to each film to measure Film Speed which is the same as I.E. and I.S.O.
A Wind / B Wind Animation
A film’s emulsion position. A film is printed emulsion against emulsion, and because of this any print made against the original is called an A-Wind. The original from the camera is known as a B-Wind. These are the only possibilities of the positions because there exist just two sides to a piece of film. One can tell if he/she is looking at a piece of A-Wind because the image will read correctly, as opposed to the B-Wind side that will read backwards. If one is going to use the negative from one’s camera, one will need the B-Wind track.
Backwind Film
The process of rewinding the film in a camera in order to create the shot for double exposure.
Balance Stripe Film
A stripe that stops warping from developing; it is used on 35mm strip mag stock as well as super-8 sound film.
Barndoors Film
A type of blinder used on either side of a light in order to prevent light from radiating in several different directions. Frequently gloves are worn to adjust them because of the heat generated from them.
Barney Film
A cozy wrapped around a camera in order to lessen the amount of camera noise; they are not much help on cameras that are very noisy to begin with, but they can be handy on decent cameras that need just a little help in reducing their noise. The term stems from blankets used to warm horses.
Base Film
A translucent strip that is perforated; emulsion is adhered onto the base. Both items make up a piece of film.
Bayonet Film
A kind of lens mount that is often paired with heavy lenses. They can be joined to a camera without the use of any locking. They can come in handy when a quick change of a lense is called for – as opposed to a screw-mount lense which takes longer to take on and off.
Best Light Film
A well-chosen selection of pairing a timing light with most of the footage of a film by the timer.
Black Leader Film
Also known as Black Emulsion Leader. It is an opaque black film used by a negative cutter when he/she is getting A&B rolls ready. Plastic leader cannot be used for A&B rolls because it cannot be cement spliced like an emulsion leader can be. Not all black pieces of film are the same; the more opaque it is, the better.
Blow Up Film
Going from one gauge to another in film in order to optically expand the film, such as going from 16mm to 35mm. A reduction print (see also blow down) is just the opposite, such as going from 35mm to 16mm to reduce the optical enlargement.
Blow Down Film
Colorlab in Rockville, Maryland coined this term to refer to a reduction print that is created from super 16mm to regular 16mm. It works as a substitute for pricier processes of blowing up super 16mm to 35mm. One would assume that the term blow down is the opposite of the term blow up, but actually the term reduction print is used instead.
Blimp Film
A fiberglass housing that holds a noisy camera; the house makes possible the use of the camera for sync sound filming without the addition of all the racket.
Blimped Camera Film
A camera designed to contain internal soundproofing – it does need an external blimp to prevent noise issuing from the camera. Shorthand for a camera that is internally blimped is, “BL.”
Bolex Film
A type of 16mm non-sync camera created by the Paillard Company in Switzerland. Generally, when a person refers to a Bolex camera, they are referring to a reflex spring-would model (like a Rex-4). However, there exist several different kinds of Bolex cameras. Some of them, for example, may be spring-wound, motor-driven, reflex or non-reflex.
Bounce Card Film
A card, either silver or white, that is used to create soft indirect lighting on a subject matter. The card allows light to bounce of itself and onto the subject matter, creating a delicate atmosphere. Sometimes they are used to create soft shadow areas or a soft brightening on an area. Frequently the cards are used outside because they do not need any electrical power to work. Also known as a reflector card.
Bracketing Film
Filming a shot many times using various f-stops to obtain the ideal shot. Sometimes this method is used to shoot titles. Smart camera operators will allow for a few frames of black between each of these shots to let the editor known when one shot starts and another ends.
Cable Sync Film
A somewhat old school method of sync sound shooting. It involves running a cable from a Pilottone generator from a camera to a tape recorder.
The Call Film
A series of directions that start a take. It often goes something like, “Roll sound!....Roll camera!.......Mark it!.....Action!”
Camera Noise Film
Camera noise that is heard when a camera is on. Every camera will generate some noise, which is why a barney is often used.
Camera Reports Film
A type of paperwork that goes along with each camera roll. Each camera roll has one camera reporter. The reports may be used to share specific timing concerns with the lab. Reports are important to solve problems with the footage because they allow for a written log of the coverage that is very helpful to the timers and editors to prevent any confusion as they handle the footage.
Camera Roll Film
Every roll of film shot becomes a camera roll. Numbers are used on each roll to clarify its content. The standard notation is to use the abbreviation of C.R. and then put the number of the roll. A lab puts the camera rolls together and prints them in the correct order. This allows for an organized way to go about editing the film later.
Camera Stock Film
Another word for film. Sometimes it is called camera stock so people do not confuse it with print stock.
Camera Tape Film
A type of cloth tape that is specially made for use on film shoots. It is made so no residue is left on the camera. The tape is usually an inch in width and white. Frequently people write on the tape with permanent markers to label magazines with the camera roll number and the emulsion type. Gaffer’s tape is a similar kind of tape and often they are used interchangeably.
Cement Splice Film
A specific kind of splice that negative cutters frequently use. It involves the overlap of two pieces of film joined together with film cement.
Changing Bag Film
A black bag with two compartments that contains elasticized arm holes on each side and a zipper on an end. The bag was designed to load film into magazines.
Check Print Film
A print created from an optical or inter-negative that is used to double-check the quality of an effect.
Cheat Film
A term referring to a technique used in creating films that involves altering perspectives and angles to create a better composition for shots other than the original shot taken of a scene. Frequently the method is employed to hide either props or actors not in the correct position. Something can be cheated “into” a shot or “out of” a shot.
Cinch Marks Film
The term refers to tiny vertical scratches on film rolls that occur from when a film’s end is pulled to make the roll taunt. Dust currently on the film will make a tiny scratch. Cinching may happen if there is excessive drag on the supply during the rewinding process.
Clamp Light Film
A kind of lighting fixture used in films that is made to hold a screw-in light bulb; sometimes it also contains an aluminum reflector dish. The light is mounted with a spring clamp on one side of an open door.
Clapper / Clapstick Film
Two sticks struck against each other to signify a sync sound take. Also known as the Slate or Clap Board.
C Mount Film
A type of lens with a screw mount. It is frequently used on small 16mm cameras.
Co-axial Magazine Film
A kind of magazine that contains two compartments placed right next to each other. They contain the supply and take up rolls that are mounted on the same axle on each of its ends.
Code Numbers Film
Numbers that are ink-on that are frequently placed on a mag track or workprint after syncing. They allow for the correct alignment of sound and picture during the editing process. Sometimes they are also used for general assembling of the film footage. They are often confused with Latent Edge Numbers.
Color Temperature (film) Film
The amount of color in light. Film footage is far more sensitive to changes in color temperature than the human eye is. The scientist Lord Kelvin created the scale that color temperature in film is measure by.
Conformations Film
A term referring to the various versions of a film made during the editing process. Usually dates are used to organize them. They are used on large production films to ensure that all the various editing departments are each using the correct conformation.
Conforming Film
A term referring to a negative cutter’s pairing of a workprint to the original.
Contact Printing Film
A way in which a lab replicates film. The print is created on a Contact Printer machine; the unexposed print stock and original film are attached together. As one emulsion is pressed against the other’s emulsion, they are sped by a light radiating through the original which then exposes the print stock with the same picture. There are a few kinds of contact prints, including answer prints, release prints, and workprints. In addition to contact printing, there exists optical printing which involves either creating a reduction print or making a blow up.
Continuity Film
Going smoothly from one shot of detail to another shot in a film scene using physical elements rather than choices in coverage. It can be done in a number of ways, including through the position of props, through lighting choices, through actor’s costumers or through the actors themselves.
Cookie Film
A flat board filled with holes that makes shadow patterns if placed in front of a light.
Core Film
A hub made of plastic that functions as a means to hold film minus the reel. It comes in different sizes. Small cores are 2 inches and large cores are 3 inches. A 2 inch core is often referred to as a camera core.
Coverage Film
A term used to explain the structure of breaking down a script into the many shots that permit a scene to be cut together. Coverage covers the way in which the scenes will work together cohesively. However, it does not cover the ways in which each scene will be shot in an aesthetic manner that is appropriate in order for the scenes to work together.
Critical End! Film
A label attached to a film can once it is turned into a lab if the roll ended during an essential shot of a scene. It is a precautionary label that lets the lab know to make sure to go to the very last frame in the footage.
Cross Modulation Test Film
Also known as a “cross mod.” It is a test the mixing house does along with a lab to ensure the optical track is properly exposed and developed; the test is done to make sure there is the best sound quality possible.
Cross Processing Film
A method frequently used by still photographers that involves color reversal film stock that is developed as a negative. If a positive print is struck from this negative, unique vivid colors will result.
Crystal Sync Film
A method of recording sync sound; it involves running a camera at an appropriate speed using a quartz crystal run motor (the quartz is similar to the one inserted into a quartz watch). A tape recorder records its pilottone through the use of an internal quartz crystal pilottone generator.
C.T.B. Film
An abbreviation for color temperature blue. Color correction gels are utilized in lighting in order to change the temperature of the color from tungsten to daylight; the gels come in different measurements of quarter blue, full blue, and half blue.
C.T.O. Film
An abbreviation for color temperature orange. Color correction gels are utilized in lighting to change the temperature of the color from daylight to tungsten; the gels come in different measurements of full orange, half orange, and quarter orange.
C Stand Film
A kind of light stand that contains legs that are fixed and have the ability to extend outward or together when they are not being used. Frequently they come along with an arm. A C Stand usually holds a flag.
Cue Sheets Film
A guide for the mixer to follow in order to find the sounds on the tracks during the mix. Cue sheets are organized as a grid; every track creates a column and time following rows that are measured in 35mm film footage. If the footage is 16mm, one needs to change the footage to 35mm.
Cut 1 Film
A phrase used by a director to signify the end of the filming of a shot. The term cut 1 also refers to shots at the frame-line or place where the shots are separated. The term may also refer to final work of editing a film that is known as “the edit” or “the cut.”
Realism Art Styles/Movements
(1830-1870) An art movement also referred to as the Realist school. In the movement artists removed themselves from the dramatic Romanticism going on at the time, as well as the Neoclassicism that was full of formulas to follow. Instead, the artists decided to make their paintings be full of common everyday scenes in the way they looked like in real life. Often times the paintings included some type of message, whether it be a moral message of a social or political message. The artists often used even ugly objects to get their points across. Key artists of the movement include Jean-Baptiste-Camille Corot, Gustave Courbet, J A MacNeil Whistler, John Singer Sargeant, Jean-Francois Millet, and Honore Daumier.
Renaissance Art Styles/Movements
The Renaissance is an art movement that emerged in Italy in the 1300s. The term means, “rebirth” and relates to the development of interest in the past Classical feats in the arts. The Renaissance was a time period that marked the moving away from the Middle Ages focus on religious artworks to focus on the state of the significance of mankind in society. The creativity of the individual came into the forefront and experiences became main themes through the period’s artwork. As political stability grew in Italy, as well as the economy and thus cosmopolitanism, several changes took effect. Education started to flourish, which encouraged the proliferation of libraries and academies. As the economy grew, so did the arts. Affluent persons became patrons of artists, such as the Medici family of Florence, Pope Julius II, Pope Leo X, and the Sforza family of Milan. Interest grew in relation to the intellectual values of the Classical world.
One significant artist of this time period was Leonardo da Vinci. He is often viewed as the archetypal figure in regard to the progressions made in literature, science and art made during the Renaissance. Several of the famous artists of the Renaissance came from Florence; the city continued to be a significant location for the developments made during the period well into the 1500s. The ideas of the Renaissance spread into Europe and began to affect some of the ideas in those countries. One artist who was very much influenced by the period was Albrecht Durer from Germany. He was a fine draftsman and became one of the many artists of the “Northern Renaissance.” Over time, the art movement of Mannerism replaced the Renaissance; this movement had greater impact on influencing the style of the arts in the other European countries. Important artists of the Renaissance include: Leonardo da Vinci
Sandro Botticelli, Raphael, Titian and Michelangelo Buonarroti.
Rococo Art Styles/Movements
An art movement begun in the 1700s in France. During this time period, the middle-class was becoming more affluent and influential. When Louis XIV died, the wealthy families in Paris began to take a great amount of interest in style. The particular style that developed was called Rococo, and was mostly used for interior decorating. The term Rococo is from the French word “rocaille” that translated means pebbles. It is a term that relates to the shells and stones used to embellish the interior of caves. Shells, therefore, soon became the main motif in the new style. High class women tried to outdo each other to decorate their houses with the most intricate decorations for their homes. The style, therefore, mainly catered to women’s tastes and preferences.
One of the artists who rose up during the period was Francois Boucher. He was a lace designer, painter and engraver. He became popular for his feminine landscapes and mythological paintings. Some of his clients included the Queen of France and the influential Mme. de Pompadour, Louis XV's mistress. It was Boucher’s style of work that came to dictate the ideal style shown in Louis XV’s court. Gentle hues and pleasant forms characterize his light subject matter of goddesses, cupics, and shepherds. The Rococo period is often viewed as the last chapter in the Baroque period. Besides Boucher, other important artists of the Rococo era were William Hogarth, Giovanni Battista Tiepolo, Angelica Kauffmann, and Giovanni Antonio Canaletto.
Cutaway Film
A type of shot that cuts away from action going on to focus on something else – like a landscape or a detail of something. Used appropriately with logic in mind, it can be a useful shot to help the film editor in a difficult break in coverage or continuity.
Dailies Film
A term referring to the workprint prior it being edited. The term originated from the practice of some labs having the workprint finished the same day it was dropped off by a client. Sometimes it is also known as rushes.
Daylight Balanced Film
The color temperature of daylight; on a color temperature scale daylight is 5,400K. Exterior shooting requires color film to be balanced for daylight so the resulting image will not be bluish. Used in interiors, daylight balanced film will make an image take on an orange color.
Daylight Spool Film
A spool made of aluminum that holds 100 feet of film footage. The spool is painted black and features opaque solid sides that are necessary to guard the film from exposure when the camera is loaded in daylight. The term comes from the idea that the film has the ability to be loaded inside the camera without the use of complete darkness (to keep the film from being exposed obviously). There are 400 foot daylight spools as well; however, they are not often utilized because they are not very compatible with a magazine.
Depth of Field Film
Depth of field refers to the area in focus in front of and behind a plane that is increased as an iris becomes smaller. The longer a lens is, the less the depth of field is and vice versa. It does not spread out in a balanced manner; rather, an area is around 2/3 behind the plane of focus and 1/3 in front of it. It is best to use a depth of field table in order to help take into consideration all the variables that determines the depth of field. Tables can be found in the American Cinematographer’s Manual.
Diffusion Film
A type of filter placed over a camera lens to create a gentle focus effect. The term diffusion may also refer to a sheet of material put on a movie light in order to create softer shadows.
Diopter Film
A section of the view-finding system of a camera; it can be altered to take into consideration a person’s eyesight which allows a person to view the ground-glass with clarity.
Dissolve Film
The movement between two film shots; while one is fading out, the other is at the same time fading in. They are created at the labs during the printing phase. However, they were gotten ready by the negative cutter. Dissolves completed in a lab can only be done in set amounts, such as 48 frames or 24 frames.
Dolly Shot Film
A type of shot that involves a camera positioned by a dolly that changes position during the filming of a scene. Sometimes it is referred to as a tracking shot.
Double Exposure Film
A double exposure happens when exposed film is re-shot. Another image is thus on top of the first shot. Many exposures can be taken. However, it is not correct to refer to it as a “triple exposure or “quadruple exposure.” Instead, one might say “three double exposures” or “six double exposures.”
Double Perf Film
16mm that contains a row of perforations that follow both sides of the film.
Double Reel Film
In regard to 35mm, a double reel is made up of two single reels that are attached together. To distinguish double reels from single reels, labeling such as 1 A/B, 2 A/B, 3 A/B, 4 A/B…etc is used. The biggest double reel is 2,000 feet.
Double System Film
A term relating to the idea that picture and sound are two different elements that are recorded separately, and edited or projected at the same time. Both 35mm and 16mm utilize the double system. In the double system, a tape recorder records the sound, and a camera takes the picture. However, the end result becomes a single system as the two elements of picture and sound are brought together to create the same piece of print stock.
Double System Projector Film
A type of projector that was made to play a mag track in sync and to project a workprint.
Dubbing Film
Recording the dialogue of a script inside a sound studio; this happens after the film scenes are shot. The actors of the film watch the film in order to move their lips to the same time as the footage.
Dutch Tilt Film
A diagonal viewpoint of a scene by the camera. It is also known as a canted angle.
Dupe Film
A positive copy of a positive or a negative copy of a negative. It is created in the reversal process.
Editing Bench Film
A workbench that includes rewinds that are joined to it. Frequently a built-in light table is placed at its center.
Editorial Sync Film
A series of sync marks on sound and picture that pair up on the same frame. It can be helpful to use the mark E.S. when labeling in order to let others or oneself known it is an editorial sync mark. It should not be confused with a printer’s sync – which involves sound and picture that are displaced.
Edge Fog Film
The exposure over a film’s edge from direct light. Often it is due from light leak that happens when a camera door is not taped shut. Sometimes it gets outside or in a frame and can influence the visibility of the latent edge numbers.
Latent Edge Numbers Film
Latent Edge Numbers are numbers that are placed over a film’s edge between the perf in 16mm or on the far side of in 35mm. They exist in order to help the negative cutter align up shots during the conforming of the negative. Sometimes they are referred to as latent edge numbers rather then just edge numbers to separate them from ink-on code numbers that are sometimes referred to as edge numbers.
E.D.L Film
An abbreviation for edit decision list. A negative cutter uses it when the filmer cuts digitally in order to stay true to the original without the aid of the workprint.
Emulsion (film) Film
A lay of silver that is adhered to the base. When it is exposed and then developed, emulsion makes an image through the silver areas; the areas prevent light from coming through, and the clear areas permit the light to come through.
Emulsion Batch Film
A sequence of numbers on a film that start after the emulsion type. Once a film is created, every batch receives a number so one can shoot a single sequence with any one of the batches. Combing batches in the past was more difficult because frequently the emulsion batches could be “off” which of course affected the visible effect in the film. However, mixing emulsion batches is not such a bad thing nowadays because emulsion batches have become more consistent. However, they can still be a little off today. The ideal way is to shoot a single sequence with one particular batch.
Emulsion Type Film
A term that refers to the make-up of a film’s emulsion. An emulsion may be designed to be slow, grainy, fine, full of color, white and black, fast, tungsten….etc. Each emulsion’s type is signified by a number. For instance, Fuji uses 250D to represent that the film contains an emulsion that is daylight balanced film with an exposure index of 250. Certain emulsion types are more desirable than others based upon one’s end purpose of the film. It is often best to stick to one emulsion type when shooting a single unbroken sequence.
Eye Line Film
The term refers to the direction an actor needs to look at off-screen in order to pair the shot with a reverse angle or P.O.V. shot. Often times an actor is given something in particular to look at off-screen to ensure the direction they are looking in is correct.
Exciter Lamp Film
A kind of lamp used in a projector that plays optical sound. The project plays a track by putting it through the exciter lamp (a photo-electric cell that is sensitive to light).
Exposure Index Film
A number that refers to the sensitivity of a light to a specific kind of film. It measures film speed. Each film can/box contains an E.I. number (same as A.S.A and I.S.O on a light meter).
Extension Tub Film
Hollow tubes of metal mounted in the middle of the lens and camera that come in varying lengths that can be combined together. They can be used on a long lens to take very close shots. When one uses an extension tube, he/she should realize it cannot be used with a wide lens, and some light is absorbed if it is used as an extension tube.
Fade Film
Moving from a shot into blackness; the image of the film gradually fades into darkness is called a fade out. A fade in is the term for when the darkness becomes brighter and brighter and the image comes into view. They are created in a lab during the printing phase. However, negative cutters prepar them beforehand by cutting an overlap of black into the A&B rolls. Fades made in the labs only come in set amounts, such as 48 frames.
Flex Fill Film
A cloth bounce card that is put on a bendable ring that can be folded up to take up less room when it is not being used.
Filler / Fill / Sound Fill Film
A scrap film that is usually used to ensure a sound track runs the same length as the picture; sometimes there may not be any sound, but the track still needs to be the same length. Filler is often a print that has the emulsion removed from along its center.
Film Cement Film
A type of liquid that melts and adheres together two separate pieces of film.
Film Plane Film
The plane of depth from a film’s lens inside the camera. The plane marks the point where the distances on the focusing ring are measured. It is marked on the exterior of the camera with a mark that resembles the planet Saturn turned sideways.
Filter Film
A tinted piece of plastic or glass that is positioned in front of or behind a lens in a filter holder. It fuctions as a means to alter the color appearance of the shot. They can be used to change tungsten balanced film for use in broad daylight or the other way around. Sometimes they are used for aesthetic purposes.
Film Speed Film
The measurement of the sensitivity of light needed for the necessary exposure of a particular film stock. It is mainly the result of the size of the silver halides within the emulsion. The standard rule is that the bigger the grain, the less light becomes necessary for exposure. Most of the time film stocks are referred to as being slow or fast. A slow film contains tinier grains and it needs more light. And fast film contains bigger grains and requires less light.
Flag Film
The term may refer to a big black piece of cloth that is placed on a frame in order to remove light from a portion of the composition. The term may also refer to a little piece of tape that is adhered to a shot in a roll in a cutting room. It is used as a bookmark. It sticks out of a roll’s side and makes finding particular shots easy.
Flare Film
The term flare may refer to the irregular pattern of direct light washing out the start and end of a roll on daylight spools. The term may also refer to lens flare. Lens flare results when a lens is hit by light which causes the whole image to be fogged. Lens flare can be prevented by flagging the lens.
Flash Frame Film
The term flash frame may refer to a single frame that is totally blank between two shots. Flash frame happens if the camera is stopped while its gate is open which permits for an extended amount of exposure time on a particular single frame. Sometimes flash frames can be useful in the editing room if used between shots; it allows a person to easily know when a shot ends and another begins. The term may also refer to the first couple overexposed frames at the start or end of a shot as a result of the camera requiring more time to get up to speed.
Flatbed Film
A machine used for editing that is similar to a desk containing a screen at its center. The film rests on plates that are threaded in the middle section that contains transports for the sound and picture.
Focal Length Film
The view that a lens contains, whether it be a narrow view or a wide view. Bigger numbers on a focal length signify a narrower view, and smaller numbers signify a wider view.
Foley Film
Recording during the post-production process any custom sound effects. It is done in the same process that dialogue is dubbed. Foley is the name of the man who invented the process.
Follow Focus Film
A shot that involves altering the focus of the camera during the shooting process to pair up with the action of the subject matter.
Footage Film
Footage may refer to either the amount of film that a person has shot in a given time period, or it may refer to all of the film footage that has been exposed.
Foot Candle Film
Foot candle refers to the measurement of light. The term originated from exactly what its title is; the light of one candle that is one foot away is one foot candle. Light meters convert foot candle numbers into an f-stop measurement. However, one should realize that there exists several kind of film speeds. Thus, using foot candles as a reference point is not necessary recommended because f-stops may not correspond exactly to any given number of foot candles since there are so many film speeds.
Frame Film
Any single image on a piece of film; each second of film footage contains twenty-four frames.
Frame Handles Film
Extra frames located at the end and start of each shot of footage. The number of frame handles changes from each application. In general, they are used to get original material ready for optical printing. For instance, in optical printing, frame handles can be used to prevent printed-in dirt that often shows up next to a splice where bits of film cement have an opportunity to flake off.
Frame Line Film
A tiny amount of space the in the middle of frames. Shots are cut and joined at a frame line.
French Flat Film
A metal black flag joined to the camera with an arm that can be altered into various positions. It functions as a means to shade a camera’s lens from light that can cause flare.
F Stop Film
A scale that measures the size of the opening of the iris on a camera’s lens. When one opens the iris wider, more light is allowed to expose the film. Closing the iris permits a less amount of light to enter the camera. The smaller the number of the f-stop, the wider is the opening of the iris (and vice versa). A standard f-stop scale is 1.4 - 2 - 2.8 - 4 - 5.6 - 8 - 11 - 16 – 22.
Fullcoat Film
The term fullcoat refers to mag stock containing a layer of oxide that spreads all over one side. One can purchase 35mm in either stripe or fullcoat. 16mm mag only comes fullcoat. Stripe is less expensive than fullcoat. In regard to 35mm, one might purchase the fullcoat over stripe because the fullcoat can be used to record many tracks.
Gaffer’s Tape Film
A type of cloth tape that is used on particular film shoots. Generally, gaffer’s tape is either silver or black and is two inches in width. It is used instead of duct tape because it does not leave any residue after it is peeled off.
Gate Film
A camera or projector opening that resides behind the lens. On a camera it allows a single frame to be exposed; on a projector it allows the single frame to be projected.
Gauge Film
The gauge is the width measurement of a film format. Examples of gauges are 35mm and 16mm.
Gel Film
A big sheet of clear tinted plastic; it functions as a filter for a movie light or as a window covering. The sheets can be purchased in several different colors. This is one type of gel. The other type of gel can change one color temperature to another color temperature
Groundglass Film
The surface of etched glass in a camera’s view-finding system. The groundglass and film plane are located the same distance from the camera lens.
Halation Film
An effect that happens when an image’s bright regions bleed into the edges of the darker regions. This happens when the light passes through the emulsion layer and reflects off the base of the film. This exposes the emulsion on the side right next to it. Some companies will make film that has a black anti-halation surface coat on its edge.
Halogen Film
A gas that is inside the lamp of a Quartz light. The gas extends the life of the tungsten filament. Frequently Quartz lights are also referred to as Halogen Lights.
Handheld Film
Holding a camera in place by the cameraperson while shooting film, rather than using a tripod.
Head Film
The start of a roll or shot. The term may also refer to a round clamp that works in addition with an arm on a C Stand. A head may also refer to a tripod head.
Head Room Film
The area in-between a subject’s head and a frame’s top. It is important to make the headroom not too much or too little. The cameraperson needs to take into account any cropping that may occur later on the sides and top of the footage.
Hi Hat Animation
A plywood square that is joined to a bracket; a tripod can be joined to a hi hat. A hi hat is utilized in order to get the camera very close to the ground during shooting. In the past, a hi hat was used to hold the camera very high up.
HMI Film
Abbreviation for Halogen Metal Incandescence. It is a kind of light that features powerful, efficient and quite bright lights. They can be used in mixed lighting conditions because they are balanced for the color temperature of daylight. The negative side of using HMI is that the lights are heavy, expensive and should only be used with a crystal sync camera.
House Lights Film
Labs will not time a film when one asks for “house lights” for a print. The print is completed minus color correction and exposure. In general, they range in the center of the printing scale: 25 – 25 – 25.
Hyperfocal Distance Film
The distance set on a focusing ring of the lens that best uses the depth of field available. Distances are listed out on depth of field charts, as well as lay out the area of focus at various f-stops. A subject is not essential to focus on at this distance.
Incident Light Reading Film
A reading that measures the quantity of light striking a subject. One makes a reading with a light meter that contains a white half sphere that stands in for the subject. The sphere is directed towards the camera so the light striking the subject is also striking the sphere. Another kind of light reading is called reflective light reading.
Insert Shot Film
A very close shot of some detail in a scene. It is similar to a cutaway shot, but instead of distancing away from the scene, one moves in.
Interlocked Film
Multiple mechanisms that contain motors that run in sync are termed “interlocked.” A tape recorder and a sync sound camera do not run interlocked. A tape recorder’s motor is not running in sync with the camera motor, because a tape recorder is recording pilottone.
Internegative Film
A copy of a film that is put on fine-grained stock. An internegative creates far more prints than is practical to make from A&B rolls.
Intervalometer Film
A mechanism that is joined to a camera for shooting single exposures. It is similar to an animation motor. However, it has the ability to expose single frames automatically. (This is the method of time lapse photography.)
Iris Film
A valve is inside the lens that dictates the degree of light that can go through it. When one opens an iris, more light has the opportunity to come through the lens. And when one closes the iris, less light can pass through it. The amount at which an iris is closed or opened is set in f-stops. Some lenses also have t-stops.
I.S.O. Film
An abbreviation for international standards organization. It means the same thing as I.E. and A.S.A. Sometimes the I.S.O. abbreviation is placed on a light meter.
Jump Cut Film
Two shots sharing similarities that are cut together with a jump in time, camera position or continuity.
K Film
“K” may refer to kilowatts or refer to an abbreviation for Kelvin (like 5,400K for daylight). In relation to kilowatts, K is used when referring to quartz lights or HMIs (to check the amount of the brightness in relation to the consumption of power). 1 Kilowatt is made up of 1,000 Watts.
Kelvin Film
Kelvin is a term taken from the name of the scientist Lord Kelvin; he invented the color temperature scale.
Lab Roll Film
A big roll created from camera rolls. They are attached together for printing by a lab. The rolls go up to around 1,000 feet.
Latitude Film
The amount that a particular film stock can withstand over-exposure or under-exposure. For example, color negative has a greater degree of latitude than reversal film.
Lens Flare Film
Lens flare occurs when a lens is struck by light which causes an image to be totally fogged. It can be prevented by flagging the lens.
L.F.O.A. Film
An abbreviation for last frame action. It is important to include on the cue sheet for the individuals responsible for mixing the film.
Light Leak Film
Light leak is light that radiates into a camera that in turn creates patches of fog on the image. It usually happens near the camera door or at the location of the joining of the magazine to the camera body. Simply putting camera tape around the camera door will prevent light leak.
Location Sound Film
Also known as production sound. Location sound is any kind of room tone or wild track recorded at the shoot.
Locked Cut Film
The last cut of a film; no more alterations will occur in a picture after a locked cut.
Locked Down Shot Film
A type of shot that is taken with the tilt and pan releases on a tightened tripod; it is done so the camera cannot shift its position. Locked down shots are useful when a particular effect is called for – such as making an actor suddenly vanish in a shot. Locking the shot ensures the camera will not move from one cut to another.
Long Lens Film
A type of lens containing a focal length that magnifies views of small areas or objects. For a lens to be considered a long lens, it must have a focal length bigger than 50mm in 35mm, or 25mm in 16mm.
Loop Film
Excess film below and above the camera’s gate; it permits movement from the continuous motion of the take-up and supply rollers to the intermittent motion happening at the gate. The term may also refer to a little magnifier that is a helpful tool used in the editing room. Sometimes the term may refer to dubbing.
Looping Film
A term that relates to dubbing. Film is on a loop in order to allow an actor a couple tries at a line. Looping is also known as A.D.R.
Macro Lens Film
A type of lens that allows the cameraperson to get very close details of an object. Using macro causes the distances on the focusing ring to no longer be applicable.
Magazine Film
A camera will generally have 2-3 magazines attached to it; a magazine holds 1-2 chambers that contain 400 or 1,000 feet of film. The chambers are light-proof.
Mag Stock / Mag Track/ Magnetic Film Film
Mag Stock is a section of film surfaced with an emulsion of magnetic oxide rather than silver halides. It is the same size as film and contains perforations. All sound is moved to mag stock during the editing process that is then passed along an editing machine that pairs it exactly with the picture. One frame of sound is paired with one frame of picture.
Mark Film
Clapsticks are struck together to make a sync mark for a film shot. Mark may also refer to tape placed on the floor to show an actor where he/she is suppose to stand.
“Mark It!” Film
A phrase said to the person holding the slate to signify he/she should strike the sticks together.
Master Shot Film
A single shot that includes the complete scene from its start to the finish. Usually a master shot is filmed and then the rest of the other kinds of shots (close-ups...etc) are then shot later.
Matte Box Film
A square shade that is placed right over the lens. It is held up by two rods joined to the camera body. Usually the box contains filter holders for the square glass filters that can be useful when one is putting together a matte shot.
Matte Shot Film
Also known as a split screen, matte shots can be completed as opticals. A matte shot is a double exposure that masks off a section of the frame for each exposure, as well as the opposite area for a second exposure.
M&E Film
An abbreviation for music and effects. An M&E track is created after a mix for a large production. It is used if a film is dubbed into more than one language. The track makes it possible for a one-time creation of the music and effects section of the film.
Mix Film
A method of placing all one’s soundtracks on one soundtrack that contains the right mixture of the sounds at the right equalization, filtering and volumes. The end result is what a person wishes his/her sound to be.
Mixer Film
A mechanism that blends the sounds from various sources along with a volume control for each one. The term may also refer to a person whose job it is to sit at the mixing console and determine how the sounds will be mixed; he/she also handles the audio controls and the faders.
Mixing House Film
A sound studio; a mixing house is a place designed for mixing the sound for films.
Mix Master Film
A copy of one’s sound mix that is either on DAT or mag stock. One may need to ask for it in addition to the optical track. Obtaining a copy of the mix on tape will give a superior quality level for transfer to video (as opposed to the optical track). It will also provide a more efficient means of mixing if one needs to do some remixing.
M.O.S. Film
An abbreviation for “Mit Out Sound.” It refers to a film, sequence or shot that is taken minus the sound (the sound is added at a later time). The term comes from a Hollywood story of a German director. He requested that a shot be filmed “mit out sound.” And his camera assistant responded to his directions by writing “M.O.S.” down on a slate.
The Movement Film
Projector or camera parts that transfer the film at intervals. The rollers after and before the loops, the connecting gears and the pull-down claw all create the movement. Any registration pin and often the shutter are also considered to be part of the movement.
Moviola Film
The term refers to a standing movioloa. The machine is made by a company called Moviola; the company also creates flat-beds.
Negative Film
The original film used to take the footage in the camera. From the negative, a positive print is created for editing. The negative is organized to pair up with the edited work-print and an answer print. It is used for a finished film’s projection.
Negative Cutter Film
The title given to the person responsible for the cutting and assembling of the original negative’s pairing up with the edited workprint. This is then sent to a lab to create the answer print.
Non-Reflex Film
A type of camera that provides an image in the viewfinder through a separate lens. Examples of non-reflex cameras are Bell & Howell and older Bolex cameras. These cameras do not contain a “through the lens” view-finding system.
Normal Lens Film
A normal lens is the spot between the widening of the image by the wide-angle lens, and the widening of the image by the telephoto lens. A normal lens is considered to be the 50mm lens in a 35mm, and in 16mm it is considered to be the 25mm lens.
Nose Grease Film
A type of grease used to lubricate the pressure plate. It is coated over the side of the nose by a cameraperson.
Nose Room Film
The space between the edge of the frame and a person’s face when it is in profile. In general, the space surrounding the subject should be 1/3 behind and 2/3 in front of the subject’s head. It is considered a good thing if there exists excess space in front of the subject’s face (as opposed to behind the person’s head).
180 Degree Rule Film
A rule stating that a camera should be placed somewhere inside 180 degrees on a particular side of the invisible line of a shot containing two people filmed in sequence. If the camera crosses the line, confusion results for the film viewers, because it makes it look like the people are switching places as one watches the film.
One Light Film
A print that is not corrected shot by shot. Instead, the print reveals how all the shots appear in contrast to one another with the same printing lights. It may be helpful to know what changes have occurred in the shots color and exposure.
Optical Printing Film
A re-photographying of a film frame by frame. It provides a means of creating a copy of a film that allows for many more options (as opposed to contact printing); however, the process does lessen the amount of clarity and contrast in the footage in 16mm.
Optical Sound Film
The system utilized by a projector to play back a film print’s sound; the sound is exposed onto the film as a translucent modulating line over black. The track is read by the projector by putting it through an exciter lamp. The voltage of the lamp is then amplified and fed through a speaker to project it.
Optical Track Film
Creating an optical track is a middle step one does before going from the mix master to the final print. The optical track is photographed on a piece of high contract stock when the mix is finished (by a facility or a lab). The track is a different roll of film than the original negative. It is joined to the picture when a print is struck. One should realize that the optical track remains as an element separate from the A&B rolls – the track is passed into the contract printer at a different time.
Opticals Film
Also known as optical effects, opticals are simply effects created through optical printing. Examples of opticals include superimposed titles and transitions. The term “optical” can refer to anything that is optically printed (such as blowing up from from 16mm to 35mm).
Orange Stick Film
A tool used to clean the gate of a camera. It is simply an orange stick that can be purchased at a drug store to clean one’s nails.
Original (film) Film
Film, reversal, or negative, shot by a camera as opposed to film that is a dupe. One may say “negative” or “original” and they mean the same thing. But saying “original” is the most efficient way to communicate that something is the real deal, and not copied.
Outdated Stock Film
Since film is perishable, dyes will change color and the grain will build up over time. The end result is an image that contains less and a foggy appearance. Even if film is refrigerated, the effects of time will take their effect after 2-3 years. Slow films tend to grow foggy in a longer amount of time than faster films. And black and white film lasts a little while longer in quality than color film. However, if one is trying to save a buck or two and does not need the longevity, outdated stock can be bought inexpensively.
Out Takes Film
Workprint footage that is not put into the edited version of the film. A couple frames or just one single frame are called trims.
Overcrank Film
Creating slow motion by running the camera faster. The term originated from the time cameras used to be operated by cranking them.
Overexposure Film
The process of shooting a film scene with more light than the film’s emulsion needs. The result will be an image that does not contain much depth of field and the image will appear too bright. One can alter the image in printing, but the image will contain too much contrast.
Paper Tape Film
A thin roll of tape. It tapes down a film’s ends when one is editing. Paper tape is not the same thing as splicing tape, and it should not be put on raw stock.
Pan Film
The horizontal movement of a camera along an axis. The move can go from left to right or vice versa. Similar to a dolly shot, a camera turns on an axis (instead of across an area). A pan is not the same thing as a tilt. One should use the word tilt instead of saying something like, “pan up.”
Parallel Editing Film
A method of cutting between a couple of scenes or stories that are happening at the same time.
Perf Film
Shorthand for perforations. Perforations are the sprocket holes on a section of film footage.
Pigeon Film
A round, rather hefty disc that contains a lighting stud. A pigeon assists to position a light on the floor. It can go a lot lower than what a stand can normally be positioned to do. Basically, a pigeon works like a hi hat – but for lights.
Pilottone Film
A 60 Hz signal reference that is used for sync sound filming (50 Hz in Europe). It is recorded on an audio tape in order to make possible transfer to magazine exactly at sound speed.
Photo Flood Film
A powerful screw-in light bulb. It is used along with a clamp light fixture and ranges from 250 watts to 500 watts.
Plastic Leader Film
A plastic leader is placed at the tail and head of a print. It is longer-lasting than emulsion leader and cheaper. One determent is that a plastic leader cannot be cement spliced and therefore cannot be used for the negative.
Polyester Base Film
A long-lasting kind of film that is very difficult to rip. It takes skill and practice to splice polyester base. It cannot be used as original material, because it cannot be cement spliced. The benefit of polyester base is that it lasts awhile and can tolerate usage well – a fact that lends it well to release prints.
P.O.V. Shot Film
Shorthand for point of view shot. It is a shot that is taken from the point of view from one of the characters. It allows the film viewers to see things how an actor is seeing them. The shot is useful to achieve a believable reaction shot.
Practical Film
A photo flood-related kind of bulb. It is included within a shot. Sometimes the term is used instead of photo flood; however, practical refers in particular to a light placed within the shot.
Pre-roll Film
Excess time at the start of a sound take in order to take into account the slow, lock-up time of a few post production time code mechanisms.
Pressure Plate Film
A section of a camera’s internal system. It is positioned on the side of the film away from the gate. Spring-loaded and smooth, the plate supports the film on the film plane. It works as a kind of brake and assists to keep the film steady as the film is exposed.
Prime Lens Film
A single focal length, telephoto, normal or wide lens (unlike a zoom lens that contains a variable focal length). Prime lens are purchased in a set of various focal lengths; they are quicker, clearer and can magnify things closer than a zoom lens can.
Print Film
A copy of the original film footage. A print is generally created through contact printing.
Print Stock Film
The film footage a lab uses to create prints (copies). Generally, print stock is of a longer pitch than camera stock so it can be placed right up along the camera stock on the printing device. Camera stock is faster than print stock (print stock has an A.S.A. of around 12),
Pull Down Film
A pull down is done in order to line up the sound with a video transfer of picture if one needs to transfer sync sound to video. The process involves the transfer of sound slowed from the speed of the film. There are 24 film frames/second and 29.97 video frames/second. This correlates to 23.98 film frames/second.
Pulldown Claw Film
A segment of a camera’s movement that involves advancing the footage from an exposed frame to the following unexposed frame; this happens when the shutter of the camera is shut.
Pull Processing Film
A kind of processing that involves developing the film for a shorter amount of time than usual in order to accommodate for planed overexposure of the film.
Pull Up Film
Pull up refers to the method of placing the sound 26 frames in front of the picture when creating a print. The term may also refer to the transfer of the sound from video sped up from video speed of 29.97 video frames/second to 24 film frames/second. This transfer has to be completed if the optical track is created after having mixed in video. The term may also refer to the transfer of the first 26 frames of sound on a reel. The frames are spliced on the sound of the previous real; this is done to prevent loss of sound once the film is printed with the sound pulled up. When the reels are attached together, 26 frames of the sound are removed.
Push Processing Film
A kind of processing that involves developing film for an extended amount of time in order to accommodate for planned underexposure. Individual scenes cannot be pushed, only complete rolls can be pushed.
Quartz Light Film
A quartz light is a kind of light that is quite bright. Inside its quartz envelope is a tungsten filament. When in use, quartz lights can become very hot. If oil from one’s hands gets on the bulb, the bulb may blister and explode; obviously, it is never a good idea to touch the bulb with one’s fingers. The color temperature of the light is usually 3,200K. Also known as a tungsten or halogen light.
Quick Release Film
A device used for latching for fast mounting and removal of a camera from a tripod.
Rack Focus Film
A type of shot that involves the changing of the focus during shooting. The shot is completed in order to transition from one object of interest to another (rather than a follow focus shot that is done to keep something in focus).
Rank Film
A brand of Telecine machines; in general it is well-known and well-liked. Sometimes the term telecine is used instead of rank.
Reaction Shot Film
The term refers to a shot of an actor looking off screen. A reaction shoot may be used to show a reaction immediately after a P.O.V. shot, or to lead into a P.O.V. shot. The term may also refer to a shot of an actor that is paying attention and reacting to what another actor is saying.
Recans Film
Film that was opened but never used. Recans are loaded into a magazine and never shot; they are so termed because they are loaded back in the film can and thus called “re-cans.”
Reduction Print Film
A film’s optical reduction that goes from a one particular gauge to another. Going from 35mm to 16mm is an example of a reduction print.
Reel Film
A spool made out of plastic or metal designed to hold film for editing or projection. The term may also relate to a reel of one thousand feet of film in 35mm. A reel is also called a single reel.
Reflective Light Reading Film
A measure of the amount of light that bounces of a subject; it is taken with a light meter that contains a honey-comb grid. One directs the meter at a subject in order to read the light bouncing from the subject matter and nothing else. Another kind of reading that is possible is called an incident light reading.
Reflector Board / Reflector Card Film
A card, either silver or white, that is used to create soft indirect lighting on a subject matter. The card allows light to bounce of itself and onto the subject matter, creating a delicate atmosphere. Sometimes they are used to create soft shadow areas or a soft brightening on an area. Frequently the cards are used outside because they do not need any electrical power to work. Also known as a bounce card.
Reflex Film
A type of view-finding system in a camera; it involves seeing an image in the viewfinder that is seen through the very same lens taking the photograph of the film’s image.
Registration Film
The way in a frame aligns with the next frame. Poor registration can make an image that will bobble once it is projected on the screen. Like cameras, projectors also have registration, so it can be hard to distinguish sometimes what is the culprit for the bobble that may appear on the screen. It is essential to have good registration especially for shots that have special effects; the images in these shots are multi-layered and will draw bad attention if the registration is not good.
Registration Pin Film
A pin that some cameras contain. Examples of such cameras include Éclair and Arriflex. A registration pin works to keep an image steady during exposure.
Release Print Film
A type of print created after the approval of the answer print. A release print is struck using the exact timing of the final answer print. It costs less than an answer print, because it is not re-timed. Release prints are the ones movie theatres have access to. The term comes from the fact that the print is “released” to them.
Reversal Film
A kind of film and processing method that creates a positive original. It is similar to the slide film and processing used in still photography.
Reverse Shot Film
A shot that involves a previous shot’s opposite side. It may involve an actor coming and leaving through an entrance, a reaction shot, a P.O.V. shot, or the cutting between of two actors discussing something. It is preferable that a reverse shot be on the same side of the 180 degree line to keep things consistent for the film viewers.
Rewinds Film
A mechanism used to wind film; it is made up of a spindle and crank to mount a single or multiple reels. Usually it is mounted on either side of an editing bench.
Rivas Film
A kind of tape splicer; it comes in two models that use perforated splicing tape. One type of model is used for slanted cuts for sound. Another type of model is used for straight cuts for a picture.
Room Tone Film
A recording that functions as a filler when editing sound; it is the “silence” of a location. A sync sound shoot often finishes with the sound recordist signaling the actors to remain silent for the recording of around thirty seconds of room tone. This is because all places are never really silent, and therefore the filler must be particular to a specific location.
Rough Cut Film
A term referring to the film edited between the steps of the film being an assembly and a fine cut.
Rushes Film
An unedited work-print returning from the lab. One is usually in a “rush” to ensure that the film came out correctly, and hence the term. Rushes are also known as dailies (so termed because some labs manage to get the job done the same day it was dropped off).
Sandbag Film
A bag made of cloth that contains two chambers for sand; the bag is placed over the legs of a light-stand to lend it some weight for greater stability.
Scene Film
A scene is a single film shot. The term “sequence” is used when referring to a number of film shots. Sometimes “scene” is used to refer to a number of shots, but it is better to say “sequence” in order to avoid any confusion.
Scratch Film
A scratch may occur on the base or on the emulsion. Damage to the film is unfixable if the scratch is made on the emulsion. Scratching the base can be fixed with wet gate printing.
Scratch Mix Film
A mix along with some sound correction completed prior to the final mix. A scratch mix is done to screen the film along with the correct use of the sounds to analyze if any alterations need to be done. A scratch mix is usually only completed on big productions because producing one can be expensive.
Scratch Track Film
A sync recording that causes the sound information to be useless to anybody, except for dubbing actor voices, or for the sound editor to use the information for sound references.
Scratch Test Film
A test done to ensure that the magazines or the camera are not scratching the film. The test is completed prior to shooting by running a roll of film 1-2 feet and analyzing the film as it comes out.
Second Sticks! Film
A phrase called out by the cameraperson to signal to the person with the slate to mark the shot a second time based on the condition that the clapper on the slate could not be seen the first time the shot was being marked.
Selects Film
Selects are the shots separated from all the other shots prior to starting the editing process in order to make the process more efficient.
Sharpie Film
A brand name permanent felt-tipped marker. Sharpies are used to label exposed rolls.
Shooting Ratio Film
The proportion of the quantity of film shot in relation to the running time of the completed film. For example, a 4 minute film that one shot 40 minutes of footage would be said to have a shooting ratio of 10 to 1.
Short-ends Film
The remainder of a roll of film that is unexposed in a magazine that is clipped and put into a can for future use. In order to be called a short-end, the film has to be less than four hundred feet.
Shot Film
The term given to exposed film starting from the moment the camera starts to when it stops. A shot is also known as a “scene.”
Silent Camera Film
A silent camera is the term given to a type of noisy camera that can only be used for scenes that do not require sound (because it is so noisy).
Single System Film
The recording, editing or projecting of picture and sound on the same piece of film, as opposed to other kinds of cameras that may record them separately. Using a single system brings along with it a few editing disadvantages. For this reason, it is normal to use a double system for shooting and editing.
The Slate Film
Two hinged sticks joined to a single board. It records a shot’s number and sync point at the start of each scene. The “clap” of the clapstick signals the sync point.
Slop Print Film
A black and white dupe print of the work-print that is not timed. A slop print does not contain splices, and hence is used for projection in a sound mix since the film cannot go out of sync.
Soft Light Film
A light containing a surface built into it that functions as a bounce card. The end result is a gentle, soft light on the subject matter.
Sound Blanket Film
A type of blanket placed on the camera to lessen the camera’s noise. It is the same as a quilted mover’s blanket.
Sound Reader Film
A device that is mounted on a bracket that snaps on a synchronizer; it is plugged into the squawk box. It is used for reading magazine stock.
Sound Speed Film
Sound speed is the standard speed for shooting and projecting. The speed is twenty-four frames per second.
Spacer Film
A cylinder made of metal that contains a hole in its center and a plate at its end. The spacer is used to put reels at equal intervals as the gangs of a synchronizer.
Speed! Film
This term is called out to signal that the cameras are now rolling. The term originated from the time when it took a little while for some equipment to get up to speed.
Spikes Film
Small sections of tape positioned along the legs of furniture or a tripod; spikes are used in order to mark their placements so they can be efficiently returned to those same positions later.
Splice Film
A way of attaching two film pieces in order so they can project as a single un-broken piece. A splice may be done in 3 ways, including as a cement splice, as a tape splice and as a ultra-sonic splice. A cement splice is used for the original material, and the tape splice is generally used for editing. When using Polyester base film, the ultra-sonic splice is used.
Spicing Tape Film
A kind of clear tape that is used to splice film. Spicing tape may be purchased in two forms, perforated or un-perforated. The un-perforated version is used with a Guillotine, and the perforated version is used with a Rivas. Transparent tape is used with pictures, whereas opaque white tape is used for sound when splicing.
Split Reel Film
A reel that can be screwed apart in order to place film on the core between its two halves. The film on the core becomes the film on the reel. One should be careful not to screw the two halves too tightly together, because they may become difficult to separate.
Spool Down Film
The process of winding a 400 foot roll onto four 100 foot daylight spools in order to use it in a camera that is capable of handling 100 feet of film. The process is done in total darkness so that the roll remains unexposed. The film must be wound totally through in one complete cycle and then spooled down. This ensures that the edge numbers are printed on the correct side and are not printed on the work-print.
Spot Meter Film
A kind of meter used to take reflective light readings with a short telescopic sight. The telescopic sight makes it possible for a person to take precise readings of a detailed area.
Spreader Film
A device that includes 3 arms joined to a central hub that in turn is joined to the base of a tripod. A spreader prevents the legs of the tripod from collapsing.
Spring Lock Film
A spring-loaded clamp that attaches to a rewind in order to turn multiple reels together.
Sprocket Film
A roller’s teeth that are capable of intersecting with the perforations in film. Sprocket holes are the same thing as perf.
Squawk Box Film
A little amplified speaker that is placed on an editing bench to take in sounds from the sound reader.
Streamer Film
A streamer is a little speaker positioned on an editing bench that takes in sound from the sound reader; the term originated from the fact that when a streamer is projected, it looks like a streamer trailing over the image screen.
Steenbeck Film
A type of flatbed brand that is well-known and popular. Sometimes the term flatbed is used instead of Steenbeck.
The Sticks Film
The term may refer to the legs of a tripod, or the tripod itself. The term may also refer to the clapper on the slate.
Stripe Film
Stripe refers to 35mm magazine stock that includes a stripe of magnetic tape instead of a full coating included on full-coat. A balance stripe is used in stripe in order to stop warping from occurring.
Super 16 Film
A type of film format that was originally designed for blow up to 35mm. It uses up the place on the film that is normally used for the soundtrack, and uses the area for a wider picture with a single perf 16mm film.
Superimposition Film
A superimposition is actually the same thing as a double exposure; however, sometimes “superimposition” is used when referring specifically to a double exposure completed through optical printing - such as super-imposed titles for example.
Sync Film
The level at which picture and sound are successfully lined up. If they are out-of-sync, the film can be difficult to watch because the picture will not correspond to the sound that the viewers are hearing. If sound and picture are lined up well, they are said to be “in-sync.” The term sync is applied to many types of picture and sound relationships, including voices, music, and sound effects.
Syncing Film
The process of lining up the picture and sound of a film prior to editing a sync sound film. Syncing includes cutting the extra sound that happens between takes. And it includes putting in a filler so the sound and picture are lined up throughout the film.
Sync Mark Film
The place in time that the clapsticks strike each other at the start of a shot, and the sound on the soundtrack that happens at this time as well. A sync mark may also refer to the “X” mark placed on a single frame at the start of a reel of picture that lines up with another sync mark on the sound roll. A&B rolls include sync marks at the starting points of their rolls.
Synchronizer Film
A device used in the editing room for assembling, logging, syncing, measuring footage and checking sync. The device includes a center axle along with multiple sprocket wheels (called gangs) that are joined to it. A foot of film is equivalent to one revolution of the synchronizer. Film is clamped into the wheels to the film can be measured with a footage counter. It is a very helpful device because multiple items can be efficiently cut to the same length.
Sync Sound Film
When a picture is being shot, the sound that is recorded at the same time as the picture is called sync sound. A crystal or cable sync is used for sync sound in order for things to be lined up correctly and not be out-of-sync. Sometimes the term is referred to as “lip sync” because the footage may include a number of people speaking.
Tail Slate Film
A tail slate is the mark on a shot that occurs at the end of a film rather than the start of the film. Usually the phrase, “Tail Slate!” is called out prior to clapping the slate. This ensures that the person syncing the film understands what is going on. When doing a tail slate, the slate is positioned upside down in order to mark the shot. The upside down position signifies that the mark is completed at the end of the film.
Take Up Reel Film
An empty reel used to pick up film on a projector after the film’s action is done.
Take Up Spool Film
An empty spool that picks up the film in a camera after the film has been exposed to light.
Taking Lens Film
The lens positioned in front of the camera’s gate on a turret that makes the image on the film.
Tape Splice Film
A way of attaching two pieces of film in order that they will be able to be projected as a single continuous piece of film. Cement splices are used to cut the negative.
Telephoto Film
A telephoto is similar to a long lens, but it is different in that a telephoto’s focal length is longer than it is physically.
Tie in Kit Film
A tool that harnesses power directly from the mains; it goes past the fuse box and electrical wiring of a filming location.
Tight Wind Film
A tool used to wind film on a core, giving the film a smooth edge. It is usually placed on the right rewind on an editing bench; it is an efficient means of opening and tightening the split reels if one’s intent is to simply rewind a complete roll.
Time Lapse Film
A time lapse occurs when a single frame shooting speeds up the film movement over an extended period of time. Usually it involves a single frame that is shot after a consistent pause.
Timer Film
The title given to a person at the lab who is responsible for going through each film scene and selecting the printing lights.
Timing Film
The title given to the lab’s method of selecting the printing lights for the appropriate exposure and color to create a print. The term “timing” is not what it sounds like, as there is not much to do with actual time.
Timing Lights / Printing Lights Film
The lamps of the contact printer used at a lab that are measured on a scale of 1-50 in regard to their brightness. 50 is the brightest, and 1 is the darkest. The darker the light is on the negative, the brighter the print will be. The colors red, green and blue are used in color printing.
Timing Print Film
A recording of the timing lights and relational footages that is used by a lab to create a print. It is used to go through the film footage and analyze whether or not there is room for any corrections. Corrections that need to be made are written on the timing report (such as scratches…etc).
Tone Film
Tone may refer to a 1,000 Hz sine wave that is placed at the start of a tape to give a steady volume during the transferring of sound. Tone may also refer to the tone of the room.
Tracking Shot Film
A shot that involves the placement of a camera on a dolly that is then moved during the filming of a scene. A tracking shot may also be referred to as a dolly shot.
Trims Film
Often a foot or less, trims are out-takes of a couple frames. In order to stop any trims from getting lost, trims are placed separately from longer out-takes. Usually they are placed in a trim book or in a separate vault box.
Trim Bin / Editing Bin / Bin Film
A bin on wheels that includes a lining of a fabric bag. The bin’s top contains a row of pins from which one can hang film during the editing process. A trim bin is not a place for garbage, it is also not a place for trims. Rather, a trim bin is for out-takes and selects.
Tripod Head Film
The segment of the tripod that includes the tilting device and the pan that the camera is joined to.
T-Stop Film
A few lenses contain t-tops on one side of the aperture ring, and f-stops on the other side. The f-stops are white. A small amount of light can be lost of a lens contains a number of glass elements. The t-stops function in place of f-stops for setting exposure. T-stops are designed to work with the degree of light striking the film (as opposed to finding the amount using math). The t-stop sets the exposure, and the f-stop shows the amount of depth of field one has.
Tungsten Film
Tungsten is 3,200K; it is the color temperature of artificial light on a color temperature scale A tungsten filament is used for quartz lights. Quartz lights burn at 3,200K, which is how the term originated. If one is shooting film inside, one should use color film that is balanced for tungsten light. If this is not done, the resulting image will take on an orange tinge. Similarly, a correction filter should be used for tungsten balanced film when shooting outside so the resulting image will not appear too blue.
Turret Film
A turret is a lens mount that rotates; it provides the opportunity to mount multiple lenses on a camera. This in turn makes it possible to quickly move from one lens to the next. The lens that is in use at the time of shooting a scene is called a “taking lens.”
Ultra-Sonic Cleaner Film
A cleaning device used at labs that clean negatives before they are transferred to video or before printing. Sound waves are used by the device to get ride of loose dust.
Ultra-Sonic Splicer Film
A high-end, rather expensive splicing device that is used to splice polyester base stock.
Under Crank Film
A term that refers to running the camera at slow speeds, which in term creates fast motion. The term originated from the time one needed to manually crank the camera.
Underexposure Film
Allowing less light than is needed by the emulsion of the film for correct exposure is called underexposure. The scene will be too dark and if one tries to fix underexposure in printing, the result will be a rather grainy image.
“Unprofessional.” Film
A phrase used negatively against someone who is deemed to have done something inappropriately in regard to their job.
Upright Moviola / Upright Film
A device containing arms that pick up and supply reels. The film shifts up and around to a screen on the front. Motors are controlled by the foot petals for sound speed and multiple speed viewing.
Vari Speed Film
A motor control that runs a camera or editing device at slower or faster speeds than the sound speed.
Vault Box Film
A square cardboard box made to contain either 1,000 foot rolls of 16mm, or 1,000 feet of 35mm.
Wet Gate Film
A type of contact printing; the print is created on a printing device that involves film surrounded by a liquid that for temporarily fills-in scratches that may exist on the base. This prevents the scratches from bouncing any light and the scratches from being visible on the print. Usually answer prints are created with a wet gate. Wet gate printing can be more expensive than other kinds of printing.
Wide Lens Film
A wide lens is a type of lens that contains a focal length shorter than 50mm in 35mm, and 25mm in 16mm. It allows for a greater view of a big area.
Wild Film
A motor that moves around but not exactly 24 frames per second; it is not near enough for sync sound. To be wild means that the picture and sound are not lined up properly.
Wild Sound Film
Sound that is often recorded to fill-in the sync takes; it is non-sync sound. The sound is recorded when the camera is not filming a scene.
Workprint Film
A positive copy cut during the editing process from the original negative. (A reversal original can also create a workprint.) A negative cutter cuts the original negative to pair up with the workprint for each scene. From the cut negative comes an answer print.
Wrap / “It’s a Wrap!” Film
A term that signals that shooting work is finished for the day, for a certain set, or for the entire film project. If one is referring to the final film project work, one would say, “It’s a wrap!” If one were referring to the work for the particular day, one would say, “ Wrap for the day!”
Xenon Film
A type of projection lamp that is balanced for daylight and is very bright. It cannot replace an arch lamp or tungsten lamp. Instead, a xenon needs another lamp housing on the projector. It is best with color film to request that a lab create a print that is balanced for xenon since it is balanced for daylight. The print is often referred to as a “5,400 print” because this is the color temperature of daylight.
Romanticism Art Styles/Movements
(1800-1850) Romanticism represented a shift of focus away from classical forms, and placed the stress on spiritual and emotional themes. movement first started in England and Germany in the 1770’s and gradually spread around Europe and the United States in the early 1800s. The movement originated as a reaction against Neoclassicism due to changes happening around the French Revolution and Napoleonic time period. Rather than focus on the Neoclassicism scheme of things such as idealization, logic, balance, and harmony, Romanticism chose to stress things such as one’s emotions, imaginative ideas and freedom. Being unstructured and not being hampered by any set rules were key ideas in the movement. Nature and a dedication to studying how people think and feel were important. An underlying theme throughout the movement was taking into consideration a person’s inner struggles and thoughts. Subject matter and ideas involved the medieval era, folk cultures, occult practices, the mysterious and the exotic. Traditional values were rejected if they hindered a person’s ability to express his individuality and emotions. Rigorous academic training were not deemed as important as an artist’s individual creativity and personal spiritual awakening. The ideas in the movement that involved creating intentional associations in people’s minds when viewing a painting would prove to be very influential as Symbolism, Surrealism, and Expressionism developed in the years to come.
A few key Romanticist artists include: George Stubbs, William Blake, John Martin, Francisco Goya, Sir Thomas Lawrence, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Sir Edwin landseer, Caspar David Friedric, and JMW Turner.
Situationism Art Styles/Movements
(1957-1972)
Artists impacted by the 20th century avant-gardes, Lettrism, Surrealism, Dada, Marxism ideas formed a small group that came to be known as the art movement Situationism. The “suppression of art” was the prime focus of the Lettrist International group. They, like the Surrealists and Dadaists, wished to fuse together culture and art together, and have them be united in people’s everyday lives. The Situationist International was created in 1957 and spread its ideas throughout Europe into the 1960s. The group was interested in change – both political and social. Eventually, the group segmented into three groups, including the Antinational, the Situationist Bauhaus, and the Second Situationist International. Asger Jorn and Guy Debord were important developers of the movement. They and others worked to make culture and the totality of a person living in the capitalist system to see art as part of their daily living. Kronstadt, the Makhnovists, and Spain were major influences of the group. As the group developed, they made claims that they were not interested in a leadership system or followers of the group; however, in practice, any dissenting minorities were expelled from the group and they were careful about who was allowed to join the group. In 1972 the first Situationist International fell apart.
Surrealism Art Styles/Movements
(1920s-1930s) Surrealism was both a art and literary movement that stressed the significance of letting one’s imagination rule through the use of the sub-conscious without the hindrances of logic and normal standards. The anti-rationalist characteristic that stemmed from the Dadaist movement was a part of Surrealism. However, Surrealism involved more playful and spontaneous in spirit. Ways of thinking about how a viewer perceives the world around himself helped to shape the movement. The movement was begun in 1924 in the city Paris by Andre Breton, the author of the ‘Manifeste du surrealisme.’ His writings encouraged the expression of one’s imagination through the use of dreams. His writings attracted many artists of the Dadaist movement. The Surrealist movement was helped along in its development during the 1920s and 1930s with the famous artist Salvador Dali. He, along with the other movement’s artists, stressed using the subconscious part of the brain to provide the content for the imagery. The artists used a realistic style to paint their irrational images. Sigmund Freud and Carl Jung, men who developed psychoanalytical theories, played a profound influence on the movement’s development. And techniques such as automatism (free association) assisted the artists to put their theories into play in order to get their sub-conscious to become reality in their paintings and literary works. Artists who used automatism to help create their work were called Absolute Surrealists. And artists who focused on making connections amongst material and abstract forms were called Veristic Surrealists. Their aim was to manipulate objects from reality into their paintings, as opposed to the Absolute Surrealists who tried to create imagery from their own minds. The Surrealist movement had a big impact on the later movements of Magic Realism and Abstract Expressionism. Moreover, the movement encouraged the idea of maintaining expressive thought in one’s artwork. Key artists of the movement include: Marcel Duchamp, Georgia O'Keeffe, Max Ernst, Sir Henry Moore, Rene Magritte, Joan Miro, Salvador Dali, Pablo Picass, Man Ray, Dorothea Tanning, and MC Escher.
.
Rectus Abdominis Artist Anatomy
Rectus Abdominis Part of the torso, the rectus absominis is located at the inferior end of the sternum and cartilage of the ribcage. It originates at the pubic arch of the pelvis. It is responsible for allowing the body to tilt the ribcage forwards and backwards.
External Oblique Artist Anatomy
Part of the torso, the external oblique is on the body’s ribs where they join up with the cartilages. The lateral edge of the rectus abdominis is attached to the medial edge through the use of a tendon that covers the latter muscle. The external oblique allows the ribcage to rotate from side to side. The left external oblique pushes the ribcage causing the left shoulder to move to the front; this works the same way for the right external oblique. It is also responsible for bending the lower part of the spine side to side.
Serratus Anterior Artist Anatomy
Part of the torso, the serratus anterior is located beneath the scapula to its medial edge. It is responsible for moving the scapula from side-to-side. The arm is able to raise above the shoulder by means of the serratus anterior rolling its inferior angle upward.
Latissimus Dorsi Artist Anatomy
Part of the torso, the latissimus dorsi includes the posterior, upper medial border of the pelvis, and all of the vertebrae located from the sixth thoracic to the sacrum. It is located on the anterior surface of the humerus; it is responsible for extending the shoulder.
Teres Major Artist Anatomy
The teres major is positioned at the lower angle of the scapula. It is inserted below the head at the anterior surface of the humerus. It is responsible for rotating the arm medially.
Infraspinatus Artist Anatomy
Infraspinatus is positioned below the spine on the surface of the scapula. It is inserted on the posterior side of the head of the humerus. It is responsible for moving the upper arm outwardly in a rotating motion.
Deltoid Artist Anatomy
The deltoid is positioned at the lateral third of clavicle and spine of scapulal; it includes the acromion process. It is inserted almost halfway down on the lateral surface of the humerus, and allows the body to raise the arm at the shoulder.
Pectoralis Major Artist Anatomy
Part of the shoulder girdle, the pectoralis major is positioned at the medial half of the clavicle, the lateral surface of the sternum, and the top of the abdominal aponeurosis. It is a ridge on the front of the humerus beneath the head. It is responsible for moving the arm over and across the body and allowing the upper arm to rotate inwardly.
Linear Perspective Art Perspective
Linear Perspective relates to the mathematical system of creating objects that are created three-dimensionally on a two-dimensional surface. It is called “linear” perspective because objects and figures and space are re-created in a realistic manner through the use of intersecting lines drawn horizontally and vertically. There are three types of linear perspective. They include one point perspective, two-point perspective, and three-point perspective. All of the perspectives include a horizon line and a stationary point (the position of the observer). In one point perspective, there is one point that all lines radiate from. In two-point perspective, there exist two points from which an object’s lines radiate from; the sides of the object vanish to one of two vanishing points on the horizon line. An object’s vertical lines do not relate to the perspective rules of the horizontal lines. By changing the vanishing points of the object, one can make increase or decrease the size of the object. In three-point perspective there are also two vanishing points somewhere on the horizon; however, unlike two-point perspective, there also exists a vanishing point above or below the horizon line that the vertical lines disappear to.
parallel lines Art Perspective
Parallel Lines are lines that run in the same direction; they never touch each other because the distance running between them is always the same. In perspective drawing, lines that are parallel converge in the distance at a vanishing point.
Point of View Art Perspective
A point of view in drawing is simply what position an observer is in relation to the objects in a picture. The point of view is determined by where a viewer is stationed in relation to everything else he sees. For example, if one has a birds-eye view, one will see objects beneath him. If one has a normal view, objects will appear how he normally sees them. If one has a worms-eye view, objects will appear much larger than normal.
Horizon Line Art Perspective
The horizon line is a line drawn across a picture. It is essential for a picture to have a horizon line if a person wishes to communicate from what perspective a person is observing the picture (from above an object, below an object…etc). It is not necessary to include the horizon line in the picture. However, it is important to include a ‘virtual’ horizon line in order to make a picture follow correct perspective. The horizon line is always one’s eye level. If one draws a line perpendicular to the ground outwardly from one’s eye level, this is what is considered the horizon line.
Vanishing Point Art Perspective
A point that receding parallel lines appear to converge to. It is used in linear perspective in relation to a stationary point (the placement of the observer). Objects seem to disappear at the vanishing point.
One point perspective Art Perspective
One-point perspective is a type of linear perspective. All categories of linear perspective include a horizon line and a stationary point (the position of the observer). In one-point perspective, only one vanishing point exists; lines radiate outwardly from this point, and perpendicular lines meet at this point. One-point perspective is the same as parallel perspective.
two point perspective Art Perspective
Two-point perspective is a type of linear perspective. All categories of linear perspective include a horizon line and a stationary point (the position of the observer). In two-point perspective, there exist two points from which an object’s lines radiate from; the sides of the object vanish to one of two vanishing points on the horizon line. An object’s vertical lines do not relate to the perspective rules of the horizontal lines. By changing the vanishing points of the object, one can make increase or decrease the size of the object. Two-point perspective is the same as angular perspective.
three point perspective Art Perspective
Three-point perspective is a type of linear perspective. All categories of linear perspectives include a horizon line and a stationary point (the position of the observer). In three-point perspective there are also two vanishing points somewhere on the horizon; however, unlike two-point perspective, there also exists a vanishing point above or below the horizon line that the vertical lines disappear to. Three-point perspective is the same as oblique perspective.
Rhomboids Artist Anatomy
Part of the shoulder girdle, the rhomboids include the seventh cervical vertebra and thoracic vertebrae. It is located at the medial border of scapula. The function of the rhomboids is to draw the scapula toward the spine, and rotates its inferior angle medially.
Trapezius Artist Anatomy
Part shoulder girdle, the trapezius extends from a short horizontal line on the base of the skull to all of the vertebrae down to the 10th thoracic. It is located at the spine of the scapula, the medial side of the acromion process of the scapula, and the lateral third of the clavicle. Its upper third raises the scapula. With the scapula remaining motionless, it draws the head upright, backward, toward the shoulder, and rotates the face to the opposite side. Its middle third brings the scapula towards the spine. The lower third brings it downward. Both sides work together to extend the head.
Tensor Fascia Lata Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the tensor fascia lata includes the anterior superior iliac spine. It is located at the iliotibial band. The function of the tensor fascia lata is to flex and abduct the thigh; it also allows the thigh to rotate.
Gluteus Medius Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the gluteus medius includes a wide area on the lateral surface of the ilium. It is located at the great trochanter of the femur. The function of the gluteus medius is to lift the thigh to the side. Moreover, its anterior and posterior sections rotate it medially and from side-to-side.
Gluteus Maximus Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the gluteus maximus includes the posterior, lateral surfaces of ilium,sacrum, and coccyx, as well as a number of ligaments on the pelvis.) It is located at the upper, posterior surface of the femur, and the iliotibial band. The function of the gluteus maximus is to straighten the thigh at the hip and bring it backwards.
Vastus Medialis Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the vastus medialis includes the area of the front surface on the upper end of the femur. The belly twists around the medial side of the femur and connects to a long line on the back. The function of the vastus medialis is to straighten the leg at the knee.
Vastus Lateralis Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the vastus lateralis includes the front surface on the upper end of the femur. The belly twists around the lateral side of the femur and connects to a long line on the back. The function of the vastus lateralis is to straighten the leg at the knee.
Rectus Femoris Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the rectus femoris includes the anterior inferior iliac spine of the pelvis. It is located at the patellar tendon. Its function is to straighten the leg at the knee, and bend it at the hip.
Sartorius Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the sartorius includes the anterior superior iliac spine of pelvis. It is located at the upper medial surface of the tibia. It is responsible for flexing the leg at both the hip and the knee, and rotating the leg from side-to-side.
Semitendinosus Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the semitendinosus includes the ischial tuberosity. It is located at the medial condyle of tibia. The function of the semitendinosus is to pull the thigh backwards, rotate it inwards, and bend the leg at the knee.
Semimembranosus Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the semimembranosus includes the ischial tuberosity. It is located at the medial condyle of the tibia. The function of the semimembranosus is to pull the thigh backwards, bend the leg at the knee, and rotate the lower leg inward.
Biceps Femoris Artist Anatomy
Part of the hip and thigh section of the body, the biceps femoris includes the long head that extends from the ischial tuberosity. The short head comes from a line on the back of the femur that is positioned underneath the long head. It is located at head of the fibula. The biceps femoris is responsible for pulling the thigh backwards and bending the leg at the knee.
Gastrocnemius Artist Anatomy
Part of the lower leg, the gastrocnemius includes the medial head that joins to the femur just above the medial condyle ( the lateral head operates the same way above the lateral condyle). It is located at the achilles tendon to the bone of the heel, the calcaneus. The function of the gastrocnemius is to straighten the joint of the ankle to point the left or right foot, or lift a person that is standing onto the ball of his/her foot.
Soleus Artist Anatomy
Part of the lower leg, the soleus includes the posterior surfaces of tibia and fibula. It is located at the achilles tendon to the bone of the heel. It works the same way as the gastrocnemius; it is responsible for straightening the joint of the ankle, pointing the left or right foot, or lifting a person onto the ball of his/her foot.
Tibialis Anterior Artist Anatomy
Part of the lower leg, the tibialis anterior includes the upper lateral and anterior surface of tibia. It is located at the bottom surface of the first metatarsal and the cuneiform bone of the foot. The tibialis anterior is responsible for bending the joint of the ankle, turning the bottom of the foot inward, and bringing the top of the foot upward.
Peroneus Longus Artist Anatomy
Part of the lower leg, the peroneus longus includes the lateral condyle of the tibia, the lateral surface of the fibula, and the front of the head of the fibula. It is located at a tendon running down the posterior side of the ankle and under the foot to the first metatarsal. It is responsible for pointing the foot, bringing the bottom of the foot from side-to-side.
Biceps Artist Anatomy
Part of the upper arm, the biceps include two points on the deep anterior, superior part of the scapula. Each of the two points is for a particular head. These points involve the glenoid fossa and the coracoid process. The biceps are located at the anterior surface of the radius below the head. They are responsible for bending the arm at the elbow and turning the forearm palm-up.
Brachialis Artist Anatomy
Part of the upper arm, the brachialis includes the anterior surface of humerus. It is located at the anterior surface on the head of the ulna. The brachialis is responsible for bending the arm at the elbow.
Coracobrachialis Artist Anatomy
Part of the upper arm, the coracobrachialis includes the coracoid process of scapula. It is located at the mid-point on the medial side of the humerus. The Coracobrachilis is responsible for adducting the upper arm and bringing it forward.
Triceps Artist Anatomy
Part of the upper arm, the triceps include the medial and lateral heads that join to the posterior surface of the humerus. The long head joins to the lower border of the scapula, nearby to the arm socket. All the heads connect to the triceps tendon that is positioned at the base of the ulna on its posterior side (the point is called the olecranon). The triceps are responsible for extending the arm at elbow.
Brachioradialis Artist Anatomy
Part of the forearm, the brachioradialis includes a short line on the lateral edge of the humerus. It is located at the proximal end of the radius on its lateral side. The brachioradialis is responsible for bending the forearm at elbow.
Extensor Carpi Radialis Longus Artist Anatomy
Part of the forearm, the extensor carpi radialis longus includes the lateral epicondyle of the humerus and ridge just above it. It is located at the dorsal surface of base of the second metacarpal.
Extensor Carpi Radialis Brevis Artist Anatomy
Part of the forearm, the extensor carpi radialis brevis includes the lateral epicondyle of the humerus. It is located at the dorsal surface of base of the second metacarpal. The extensor carpi radialis brevis is responsible for straightening and pulling back the wrist.
Extensor Digitorum Artist Anatomy
Part of the forearm, the extensor digitorum includes the lateral epicondyle of the humerus. It is located at the dorsal surface of the four fingers. The extensor digitorum is responsible for straightening and pulling back the fingers.
Extensor Carpi Ulnaris Artist Anatomy
Part of the forearm, the extensor carpi ulnaris includes the lateral epicondyle of the humerus and dorsal surface of the ulna. It is located at the dorsal surface of fifth metacarpal. The extensor carpi ulnaris is responsible for extending the wrist and bending it sideways towards the ulna.
Anconeus Artist Anatomy
Paft of the forearm, the anconeus includes the lateral epicondyle of humerus. It is located at the lecranon and upper portion of ulna. The anconeus is responsible for straightening the arm at the elbow.
Sternocleidomastoid Artist Anatomy
Part of the next and throat, the sternocleidomastoid includes the sternum and the medial third of the clavicle. It is located at the mastoid process on the skull. The sternocleidomastoid is responsible for bending the head laterally to the same side, bringing the ear toward the shoulder. It is also responsible for rotating the head – allowing the face to turn away. The head rolls toward the back from both of its sides working together.
Flex Artist Anatomy
To flex as it relates to muscles means to bend. A flexor is a muscle that flexes.
Extend Artist Anatomy
To extend as it relates to muscles means to straighten. An extensor is a muscle that extends.
Abduct Artist Anatomy
To abduct as it relates to muscles means to draw away from the midline. An abductor is a muscle that abducts.
Adduct Artist Anatomy
To adduct as it relates to muscles means to draw toward the midline. An adductor is a muscle that adducts.
Pronate Artist Anatomy
To pronate as it relates to muscles means to turn downward in regard to the forearm. A pronator is a muscle that pronates.
Supinate Artist Anatomy
To supinate as it relates to muscles is to turn upward in regards to the forearm. A supinator is a muscle that supinates.
Levator Artist Anatomy
A levator is the term used to describe a muscle that lifts or holds up something.
Depressor Artist Anatomy
A depressor is the term used to describe a muscle that lowers something.
Erector Artist Anatomy
An erector is the term used to describe a muscle that holds something upright or erect.
Tensor Artist Anatomy
A tensor is the term used to describe a muscle that grips or tightens around something.
Midline / Axes Artist Anatomy
The midline is an axis of the body that separates the right and left sides of the body. Any item that follows perpendicular to the midline or longitudinal axis is regarded as being horizontal. Items that move diagonally are called oblique. And any items that move parallel to the midline are regarded as vertical.
Anterior Artist Anatomy
The term anterior is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. Anterior refers to the body’s front-side.
Posterior Artist Anatomy
The term posterior is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. Posterior refers to the back-side of the figure.
Ventral Artist Anatomy
The term ventral is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term ventral is the same thing as anterior.
Dorsal Artist Anatomy
The term dorsal is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term dorsal is the same thing as posterior. In addition, dorsal may refer to the top of the foot or the back of the hand.
Medial Artist Anatomy
The term medial is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term medial signifies moving towards the midline.
Lateral Artist Anatomy
The term lateral is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term lateral signifies moving away from the midline, either to the left or to the right.
Internal (anatomy) Artist Anatomy
The term internal is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term internal signifies the movement towards the middle of a hollow form (like the trunk).
External (anatomy) Artist Anatomy
The term external is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term external signifies moving toward the exterior of a hollow form (like the trunk).
Deep Artist Anatomy
The term deep is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term deep signifies moving toward the middle of a form that is solid (like the leg).
Superficial Artist Anatomy
The term superficial is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term superficial signifies moving toward the surface of a form that is solid (like a leg).
Proximal Artist Anatomy
The term proximal is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term proximal relates to a section on a limb that is nearer to the trunk in distance.
Distal Artist Anatomy
The term proximal is a descriptive word regarding the locations of the body. The term distal relates to a section on a limb that is father from the trunk (in proximity).
Eminence Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, an eminence is the lowest type of flat bump – the lowest type of convexity.
Protuberance Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, a protuberance is a bigger, rather round bump.
Tuberosity Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, a tuberosity is a tall, extended bump.
Process Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, a process is a finger-like shape that extends outwardly.
Ramus Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, a ramus is a extension of bone that is flat in shape.
Spine Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, a spine is an elongated sharp ridge.
Crest Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, a crest is an edge similar to the edge of a cliff.
Condyle Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, a condyle is a knobby shape that is in front of the body’s joints.
Epicondyle Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone convex form, an epicondyle is a bump located by a condyle.
Trochlea Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone concave form, a trochlea is formed in a spool shape to take in a convexity at a joint and permit movement solely through one plane.
Facet Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone concave form, facet is a small depression that takes in the convexity of a secondary bone at a joint.
Fossa Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone concave form, a fossa is a hollow that is not as shallow as a facet.
Groove Artist Anatomy
A term describing a type of bone concave form, a groove is a linear, skinny depression.
Register artwork Business Art
To register a piece of artwork means to register it with a copyright office. The registration of a piece of artwork can happen at any point once the artwork is finished. The registration does not include copyright protection. Rather, registration is a legal formality ensuring the work is on public record. Regardless, this legal formality is essential to an artist if he hopes to license his work or show his work in any way that may put the artwork at risk of possible infringement. There is little cost in registering pieces of artwork and a savy artist does it to basically protect the work from another person copying it.
In order to register a piece of artwork, an artist completes an application and sends it to the copyright office. The application includes a filing fee, a deposit of copies of the artwork, and a visual arts application form. Registration of the artwork may take a number of months. However, the copyright leverage becomes effective starting from the date the application is received by the copyright office. An artist may obtain copies of the application form online from the United States Copyright Office.
Niche Market Business Art
Finding a niche market is essential for any artist to successfully sell his artwork. Understanding where and who potential buyers are is part of finding the niche market. An artist must also know how much he can charge for his art in relation to what other artists creating similar pieces are charging. Analyzing who has purchased artwork in the past and at what cost, as well as finding art agents, and licensees are other parts of finding one’s niche market.
Documentation of Sales Business Art
Using a bill of sale is the ideal way to go for artists because it allows one to include some essential terms of the sale, as well as keep a record of past sales. It is not enough to use a receipt or invoice because they permit only limited information of one’s sales. A bill of sale can include: the size and title of the art piece along with other identifying information, other additional items included in the sale (such as any matting or framework), the sale price, the sale date, certain instructions (such as maintenance concerns), and particular terms of the artwork agreement. If the artwork is a commission piece, the bill of sale should describe the terms of the commission agreement.
Gallery Display Business Art
An artist needs exposure for his artwork. To do this, one may work with organizations, websites and galleries to display the work. In working with anyone or organization, an artist needs to maintain control over his rights of the artwork. For example, to display work with a gallery, an agreement is signed in regard to how the gallery will present and hold the artwork. The placement of the artwork, the framing of the artwork, terms of delivery, the sale price and the value of the work should be clarified, identification of the artwork, fees for displaying the artwork and the time the exhibition will be displayed all need to be included within an agreement. It is also important to include any license information that allows the gallery to reproduce the artist’s work without infringement. One should be careful to analyze the license terms of agreement as a separate entity especially if the license includes terms that go beyond reproduction for publicity purposes. Also any gallery agreement must include information about the risk of loss of the artwork should any event or damage occur. Galleries should have insurance that takes care of artwork exhibited.
Website Display Business Art
An artist needs exposure for his artwork. To do this, one may work with organizations, websites and galleries to display the work. In working with anyone or organization, an artist needs to maintain control over his rights of the artwork. Gaining exposure via the web is a popular to present one’s artwork. However, it is important to take necessary precautions because people can easily download one’s artwork images. To prevent copyright infringement, one should incorporate a copyright notice in the image file that includes the “©” symbol and one’s name. Also, adding a watermark on the image notifies people immediately that the artwork is protected. Moreover, one should include a statement that clearly states that one’s images are subject to copyright and that the artist’s rights are reserved. And lastly, it is ideal to format one’s images online that that they cannot be downloaded.
Artist Agent Business Art
An artist agent is a person hired to help an artist gain exposure for his artwork and to generate sales. Agents receive up to 50% of an artist’s profits. Therefore, it is important that the agent representing one’s artwork is chosen carefully and keeps one’s best interests in mind. An agent should specialize in the type of artwork an artist creates. It is also important that an agent has good referrals and gives one access to previous or current clients to learn how good the agent performs his/her job. An artist and an artist agent sign a fair agent agreement to work together professionally.
Fair Agent Agreement Business Art
A fair agent agreement is an agreement made between an artist and an artist agent in regard to how the agent will go about gaining exposure for the artist’s work. Some agreements are exclusive agreements – in other words, one agrees to work with only one particular agent. Some agents desire an artist to sign an agency agreement that lasts up to three years. This provides them the chance to market one’s work and start working on licenses agreements. It is best not to sign an agreement longer than a year with an art agent unless one is interested in licensing one’s work. This way if an agent does not perform his/her job to one’s tastes, one can then switch to another agent in a shorter amount of time.
A few key items that are important in a fair agent agreement are statements that allow any work loaned to the agent to be returned once the agreement ends, a description of the reservation of an artist’s right to end a licensing or sale agreement, a description of who will take on the cost of advertising and promotional materials and additional expenses, the amount the agent will be paid for up-coming transactions (like sales, licenses…) without the assistance of the agent, as well as provision of the rights of both parties to end the agreement.
Licensee Business Art
A licensee is a person who licenses an artist’s work for a set amount of time. The license may be negotiated between the licensee and the artist, or the licensee and an artist agent. The licensee may have various types of legal control over an artist’s artwork. It is necessary to carefully analyze any license agreement in order that both parties are clear on their legal rights – what for example, the licensee can or cannot do in regard to the use of the artwork.
artist proof Business Art
An artist's proof is the impression of a print created in the print-making process to understand the progress of the plate an artist is working on. An artist proof can also be a test print that shows the colors that make up the final print. Frequently an artist will make a proof in order to view how the image is going to print. The term is now often used to refer to the impression of the finished work that is the same as the numbered copies. The artist's proofs are not given place in the limited edition count. Traditionally, an artist is not suppose to sell his/her proofs (which may number over twenty) immediately after printing them.
The prints are often signed “AP” or “Artist Proof” with the standard edition size not to go beyond 10% of the regular limited edition size. For example, an edition of 200 would have 20 artist proofs. Serious art collectors often want artist proofs because there are fewer of them. And sometimes an artist proof is remarqued – which makes the print even more desirable. However, it is important to note that artists’ proofs are not necessarily better in quality than the regular print edition due to modern printing techniques.
Commission Business Art
A commission is an original piece of artwork completed by an artist as requested by a client.
Dry Mount Business Art
Dry Mount is a framing method that includes gluing a print to a firm backboard (like foam core) with a heat activated dry adhesive. The method is not ideal for a limited edition print. However, dry mounting is recommended if one knows that a piece of artwork will be exposed to temperature changes and humid conditions. The dry mount technique will prevent the piece from buckling.
Gicleé Business Art
A gicleé (zee-clay) is a French word that means to spray or spit. Gicleé reproductions are images of the original piece of artwork that are created with a high-end ink jet process.
Illustration Art Materials and General Art Terms
An illustration is a general term that refers to a drawing or original piece of artwork that often includes a narrative imbedded within the image. Illustrations are often included, for example, within children’s books to provide a visual of what is happening at a set time in a story.
Image Size Business Art
The image size is the size of the artwork that is reproduced on a print. The image size refers to the actual image itself – not the overall size of the paper.
Edition Business Art
An edition is a number of prints that are created from the original piece of artwork. The number of the edition does not contain special editions or artist proofs.
Limited Edition Business Art
A limited edition is a number of prints created from an original piece of artwork that includes only a set amount of prints. Every time a print is made it includes within it a number that signifies how many prints have been made of the original since it was signed. For example, 23/200 means that the print is number 23 of 200 possible number of prints of the original. Artists frequently make use of using limited editions to add value to a print and to the original artwork.
Lithograph Business Art
A lithograph is a term that relates to general offset printing. Most print publishers today use this process of printing. It involves photographing the original artwork and then burning the image into 4 plates for a full color printing process. A roller on a printing press contains the ink. Acid free paper and a fine dot screen are used for the best lithographs.
Mass Marketed Art Business Art
Mass marketed art is that that art made for the masses. A painting, for example, may be completed assembly-line style in which several people work on the same painting, with each person doing a certain part of the painting. Mass marketed art is usually of inferior quality and is often reproductions of trendy styles, certain color combinations, and well-known pieces of art.
Matted Size Business Art
Matted size refers to the overall size of a mat that holds the original or print.
Numbered Business Art
A numbered print is a print created to display the size or limit of a print edition; usually a number is written before the size of the edition. For instance, 15/200 would explain that a print is number 15 out of an edition of 200. Sometimes with older printing processes, having a print with a lower number signifies the printing of the print is of superior quality than the prints printed after it. However, with modern printing, this is not the case.
Open Edition Business Art
An open edition is offset lithographic prints. The prints may be signed by the artist, or it may not. A print is considered to be a poster if it is not number or signed. The term also denotes that the original can be reproduced in different sizes, as well as being printed on various media (such as on coffee mugs or cloth).
Original Business Art
To purchase an original means that a person possesses the only one. An original is the work of art completed by an artist. Frequently no reproductions are created from a drawing or painting. Prints are made from photographing the original piece. An original with a limited edition print is more valuable than just the original being made because it has the opportunity to be better known and admired. Often times a print is smaller than the original.
Overall Print Size Business Art
The size of the limited edition print. The overall size includes the margins of the paper and the actual image.
Publisher Business Art
The publisher is the marketing and printer company that creates and distributes the limited edition prints for the artist. Artists may be the publisher of their artwork they have the correct equipment.
Remarque Business Art
A little original sketch completed by an artist that is positioned outside of the image of a print (often in pencil, watercolor, or ink). Serious art collects often prize a remarqued print because the print becomes a one-of-a-kind print along with the original artwork.
Sold Out Business Art
Sold out means that a limited edition print is no longer available for purchase at the issue price; instead, it is being sold at secondary market prices.
Signed Only Business Art
A print that is signed only means that the print has the artist’s signature on it, but it is not numbered. A signed only print is often known as an “open edition.”
Signed and Numbered Business Art
A print that has been signed and numbered means that the artist’s signature (usually in pencil) and the number of the edition has been put on it.
Signature Business Art
A signature may refer to the artist’s signature on a print after the printing process, or it may refer to the signature on the plate itself.
Reproof Business Art
A reproof may signify several things, including that a new negative as been created, that an original has been worked on to remove previous blemishes or mistakes, to signify a reproduction was created from the original, or that a piece has been touched up because it was harmed in some way.
Ascender Calligraphy
In calligraphy, an ascender is the section of a letter that extends over the waistline.
Ascender Line Calligraphy
In calligraphy, an ascender line is the guideline that displays how high an ascending letter is.
Base Line Calligraphy
Also known as the writing line, this is the level that a line of writing rests. The base line lends a fixed reference for the various heights of letters and the drop of the descenders.
Branching Stroke Calligraphy
In calligraphy, a branching stroke is the stroke that joins an arch to the down-stroke of a letter.
Cap Line Calligraphy
In calligraphy, the cap line is the guideline that displays how high a capital letter is.
Counter Calligraphy
In calligraphy, the counter is the space inside a letter (often it is white in color); it is the region enclosed in a letter in numeric letterforms, lowercase, and uppercase.
Cross Bar Calligraphy
In calligraphy, the cross bar is the horizontal stroke that creates the section of a letter. For example, the letter H contains a cross bar.
Descender Calligraphy
A descender is the section of the letterform that goes under the baseline; frequently it refers to lowercase letters, as well as to various punctuation marks. However, a few typefaces include uppercase letters with descenders.
Downstroke Calligraphy
In calligraphy, a downstroke is a stroke that is positioned downward along the descender or base line.
Ductus Calligraphy
In calligraphy, a ductus is the direction, number and sequence of the strokes that work together to create a letter.
Flourish Calligraphy
A flourish is an elongated pen stroke or linear decoration element that enhances a letter’s basic form.
Nib Width Calligraphy
In calligraphy, a nib width is the width of a tool’s edge. There are various sizes of nib widths. For example, a letter may be written at 8 nib widths high or at 4 nib widths high. A letter written with at 8 nib widths high will be twice as light as one written at 4 nib widths high.
Pen Angle Calligraphy
In calligraphy, a pen angle is the angle that a nib connects with the paper in relation to the base line.
Serif Calligraphy
Serif is the shorthand device or pen stroke that ends the main stroke of a letter’s form. Examples of serif include the hook or hairline.
Slant Line Calligraphy
In calligraphy, a slant line is a guideline that displays the appropriate slant.
Interletter Space Calligraphy
In calligraphy, an interletter space is a space that exists between two letters.
Interword Space Calligraphy
In calligraphy, an interword space is the space that exists between two words.
Interlinear Space Calligraphy
In calligraphy, an interlinear space is the space that exists between two lines of writing.
Thin Calligraphy
In calligraphy, “thin” refers to a stroke that is very fine. “Thin” is sometimes referred to as a hairline.
Waistline Calligraphy
In calligraphy, a waistline refers to a guideline that displays the appropriate position of the upper boundary of the x-height.
X height Calligraphy
In calligraphy, “height” refers to a section of a letter or all of a letter that rests between the waistline and the base line.
AMV Anime / Manga
AMVs stands for anime music videos. AMVs are usually non-professional combinations of anime clips with songs that do not relate to one another. AMVs may be done in fun and lightheartedness, and others are quite serious. In either case, they are an enjoyed feature at conventions revolving around anime.
Anime Calligraphy
Pronounced a-nee-may, anime refers to any of the various forms of animation in the country of Japan. Outside the country, anime relates strictly to Japanese animation. Sometimes anime is called “Japanimation.”
Anime Anime / Manga
Pronounced a-nee-may, anime refers to any of the various forms of animation in the country of Japan. Outside the country, anime relates strictly to Japanese animation. Sometimes anime is called “Japanimation.”
Baka Anime / Manga
In anime, baka is a term that may be heard when one watches a sub-titled anime film. It translates to “idiot,” “stupid,” or “fool.”
Chibi Anime / Manga
Chibi in Japan signifies little or small and has the negative connotation of being translated as “puny.” Anime American watchers usually understand the word to signify that a character is very deformed, tiny or cute.
Cosplay Anime / Manga
In anime, cosplay is a term that is shorthand for “costume play.” The term originated from the custom of anime watchers to put on the outfits of anime characters and playing out scenes from anime films. Cosplay is a big part of the anime conventions that happen all over the world.
Dating Sim Anime / Manga
In anime, dating sim is shorthand for dating simulation. Dating sim is a kind of interactive first-person computer game. In dating sim, a character tries to generate romantic interests in a variety of possible story lines. They usually do not contain any animation. Once in awhile dating sim may include hidden characters. Often they are used for source material in anime series.
Dojinshi/Doujinshi Anime / Manga
The term refers to fans of anime that take favorite characters from anime series and make them in their own fiction stories. The practice is heavily done and enjoyed in Japan despite the fact that it is technically illegal under Japanese copyright laws.
Dubtitles Anime / Manga
Dubtitles is a term that refers to subtitles for an anime that are identical to the English script (as opposed to a straight translation of the original Japanese content).
Ecchi Anime / Manga
Ecchi refers in anime to something that is perverted, such as Playboy pictorial in the United States.
Ero Game/Hentai Game Anime / Manga
A version of a dating sim that is adults-only because of its erotic content. The game revolves around having sexual intercourse with potential characters. Dark themes and erotic visuals are frequently used. S&M content, rape, and bondage may be included in a game.
Eye Catch Anime / Manga
An eye catch is a title screen, scene or illustration within an animation episode that signifies the exit to or the return from a commercial break. An eye catch is often viewed during Japanese TV programming; it is not animated.
Fanboy/Fangirl Anime / Manga
Fanboy and fangirl are rather negative terms used to refer to an obsessive anime fan from the United States. The term “trekkie” is its equivalent.
Fan Service Anime / Manga
Fan service may refer to shots of a woman’s undergarments or body solely for the sake of visual pleasure. The term may also refer to any items included within manga or anime for the sake of pleasing the fans.
Fansub Anime / Manga
Fansub is an anime that is subtitled by non-professionals. It is frequently done as a result of no dubbing being yet available for a particular anime. Frequently anime releases can be accessed in fansub form several months in advance of when a professional version is completed. One can obtain fansub forms through the internet, in college anime groups or at anime conventions. Though illegal, fansub forms are often allowed because of marketing purposes. Once the official anime release is in circulation in the United States, many internet sources pull out the illegal versions.
A Line Gown Fashion
An A-line gown is a form-fitting bodice that flares outward to a full skirt from the waistline. The waist of the gown is seamless.
A Line Skirt / Flare Skirt Fashion
A type of skirt that fits a woman at her waist and flares outward in a tulip shape (or A-line) at the hem.
Bateau Neck / Boat Neck Fashion
A bateau (or boat) neck is a wide, long neckline that follows along across the back and front of a garment and joins at the shoulders. The depth in the back and the front is the same.
Besom Pockets Fashion
Besom Pockets are pockets that are placed inside a garment; a person accesses the pocket through the use of a welted opening.
Bias Cut Fashion
A bias cut is a cut that is done diagonally across a fabric’s grain. Bias cuts are usually used to make garments designed to shape closely to the body’s curves. A woman named Madeleine Vionnet was especially well-known for bias-cut dresses.
Bike Tard Fashion
A bike tard is a one-piece garment that extends from the hem of the shorts to the top of a figure’s torso
Bolero Jacket Fashion
A bolero jacket is a waist-length comfortable jacket that is open at the front.
Boot Cut Fashion
A boot cut is a garment design that lands under the belly button and flares a little bit from the knee to the ankle.
Box Pleated Fashion
A section of a garment is said to be box-pleated when there exist two folds of fabric that are joined to form a pleat.
Boy Leg Fashion
Boy-leg refers to swimwear, underwear or shorts that fit the legs closely and extend only half way down the thigh.
Broomstick Fashion
A broomstick is a dress or skirt that contains several pleats and crinkly fabric.
Camp Pockets Fashion
Camp Pockets are pockets positioned on the exterior of a garment and are frequently seamed and squared-off.
Cap Sleeve Fashion
A cap sleeve is a sleeve that is short and small that rests on the shoulder; it creates a stiff cap or covering on the arm to allow for only a small amount of coverage.
Cardigan Jacket Fashion
A cardigan jacket is a jacket or sweater not containing a collar; it is open at the garment’s front.
Cargo Fashion
Cargo refers to a garment’s design that includes a large pocket with a pleat and flap.
Graphic Novel / GN Anime / Manga
A graphic novel is simply the collected issues of manga or comic books into one book. The term may also refer to a novel adaptation or original story that is told in comic book form but bound in a book format. Because of their visual content, manga graphic novels are often presented in a wider version of a paperback novel.
Harem Series Anime / Manga
Harem series is a will-liked subgenre of romantic comedy; they focus on a young man who cohabitates with several young women. There exist basically two ways the story may go. In one form, the young man likes a particular young woman, but is lured by the other woman. Or, the young man cannot decide which woman he wants and the story revolves around the women trying to get his favor. Frequently the young man is a nice, rather gentle sort of person, whereas the women are strong, talented and aggressive.
Hentai Anime / Manga
Hentai is translated as being perverted when it refers to adult-only anime; it contains erotic, highly visual sexual content.
Hikikomori Anime / Manga
Hikikomori is an anti-social behavioral pattern happening in Japan. It involves individuals removing themselves from society and demonstrating hermit-like behavior; they stay in their rooms and shut the door to the rest of the world as they surround themselves with anime, whether it be watching anime, playing games or reading manga.
Hepburn System Anime / Manga
The Hepburn system is a frequently used technique of transliterating Japanese written content into English writing.
Honorifics Anime / Manga
In Japan, honorifics are put at the end of a name in order to display a degree of formality and familiarity that a speaker uses when referring to a particular individual. Not using honorific signifies disdain for a person or it may signify that the speaker and addressed person as being very close. Recently the use of honorifics has become more frequent in subtitling and English dubs. Various forms of honorifics in anime include: chan, dono, kun, nii/nee, sama, san, senpai, and sensei.
Chan Anime / Manga
Chan is an honorific term used in anime that signifies a level of closeness or affection for a particular person (usually a female). The term may also be used in relation to a pet or a child.
Dono Anime / Manga
Dono is an archaic honorific term used in anime that translated means “honorable.” In other countries its equivalent is “Lord” or “Sir.”
Kun Anime / Manga
Kun is an honorific term used in anime in order to refer to students or men colleagues. It is not usually a term to be used to address women.
Nii / Nee Anime / Manga
Nii or nee are honorific terms used in anime that translates as big brother or big sister.
Sama Anime / Manga
Sama is an honorific term used in anime that translated means Mrs. or Mr. They are used to signify respect. They are not normally used in conversion.
San Anime / Manga
San is an honorific term used in anime that translated means Mrs. or Mr. San is used when a person of equal social status is being addressed and the person wishes to be more formal.
Senpai Anime / Manga
Senpai is an honorific term in anime that is used to signify that a person is an elder, senior or upperclassmen. Senpai is used to address a person who holds a higher position than a person of the same social class.
Josei Anime / Manga
Josei is a category of manga and anime created for woman over eighteen; the stories are filled with adult women and focus on daily experiences and romance that is more practical and less idealistic. The term may sometimes relate to a sexual preference for older women in manga and anime.
Kana Anime / Manga
Kana is the Japanese phonetic version of the written language. Kana comes in two forms – katakana and hiragana. Katakana may be used to stress a certain aspect of a word (similar to putting the word in bold print or in italics). It may also be used to write names and words that come from other languages (with the exception of Chinese). Hiragana is normally used to change kanji and write Chinese and Japanese words phonetically. Both katakana and hiragana use forty-six basic characters that in turn can be made into one hundred syllables.
Kanji Anime / Manga
Kanji is made up of Chinese characters that create one of the three main scripts utilized for Japanese writing; the other two basic scripts are katakana and hiragana. Kanji characters may be a whole word or the stem of the word depending upon the context. Frequently the meaning of the symbols communicate better than the phonetically-written versions of the same word. However, they are also more intricate and complex, and not useful to phonetic writing. Thus, they are not useful for words that are taken from languages other than Chinese.
Kawaii Anime / Manga
A common word in the original Japanese vocal tracks for United States fans not familiar with the Japanese language. Kawaii means “It is so cute!” It is a phrase most often used by female characters.
Lolicon Anime / Manga
Lolicon is an English transliteration of the Japanese shorthand version of “Lolita Complex.” Lolicon involves explicit sexual visuals of young girls in anime and manga.
Mahou Shojo Anime / Manga
Mahou shojo translates to “magical girl.” The term refers to a genre that is directed at young girls – whether they be teens or soon-to-be teens.
Mecha Anime / Manga
Mecha is a genre of anime that uses combat suits and giant robots within the storyline. The term may also refer directly to the combat suits or robots.
Moe Anime / Manga
Moe is a weak tendency of a female character in manga or anime that elicits an affectionate response from viewers. Usually the female characters are innocent or physically young. The characters have an obvious weakness they try hard to fix in themselves. Moe is not related to any sexual content directly.
Omake Anime / Manga
Omake is the bonus animation content that is put on a DVD or videotape. Frequently this additional animation contains super-deformed characters.
Otaku Anime / Manga
Otaku is a term that refers to a loyal fan. In the United States, the term is devoid of any negative connotation and is used as a badge of honor by dedicated anime fans. In Japan the term otaku contains within it implications of someone being too attached and involved with a particular hobby.
Ronin Anime / Manga
Ronin is a term referring to a samurai that has no mater. Nowadays it may also refer to college students who have yet to pass college entrance exams and so they attend cram schools to catch up.
Seinen Anime / Manga
Seinen is a category of anime and manga that is directed towards men. It may involve pornographic material. In the United States the equivalent of seinen is mature audiences.
Senpai / Sempai Anime / Manga
The term refers to a title addressed to an upperclassman or an individual who is senior to the person speaking.
Sentai Anime / Manga
Sentai translates to “battle team.” The term refers to team action series that includes super heroes in costumes.
Shojo / Shuojo Anime / Manga
The term refers to anime that focuses on manga stemming from girls’ magazines. However, in the United States the term refers to manga and anime that is directed at girls.
Shojo Ai Anime / Manga
Shojo Ai translates to “girl love.” The term references to plots involving girl couples that focus on their growing romantic relationship as opposed to erotic sexual behavior. It is not often shown in the United States.
Shonen Ai / Shuonen Ai Anime / Manga
The term translates to “boy love.” The term references to plots involving male couples. Currently, it is not fashionable in Japan. However, the term is used in United States to refer to storylines regarding the relationship between homosexuals. However, rather than revolve around any erotic sexual behavior, the term refers to their relationship that is built on a growing romance.
Special Edition Anime / Manga
A special edition is manga printed in an individual issue or older graphic novel in the original Japanese format (bound on the right side and one reads it from right to left). However, it should be noted that for the most part, manga is released nowadays “unflipped” in the United States; thus, the term is falling out of usage as it relates to these types of printings.
Superdeformed / SD Anime / Manga
Superdeformed refers to a very small caricature rendition of an anime character. Usually they are visible in comedy and omake anime. Animation from the United States does not contain these types of characters.
Tsundere Anime / Manga
Tsundere refers to a personality that is at first defensive and aggressive, but as time goes by becomes affectionate and emotionally open. One good example of tsundere is Asuka Langley Soryu of Neon Genesis Evangelion.
Visual Novel Anime / Manga
A visual novel is a partially interactive Japanese computer game that relates a storyline by means of still visuals and words positioned at the lower half of the screen. Visual novels do not give many choices like dating sims. Occasionally a visual novel may be adapted into anime.
Yaoi Anime / Manga
Yaoi is an acronym in Japanese that gives a negative viewpoint of gay relationships. Yaoi may relate to storylines that revolve around homosexual relationships between men, or to art made by anime fans and storylines that couple male characters from popular series. Yaoi in the United States brings with it bigger references to homoerotic behavior.
Yuri Anime / Manga
Yuri translates to “lily flower.” In Japan, the term usually refers to storylines that involve woman/woman relationships that are authored by men and directed at men. However, the term in the United States brings with it references to erotic sexual behaviors between women.
Color Correction Print Making
Color correction is the altering of shades, hues, channels, contrast and amounts of separate colors prior to printing in order to prevent any color casts and balancing problems that may result from the scanned image or original.
Color Management Print Making
Color management is a process of controlling the output and input devices regarding how they understand the hues they are utilizing. Frequently this is completed in a software that manipulates images (like Photoshop) prior to printing; RIP software contains color profiles that are designed to pair colors together when printing occurs on various colors of paper. The term “proofing” refers to the process of working to get a file to the appropriate stage.
CMYK Print Making
CMYK stands for cyan, magenta, yellow and key (black). It is a color system that is used by printers to put each color on a separate printing plate in order to create a final full color image. It is also known as “four color printing.” It should be noted that the majority of giclee printers print to an inkjet printer in RGB. This is because there exists a superior color gamut, and images are captured in RGB by scanners.
Digital Camera Print Making
This is a type of camera that intakes information in a digital file format (as opposed to film). This type of camera removes the film process of reproducing an image. This creates the opportunity for permitting less color casts. And since the data is digital, the archive is better.
Scanback Print Making
A scanback is a professional back for large format studio photography. The majority of scanbacks can make files of 300 – 500 MB. They are scanned right onto a computer. The drawback is that they are very expensive and to make them requires a person to have extensive photographic knowledge.
Digital Print Print Making
A digital print is a print that is made on an inkjet printer; the print comes from a digital file on a computer. Giclees are a type of digital print.
Dots Per Inch / Pixels Per Inch Print Making
Dots per inch or pixels per inch are the units of measurement used by the output device quality of print. It relates to the number of pixels or dots that a printer is capable of printing in each inch. For example, a print at 72dpi will have 5184 dots on one square inch or the paper (72 x 72). It may also relate to the pixels or the dots per inch of an image that is scanned.
File Formats Print Making
A digital file’s information is stored in different kinds of file formats. Either the formats are based in the application program that first made the file (.doc is a Microsoft Word file for instance) or a standard format that is understood by the majority of imaging programs (like JPG). Some file formats will take the information and compress it so it makes files smaller. This in turn helps to save storage space and better facilitates sending e-mails of the digital information. However, during the compression process information is lost. Examples of such formats include AI, EPS, JPG PSD, and TIFF.
Fourdrinier Print Making
Fourdrinier paper machines make the Hahnemühle natural paper. The paper is created by the movement of a wire over many rollers which is applied to the saturated pulp. Gradually the paper web is created. Then the paper is removed from the wire and placed in the machine through natural felt rollers that in turn press and dry the paper in different stages. The paper can be purchased in several surface textures and sizes. Watercolorists often use the paper to paint on, and several kinds of printing processes use the paper as well.
Gamut Print Making
Gamut is the range of hues that various kinds of ink sets or output devices can process and make particular hues in a particular range.
Giclée Print Making
A giclée is a digital print that results from a digitalized image exported from a computer to an inkjet printer. Often a giclée refers to a fine art print or a limited edition printed on archival quality paper that is coated. The pigment inks used to make the print are UV stable. In order to be considered a “giclée” a print needs to stand up to Fine Art Trade Guild standards.
Hand Embellished Print Making
A way of painting onto a printed giclee edition. An artist needs to decide which areas should be highlighted in order to make the texture of the print as close to the original as possible. Metallic colors that cannot be reproduced may also be picked out by the artist to paint onto the print.
Hologram System Print Making
A system Hahnemühle designed in order to make sure that artists’ prints can be authentically recognized and that the prints are not copied. The system involves an alphanumeric hologram that is attached to the back of a numbered print. The same number is also placed on a certificate of authenticity.
Intaglio Print Making
Intaglio is a printing process that involves making an image through the use of a metal plate being scratched on its surface or being bitten with acid. Once the plate is inked, it is worked into the regions or bitten lines – filling them up. This in turn makes the image be in reverse when it is applied to paper as it rolls through the press. Intaglio includes a variety of processes such as photo etching, aquatint, dry-point, engraving and mezzotint.
Iris (printing) Print Making
An iris is a particular kind of inkjet printer; originally it was used to make reproductions of artwork on fine art papers.
IT8 Print Making
IT8 refers to a range of color targets for color characterization of various media and devices (like printers and scanners). It functions as a means to create color profiles in order to achieve consistent color on various types of paper. IT8 is the standard color reference tool used for calibration input and output devices by the printing industry.
Lightfastness Print Making
Lightfastness refers to the degree that pigments, dyes and paints alter their color or fade due to exposure to UV or daylight heat, alkalis, or acids. The estimate lifespan of a print may be found by certain tests, like the Wilhelm Laboratory reports or the Blue Wool Scale. A print’s lightfastness may be impacted by various factors including the paper and ink used. Some inks fade much faster than others.
Lithography Print Making
Lithography is a four-color separation high volume printing process with ink. It is the most efficient form of photomechanical reproduction. An art piece is first scanned and then divided in the CMYK color channels on four printing plates. The printing plates are printed one after the other in order to make a full color image. At this point individual colors are added on more plates to order to make special effects like a varnished area or gold ink. These special effects cannot be created from CMYK in the normal Pantone range. They are known as spot colors. Nowadays artists may continue to use stone lithography to make their artwork. However, by hand the process takes much longer. The main technique for either method involves grease that rejects water. The grease areas will stay white and the rest of the areas will take on ink (and hence will print).
Mould Made Paper Print Making
The Hahnemühle mould made papers are ideal for maintaining brightness and the flow of color. The paper is excellent for watercolor as well as tempers, lavis, gouache, pencil and charcoal drawings. The paper is made on a cylinder mould-made machine. Once it is created it is put through natural felt rollers. The paper has a soft surface texture and may range from 200-600gsm.
Pigment Ink Print Making
Pigment inks are pigments of color that are ground vey finely and then suspended inside a liquid in order to create an ink. The pigment creates a lightfast material or ink that is more resistant to fading. Pigment based inks being made today may be over one hundred years lightfast. However, the lightfastness is determined by various factors such as the paper type, the storage conditions, and the place producing the ink.
Platemark Print Making
A platemark is simply an indentation that occurs at the edge of a printed image. It results from the plate pushing itself into the paper while it passes through the printing press. These kinds of impressions are made in etching and intaglio print processes in which that image is on a metal plate.
Profile Print Making
A profile refers to a particular color setting used with various papers and ink sets. It is used to make the appropriate color reproduction of an image. It changes one color space into another color space.
Resolution Print Making
Resolution refers to the amount of information that a scanned image contains. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). The dots are the pixels that create the digital image. A resolution of 72dpi signifies that in each inch of the image there exist 5184 pixels (72 x 72) in every square inch. Dpi is also known as pixels per inch (ppi) as well as ‘res’ (the metric resolution for each millimeter).
RGB Print Making
RGB stands for red, green and blue. It is a color system frequently used in digital printing. This is a color system that may not be used for planographic printing (like lithography). During the printing process, light magenta, light cyan, an additional black and often green and orange are added as well in order to lend a broader color range and an enhanced tonal gradation. Light is made up of the primary colors of RGB – they are not the same as the primary colors of the pigments in inks and paint.
RIP Print Making
RIP stands for raster image processor. Raster images are not created from bitmap grids (as opposed to vector grids). The process of transforming digital and mathematical information to dots through the use of an output device is called rasterisation. An RIP assists in making images bigger in size while maintaining the pixilation of the image. For color management reasons, ICC profiles may be joined to the RIP software.
Scanner
A scanner is an input device that takes artwork and puts it into a digital file. It works by using the sensitivity of light to translate the image into a pattern of dots. Various kinds of scanners exist. Examples of scanners include drum scanner, digital scanner, transparency scanner, scanback and flatbed scanner.
Serigraph Print Making
A serigraph is a term describing silkscreen prints or prints that contain flat color that is layered to create an image. Since each color needs a different screen, serigraph is an expensive process to make a limited edition.
Workflow Print Making
Workflow refers to the total system of printer, paper, scanner, monitor, and software that involves each item being set to work with the other items. Workflow makes for efficient and accurate color management.
Arch Calligraphy
A section of the lowercase letter that is created by a curve springing from the stem of a letter. H and m are examples of letters containing an arch.
Body Height Calligraphy
The body height is the height of the basic form of a lower-case letter. The additional length of the ascenders or descenders is not part of the body height.
Book Hand Calligraphy
Book hand is any of the various styles of the alphabet frequently used in making books prior to the age of printing.
Bowl Calligraphy
A bowl refers to the section of a letter that is made by curved strokes joined to the main stem and enclosing a counster. The letters a and b are two examples.
Built Up Letters Calligraphy
Built-up letters are letters that are created by drawing, as opposed to writing them. They may also be made by altering the basic form of the structural pen strokes.
Carolingian Script Calligraphy
This is the first standard minuscule script; it was designed by Alcuin of York towards the end of the 8th century. He was directed by the Emperor Charlemagne to create it.
Chancery Cursive Calligraphy
This is a form of italic script that scribes of the papal Chancery in Renaissance Italy used to do their work. Chancery cursive is also known as cancellaresca.
Character Calligraphy
Character is a typographic term used to describe items frequently used in typesetting, such as symbols, punctuation marks, or letters. The term may also refer to Japanese or Chinese ideogram.
Cuneiform Calligraphy
Cuneiform is the first systematic form of writing. The name originally comes from the wedge-shaped strokes created as one inscribes on soft clay. In Latin, the word cuneus means wedge.
Cursive Calligraphy
Cursive is a form of handwriting that involves fast and informal writing. The letters are quickly made and they are joined together. A writing utensil does not lose contact with the paper when one writes in cursive.
Demotic Script Calligraphy
Demotic script is the informal script from Egypt. It originates from hieratic script and hieroglyphs.
Diacritical Sign Calligraphy
A diacritical sign is a mark or accent. The sign demonstrates how a certain syllable or letter is pronounced.
Face / Typeface Calligraphy
Face is the standard term used for an alphabet created for typographic use.
Gilding Calligraphy
Gilding refers to applying gold leaf to an adhesive base in order to embellish an ornament or letter.
Gothic Script Calligraphy
Gothic script refers to a general term that includes various styles of writing; usually the writing is heavy and angular, and relates to the medieval period.
Hand Calligraphy
Hand is another word for handwriting or script. “Hand” signifies that something is written by hand, as opposed to a computer.
Hieroglyphs Calligraphy
The first form of writing that was used in ancient Egypt. Pictorial symbols are used to represent words.
Ideogram Calligraphy
An ideogram is symbol that describes an abstract idea or concept - as opposed to a tangible object.
Illumination (calligraphy) Calligraphy
An embellishment of a manuscript that contains gold leaf burnished to shine brightly. Illumination may also be used in reference to embellishing with color and gold.
Indent Calligraphy
To indent is to keep a space blank in addition to the margin given. The space is placed at the first line of writing – it signals that a new paragraph is beginning.
Italic Calligraphy
Slanted forms of writing; it contains curving letters formed from an elliptical model, as opposed to a circular one.
Layout Calligraphy
A layout is the standard plan of two-dimensional design. Layout displays the organization of text, illustration, spacing and other elements of a design.
Manuscript Calligraphy
Manuscript refers to a document or book that is written by hand (as opposed to being made by a printing process).
Massed Text Calligraphy
Massed text is text written in a compressed script or heavy script that contains only a small amount of spacing between the lines and words.
Ornament Calligraphy
An ornament is a pattern or device that embellishes text that is printed or handwritten.
Papyrus Calligraphy
Papyrus is the first form of paper. It is a rough material created by hammering strips of fiber together that come from the stem of the papyrus plant.
Parchment Calligraphy
Parchment is a type of writing material made from the innermost layer of sheepskin.
Pictogram Calligraphy
A pictogram is a type of pictorial symbol. It symbolizes a certain image or object.
Pounce Calligraphy
Pounce is a type of fine powder. It is functions as a preventative measure to stop ink from spreading on paper that is not sized. It is also used to get the surface of parchment ready to take on ink.
Ragged Text Calligraphy
Ragged Text is a column or page of writing that contains lines of various lengths. It is aligned to only one side of the paper or on the central axis of the paper.
Roman Capitals Calligraphy
The alphabet of Roman capitals is the alphabet created by the Romans. It is the foundation of the majority of modern western alphabet systems.
Rustic Capitals Calligraphy
The alphabet of rustic capitals is an informal alphabet that the Romans used. This alphabet contained long roundish letters as opposed to the standard square Roman capitals.
Sans Serif Typeface Graphic Design
Sans serif typeface is a kind of typeface that does not include serifs (such as Swiss or Helvetica). The weight of the stroke is frequently uniform. And usually the stress is oblique (however, there do exist exceptions to these general rules).
Script Calligraphy
Script is simply writing that is done by hand. It is often used to refer to a cursive style of writing.
Skeleton Letter Calligraphy
The basic form of a letter displaying its most important identifying characteristics.
Textura Calligraphy
Textura refers to certain forms of Gothic script that appear to be woven texture, because of the density and regularity of the writing. In Latin, textura means woven.
Uncial Calligraphy
Uncial is a form of book hand. The early Christians and Romans used it; uncial was characterized by the squashed heavy form of the letter O.
Vellum Calligraphy
Vellum is a type of writing material made from a calf’s skin. It is characterized by a very smooth velvety texture.
Versal Calligraphy
Versal is a big embellished letter that signifies the opening of a line, verse or paragraph in a manuscript.
Weight Calligraphy
Weight is the amount of the thickness and size of a pen letter. It is communicated through the relationship of nib width to height.
Anagama Ceramic Art
Also known as cellar kiln. Anagama originated from the bank-kiln. It is a traditional Japanese kiln that contains a long sloping tubular ware chamger along with an extreme below that works as a firebox. It creates residual-ash effects as well as a large amount of flame-flashing.
Amorphous Ceramic Art
Amorphous is a term referring to a solid, homogeneous substance that contains no set melting point or crystalline pattern. Amorphous substances will crack/separate with conchoidal fracture. Examples of amorphous substances include lumps of resin or glass.
Aluminum Silicate Ceramic Art
Aluminum silicate is a general category of supplies that are made up of mostly silica and alumina. It contains raw materials (like feldspar), glaze and fired clay.
Alkaline Fluxes Ceramic Art
Alkaline Fluxes are feldspars in high-fire; they are boron fluxes in low-fire.
Alkaline Earths Ceramic Art
Alkaline earths is one segment of high-fire fluxes. The fluxes contain magnesium, barium, calcium and strontium. They work best with matt glaze surfaces.
alkaline Fermentation
Possessing a pH level higher than 7. The opposite of something being acidic is being alkaline.
agateware Ceramic Art
Agateware is clay products that contain swirling marbleized colors. The colors are due to surface slip effects, or they may be caused by marbleized colored clays.
Air Set / Air Setting Ceramic Art
Mortar or refractory that is cast and becomes durable and strong even though it is damp. This happens due to a chemical reaction between the clay and water.
Air Floated / Air Floating Ceramic Art
A process that is used to process raw clay. The process involves floating the powdered clay in an air-stream in order to remove particles containing a higher density.
Acids Ceramic Art
Acids are the glass-formers that mix with fluxes (bases) and stabilizers or refractories (known as neutrals).
Absorption (ceramic) Ceramic Art
Absorption is used in ceramics as a gauge for vitrification; it is the characteristic of fired clay to absorb water.
Applique (ceramics) Ceramic Art
Applique involves adding low-relief clay forms to slurried, scored leather-hard surfaces for embellishment.
Annealing (ceramics) Ceramic Art
Annealing is the method of allowing a heated object to cool down gradually to permit internal shrinkage stress to even out without harming the object.
Arch Brick Ceramic Art
Arch bricks are bricks that contain side faces that are angled and tapered over their widths; when put down together the bricks create a curved arch. A normal arch brick contains a 4.5 inch thick arch.
Ash Slagging Ceramic Art
Ash slagging is the placement of a lot of deposition of fly-ash on wares’ surfaces, furniture surfaces and the inside of a kiln’s surface within a wooden kiln.
Assisted Technology Ceramic Art
Assisted technology is a type of technology that involves jiggering, ram-pressing and slip-casting; the technology is high-production studio technology that originated from the industry and was then adapted depending upon a particular need.
Atmospheric Burner Ceramic Art
Atmospheric burner is a gas burner that uses the natural process of gas escaping from the orifice to entrain primary-air; the burner removes the need for a mechanical blower.
Atomic Vibration / Atomic Motion Ceramic Art
Atomic vibration is the continual movement of atoms and molecules that are contained within everything in the universe. Atomic vibration occurs when heat accelerates the atoms and causes them to break atomic bonds. This in turn causes a solid to turn into a gas or liquid.
Aventurine Ceramic Art
Aventurine is a type of glaze that involves iridescent tiny metallic pieces that are caused from iron crystals residing underneath the surface.
Back Burning Ceramic Art
Back burning occurs in burners when the movement of fuel or air leaving the end of the burner is not going as fast than combustion. This causes the flame to transition down the burner tube to heat the orifice. And this in turn causes an orange smoky flame and a burner tube that is too hot.
Back Pressure Ceramic Art
Back-pressure occurs in a fuel kiln due to internal pressure; the internal pressure is due from a correct balance of damper setting and combustion pressure. The end result of back-pressure is a quicker and cheaper heat system.
Bag Wall Ceramic Art
A bag wall is a refractory wall that in a few fuel-burning kilns shields the wares from direct contact with the flames and heat.
Ball Clay Ceramic Art
Ball clay involves deposits of secondary clays that are found in marshy regions. Ball clay is characterized by high plasticity, a high level of drying shrinkage, a high level of organic contaminates and particles that are very fine and tiny. Ball clay should be fired off-white or white.
Ball Mill Ceramic Art
Ball mill is a type of vessel that revolves mechanically; ceramic materials may be positioned with water, as well as high-fired porcelain slugs or flint pebbles. Ball mill is utilized for grinding glaze and clay materials into small particles.
Bank Kiln Ceramic Art
A bank kiln is a type of kiln originating from the East Asian kiln. It involves a tubular kiln chamber that was taken from an earthen bank. It is a type of kiln that originated before the tube kiln and anagama.
Banding Wheel Ceramic Art
A banding wheel is a type of wheel that is operated by hand. The turn-table is capable of doing such things as creating banded decorations and applying wax resist.
Barrel Arch / Roman Arch Ceramic Art
A barrel arch is a type of kiln arch that creates a half circle that includes the start and finish of the arch on a horizontal surface. No skew bricks are used in a barrel arch.
Basalt Body / Basalt Ware Ceramic Art
Basalt body is clay body that contains a sufficient amount of dark clays and/or metallic oxides in order to fire it black or dark brown.
Bases (ceramics) Ceramic Art
Bases involve the fluxes or melting agents that mix with neutrals and acids.
Baso Valve Ceramic Art
A Baso valve is a safety valve. It is used along with a thermocouple sensor probe on the majority of gas kilns. Baso valves work on a very small amount of electrical current that is made by thermocouple. No external electrical hookups are usually necessary when one uses a natural-draft kiln that uses a Baso system. In operation, if the pilot is turned off, the thermocouple will cool down and the Baso valve will close – shutting off the gas.
Bat Ceramic Art
A bat is a firm flat disc of wood, plaster, or plastic that is positioned on the wheel-head. After the throw is done, the bat is taken off the wheel-head in order to prevent any damage.
Beading Glaze / Beaded Glaze Ceramic Art
Beading glaze is a particular controlled-crawl glaze that was created in order to crack and then crawl under the firing process. The effect is caused from the high amount of L.O.I in the glaze materials. The beads are then formed when melting causes isolated beads to develop on the wares’ surfaces.
Bell Kiln Ceramic Art
A bell kiln is a type of kiln that contains a non-movable floor along with a body that can be lifted upward on vertical tracks. A bell kiln permits one to easily load and remove big objects.
Bentonite Ceramic Art
Bentonite is a type of clay that is created from airborne volcanic ash. The clay must be combined with another type of clay due to its shrinkage being very high. It is characterized by very fine particles and is very plastic. If one adds 2-3% to clay it will raise the level of plasticity. Bentonite is combined with a glaze in order to maintain suspension and enhance the raw glaze adhesion.
Bisque Firing Ceramic Art
Bisque-firing is the beginning kiln firing that involves clay sinters without any vitrifying. Even though bisque-firing is porous it will not break down in water.
Black Body Radiation Ceramic Art
Black-body radiation is the infrared radiation that exits from a material or surface at the point it gets up to red heat.
Black Figure Style Ceramic Art
Black-figure style is a particular style from the late Archaic and early Classical style in ancient Greek ceramics. It involves the figure that is the focus; red is the color of the background and the figures are in black.
Blackware Firing Ceramic Art
Blackware firing is bonfire-firing the wares which are covered with dung and sometimes sawdust at high temperatures and then put underneath something like ash or dirt with the intent of capturing the smoke; the result of the process gives the wares a black surface.
blistering (ceramics) Ceramic Art
Blistering is a glaze defect that involves bubbles on fired glaze surface that frequently burst and create hard craters. The best way to avoid bubbles during high-firing is to use a short oxidation soak at the finish of the firing process in order to permit the surface defects to right themselves. One can also use low-firing by elongating the firing process or through soaking the kiln when the time comes for maturation.
Bloating Ceramic Art
Bloating is a type of firing defect in which blisters are created inside the clay body. The result of bloating is a series of lumps on top of the surface. Bloating is due to the expansion of gases inside the clay due to too much early reduction (which causes carbon coring), too much fast bisque firing, and extending the firing process for too long.
Blunge Ceramic Art
Blunge is the method of combining a glaze or slip with an impeller mixer is that motorized.
Blunger Ceramic Art
A blunger is an impeller mixer that is motorized that is utilized to get a casting slip or clay slurry ready. It is positioned on a clamp or bracket to permit a slip to remain blunging for a long amount of time.
Body Reduction Ceramic Art
A body reduction is an amount of time in which reduction atmosphere is created between cone 012 and 08 to allow iron color and speckles in clay body; it is used in particular in high-fired stoneware.
Bone Dry Ceramic Art
Bone dry in ceramics means that something is very dry and brittle. It is necessary that clay is bone dry before one fires it.
8 bit color Print Making
8-bit color means that every pixel contains eight bits; this allows for two hundred and fifty-six hues or variations of gray.
24 bit color Print Making
24-bit color refers to a digital color model that has eight bits provided for the 3 additive colors of blue, green and red. 24-bit color may provide 256 variations of each primary color. In 24-bit color, there are 24 bits assigned to each pixel; this in turn translates to 16.7 million colors.
Acid Dyes Print Making
An acid dye is a soluble substance that is primarily used to dye material such as nylon, silk or wool. Acid dyes are relatively cheap, make a color change permanent, and react efficiently.
Addressable Resolution Print Making
Addressable resolution is the maximum resolution of a mechanism. It is the absolute maximum pixel number that an imaging mechanism may create or alter an image.
Algorithm Print Making
An algorithm is a mathematical pattern that works out an equation or problem. When the term refers to an image, it explains the patterns that create a compression or color-management program, as well as other RIP applications.
Aliasing Graphic Design
Aliasing refers to the visual effect of blocky or jagged pixilation that happens frequently around areas that include vertical or horizontal lines of high contrast.
Alpha Channel Print Making
An alpha channel is an image-editor channel; individuals use it to hold a mask, partial picture element or color. It determines the transparency of every color in an image. It originated in 1997 by Alvy Ray Smith and Ed Catmull at N.Y.I.T. The alpha channel would be the 4th channel in a 3-color image.
Amplitude Modulated Screening (AM) Print Making
This is an image screening technique; it uses halftones that are represented by dots that are different sizes, but they are positioned at regular intervals on a grid system.
Analog Print Making
An analog involves systems that continually involve different signals or data (not discreet levels or steps of digital data).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Print Making
ANSI is the United States member of the International Standards Organization; it is in charge of overseeing industry standards.
Anti-alias Print Making
Anti-alias is the technique of smoothing and taking out any aliasing effects through the use of electronic filtering. It also involves other methods such the blending of crisp edges.
Banding Print Making
Banding consists of patterns on a print due to a lack of color or gray-scale ranges in the output device’s image processor. Banding may also be caused by a lack of information in the original scan. Banding causes crisp changes between varying ranges.
Beziér Curve Print Making
Curving segments of lines made by anchor or end points, with a minimum of one node or transient point. The term was so named after a French engineer whose name was Pierre Beziér.
BIT Print Making
BIT stands for Binary Digital T. It signifies the smallest unit of data in a computer (1 or 0). The term was so named in 1948 by J.W. Tileu at Bell Labs.
Bit Depth Print Making
Bit depth is the most number of bits that define a pixel. Bit depth measures the brightness level; it is the number of potential colors or variations of gray that may be used in an image.
Bitmap Print Making
A bitmap is a rasterized graphic image created from a grid of dots or pixels.
Black (printing) Print Making
Black is the fourth color in process 4-color printing. In CMYK, black is the “K.”
Black Generation Print Making
Black generation is the inclusion of black ink with other process colors when dividing an RGB color image to CMYK colors. Black generation may happen by either switching some of the CMY with K (GCR – Gray Component Replacement), or by using K in solely neutral regions (UCR – Under Color Removal).
Black Point Print Making
Black point is color that creates the values of 0,0,0 when scanned by a scanner. In the best of circumstances, the black point is 0% neutral reflectance or transmittance.
BMP File Print Making
A BMP file is a Windows bitmap file that contains an extension of “bmp.” It defines an image in dot patterns (one dot = one pixel).
BAT (bon-a-tirer) Print Making
A BAT is the proof an artist uses to compare any prints created at a later date. Often a signed BAT is required prior to any future printing being done.
Brayer Print Making
A brayer is a roller that moves, adheres or presses two flat surfaces together.
Brightness Print Making
Brightness is the general intensity of an image; if the brightness value of an image is lower, the image is darker. And if the brightness value of an image is higher, the image is lighter.
Bronzing Print Making
Bronzing refers to a problem that occurs with some ink/paper combinations. “Bronzed” (darkened) reflections from the inked regions are side-by-side with regions where there exists no ink or hardly any ink. The result is that there occurs a full reflection on the paper. Bronzing is also known as “gloss differential.”
Buffering Print Making
Buffering is the addition of an alkaline substance (such as calcium carbonate) into the paper pulp of a paper in order to neutralize the acids in the paper. The buffer acts as a shield from the pollution in the atmosphere, or from the acid in the paper.
Bulk Ink Print Making
Bulk ink is simply ink that sits in big containers; it is used for printing in quantity. It is used to prevent a constant running out of ink while printing items in bulk.
Burnish Print Making
To burnish something means to rub it smooth; it also means to transfer or adhere to an alternative surface area.
BYTE Print Making
BYTE is a unit of digital measurement. Every 8-bit byte signifies an alphanumeric character. 1 byte = 8 bits.
Aerial View Art Perspective
Also known as a bird’s eye view. This is the viewpoint seen at a high elevation. It involves the vanishing point/s and horizon line being positioned on the upper portion of an image. It is usually used in reference to a landscape or a cityscape. (Aerial view is not the same thing as aerial perspective.)
aerial perspective, atmospheric perspective Art Perspective
Often employed in painting, aerial perspective is the way in which an illusion of space and depth is created through the use of atmospheric techniques. These techniques include making forms in the background region with less contrast and softer edges than those in the forefront of the picture plane. Often in atmospheric perspective there exists a change from warmer hues to cool hues. In general, warmer colors come forward, and cooler colors recede (advancing and retreating color). The atmospheric effect in a picture is due to the degree of moisture suspended in the air. Chinese painters especially employ atmospheric perspective by using clouds or inserting mists in various value tones among the middle areas of the picture plane and introducing fainter tones in the far distance. Aerial perspective is often used together with linear perspective to create a strong sense of spatial depth in the picture.
Abstraction Drawing
Abstraction is the simplification of a person, object or place into either organic or geometric elements. Basically, it is a way of turning something into a simpler version of itself. Details and other items are stripped away to reveal just the “essence” of the thing being abstracted.
Axis Art Perspective
An axis is a line that runs straight through something in order to show the direction and movement of something. The line is purely conceptual – it is often used as a helpful tool for artists.
Background Drawing
The background is the space in a piece of artwork that functions as a means to support and enhance the main subject matter of the piece. It surrounds the objects in the piece and may include actual objects and people, or simply be empty negative space.
Backlight Drawing
A backlight is a source of light that is placed behind a person/object in order to cause a division between the person/object from the background of the artwork. Sometimes this division is a silhouette.
Base Tone Drawing
The base tone is the darkest value on an object or person. The base tone is the area on an object or person that the light source can not reach.
Blind Contour Drawing
A blind contour drawing is a line drawing that is created without the use of constantly looking at the paper. Instead, one concentrates intensely on the item that he/she is drawing and tries to draw the many shifts of lines and tangents of lines seen. These types of drawings enhance one’s eye-hand coordination and create a better awareness of changes of form and space.
Cast Shadow Drawing
A cast shadow is a type of shadow that is created on a form next to a surface that is turned away from the source of light. When a form blocks the light, it causes a cast shadow to be formed. Every object that blocks light has a cast shadow associated with it.
cone of vision Art Perspective
The cone of vision is the visual region displayed by a drawing that relates to a person’s normal vision without his/her peripheral vision. In a nutshell, the cone of vision is the area of sight – or the angle of sight. For example, if a person wanted to see the entire theatre stage, usually a cone of vision is 60 degrees is required, so a person would need to sit far enough back to achieve this degree of vision.
Content Drawing
Content in artwork corresponds to the subject matter and the significance of that subject matter in a piece of artwork.
Continuous Line Drawing Drawing
A continuous line drawing is a type of drawing that includes continuous contact with the surface of a picture plane that makes enclosed forms and shapes.
Contour Drawing
Contour in art refers to the outside edges, as well as the defined enclosed edges, of a person, object or mass.
Convergence Art Perspective
Convergence in a drawing or painting refers to linear perspective. In linear perspective, all lines that are parallel converge together as they run along to a point at a person’s eye level (also known as the horizon line) in the picture place. This phenomena is known as “convergence.”
cross contour lines Drawing
Cross contour lines are parallel lines that curve over an object’s surface in a vertical or horizontal manner (or both) and reveal the item’s surface characteristics. Cross contour lines are similar to wire framing used in 3D design.
Cross Hatching Drawing
Cross-hatching is a drawing method that is used to shade an object or figure; the method utilizes a series of criss-crossing lines that are built up progressively into more complicated tones. Several varieties of cross-hatching may be used but most commonly for developing shadow and depth.
Diminution Art Perspective
Diminution occurs in linear perspective; it involves objects becoming smaller and smaller as the space between the viewer and the object increases.
Drawing Drawing
Drawing is the depiction of art elements – such as color, tonal variations, and lines – on a picture plane to create forms and shapes. Drawing is the foundation from which a picture is created. In general, drawing is dominated by line, as opposed to painting – which is dominated by mass.
Edge Drawing
An edge is a place where two shapes or forms meet. This connection may occur in terms of a line or tonal change.
Eye Level Art Perspective
Eye level refers to the height a viewer’s eyes are positioned in relation to the ground. There are various eye levels. For example, lying down creates a very low eye level, and standing on a mountain creates a very high eye level for the viewer. One’s eye level usually is the same thing as the horizon line. In one and two point perspective, the vanishing points are located on the eye level.
Figure Drawing
A figure is a positive or dominate shape in a drawing or painting. The shape is distinct from the background of the picture; it comes forward in the composition.
Figure Ground Relationship Drawing
The figure-ground relationship is the organization of negative and positive shapes positioned in such a way as to create interest from the viewing audience. Another term for this type of relationship is called “positive/negative relationship.”
Foreground Drawing
The foreground is the closest space in a composition in relation to the viewer. The foreground stands out from the background of the picture.
foreshortening Art Perspective
An illusion of the eye, creating the effect that objects become smaller the further away they are, and become larger the closer they are to the viewer. Foreshortening is used in drawing in order to create a sense of depth and make objects appear to exist spatially to each other.
Freehand Drawing Drawing
A freehand drawing is a drawing that is created without the use of a mechanical device (such as a projector, straightedge, compass, or protractor).
Gestalt Drawing
Gestalt refers to the concept that the whole “togetherness” of something is greater than the sum of its individual parts. It is the total concept of the item being created – rather than just thinking of the separate pieces that make up the item.
Gradation Drawing
Gradation is a drawing or painting technique in which there is a gradual change from a tone/color into another tone/color. Gradation is used in drawing to create forms that appear three-dimensional.
Gesture Drawing
A gesture drawing is the representation of the essence of an object’s or figure’s position. It is the act of creating a drawing or sketch with a loose grip and movement of the drawing tool used. Gesture drawings are often very expressive and allow one the freedom to loosen up and not worry about small details. Gesture drawings are an ideal way to warm up before one starts to concentrate on a more intense drawing exercise.
Grid (drawing) Drawing
A grid is a pattern of parallel lines that cross one another at right angles or diagonally.
Half Tone Drawing
Half tone in drawing refers to the lightest area on a form after the quarter tone and highlight areas. The rays of light shining on a form’s surface are parallel to the half tone.
Highlight Drawing
In drawing, the highlight is the most intense illumination of a form. The highlight is located on a surface where the light rays hit the form at a perpendicular angle.
Light tone Drawing
The light tone in a drawing is the area of a form that is illuminated the most after the highlight. Light tone is also known as indirect light.
Line Drawing
Line in drawing refers to a type of mark that contains both a direction and a length. Line is an art element. There are numerous varieties of possible lines, including curved, bent, thick, wide, broken, vertical, horizontal, burred, or freehand. Lines are frequently used to delineate shapes, forms and spaces. The representation of volume, edges, movement and patterns can all be created using line. Lines can create both 2D and 3D objects and figures.
Line Gesture Drawing
Line gesture in drawing refers to a type of drawing that is made up of the interior of forms made from line (as opposed to mass).
Local Value Drawing
Local value in drawing or painting refers to the essential value of an object’s or figure’s surface without the inclusion of any texture or lighting. Local value is the value of an object or figure without any shadow pattern.
Mass (drawing/painting) Drawing
Mass in a drawing or painting refers to the weight or the density of a figure or object.
Mark (drawing) Drawing
A mark in a drawing or painting refers to an impression on the picture plane; it is often made to create the illusion of something – such as an object’s surface texture.
Massing Drawing
Massing as it relates to drawing/painting refers to the blocking in of shapes with the aim of creating an arrangement of visual weight in the picture plane.
Middle Ground Drawing
Middle ground is the space located between the background and the foreground in a painting or drawing.
Modeled Drawing Drawing
A modeled drawing is a type of drawing that involves the creation and definition of a form using a range of values from light to dark.
Motion (drawing) Drawing
Motion refers to the organization of the different segments of an image in order to give a sense of action using forms, shapes, textures and lines that shift the eye throughout the artwork.
Negative Space Drawing
Negative space in a painting or drawing refers to the area encircling or located behind a positive shape.
Outline Drawing
The outline in a drawing or painting refers to a line that acts as a delineating edge between a form/shape from the spaced around it. An outline is considered 2D, because it does not refer to the contour of the form/shape. It is also known as a silhouette.
Overlapping Planes Drawing
Overlapping planes in a drawing/painting refers to the technique of creating an order of space. Overlapping happens if a figure/object prevent the viewing of another figure/object.
Planar Analysis Drawing
Planar analysis refers to the structural analysation of a form. Rather than using curves, the form is described using major planes.
Picture Frame Drawing
A picture frame refers to the horizontal and vertical dimensions of a picture.
picture plane Art Perspective
A picture plane is the two-dimensional surface upon which a painting/drawing is created. A window can be understood as a picture plane as one looks out to the scene beyond it.
Plastic (drawing) Drawing
Plastic refers to the representation of three-dimensionality or action that occurs in a picture in relation to the flat picture plane. Plastic space is not the same thing as perspective space.
Proportion Drawing
Proportion refers to the correction depiction of the all the parts related to each other in a shape/form within a realistic painting or drawing. Proportion lends a sense of balance and harmony to a piece of artwork. One may decide to distort the proportions within an artwork to create a certain effect on the viewer.
Reflective Light Drawing
Reflective light is the light that reflects from surfaces of forms onto other surfaces surrounding the form. Reflective light is always located on a form’s shadow side.
Relative Scale Art Perspective
Relative scale is a method used to create and determine the spatial position of a figure or object in 3D picture plane; objects or figures that are more distant are drawn smaller in size than those objects or figures that are closer to the viewer. And the objects or figure that are closer are drawn bigger. In this way, the relative size of an object/figure creates the illusion of space on a flat 2D picture plane.
Representational Drawing
A representational drawing is a type of drawing that tries to represent as closely as possible the object or scene that is drawn. Realism is the goal when one attempts to do a representational drawing.
Rendering Drawing
A rendering is simply an interpretation of a figure/object/scene. A drawing may be termed “a good rendering” or “a bad rendering” depending on how closely or how well the item being depicted is drawn. The term “rendering” may also refer to a perspective drawing that is created of a future structure.
Scale (proportion) Art Perspective
Scale in drawing refers to the proportion or ratio that defines the size relationships. Models, architectural plans, maps and paintings/drawings all use scale to create the illusion of correct size relationships between objects and figures.
Shallow Space Art Perspective
Shallow space refers to a 2D flat space that may have width and density, but contains only a limited amount of depth. For example, a picket fence is an example of an object that demonstrates shallow space because of its lack of depth.
Shape Drawing
Shape refers to an area that is defined by an edge on a 2D surface plane. A shape is its own item – it is contained by a border and is separated from the other shapes in the area.
Sighting Drawing
Sighting in drawing or painting refers to the measurement of figures/objects in a visual way between other figures/objects in the composition.
Silhouette Drawing
A silhouette is simply a 2D shape that is set against a light background in sharp contrast to its own dark tone.
Space (drawing) Drawing
Space refers to the area between certain points within a drawing or painting. Edges define space.
Station Point Art Perspective
A station point is used in linear perspective as a stationary point from which a viewer is related to the object/figure being rendered. It can be thought of as the point of reference from which all things in the artwork can be related to. The station point may be very high or very low. High = bird's-eye-view. Low = worm's eye view. It is important to determine the correct station point when starting a piece of work, because the station point has a key role in determining how the viewer understands one’s composition and relates to the subject matter. It may also be referred to as "vantage point".
Surface Drawing
Surface refers to the tangible structure/texture of the painting area or drawing paper upon which one works to create an image. The surface of the material used may be smooth, glossy, hard, rough, or soft. The surface upon which one works plays a key role in how the texture of the painting/drawing appears once the artwork is completed. Any number of methods may be used to create a desired surface. Possible materials to create a surface texture include sand, rubbing, scratching, building layers, using objects such as buttons/pins and erasing.
Texture Drawing
Texture refers to the surface quality of a 2D picture plane, as well as 3D objects. Texture plays a key role in setting the piece of artwork apart and giving it both a physical feel and an emotional one. Sand, tiny objects, string and scratching the surface are all means to create texture on a piece of artwork.
2D Space / Two Dimensional Space Drawing
2D space refers to the flat surface region of a drawing/painting upon which one creates the artwork. 2D space is measured in two dimensions – width and height.
3D Space / Three Dimensional Space Drawing
3D space refers to the real space of an object/figure in an environment, as well as the seemingly real appearance of a form drawn/painted to create a sense of real-life illusion on a 2D space.
Value Relativity Drawing
Value relativity refers to the juxtaposition of difference values next to each other; this process of placing values beside each other creates what is known as “value contrast.”
Value Scale Drawing
Value scale refers to the gradual movement from black to gray to white. A value that is on the upper portion of the value scale is known as being “high key.” And a value that is located on the lower portion of the value scale is known as “low key.”
Value Pattern Drawing
A value pattern is key to creating a pleasing visual path for the eye to follow as it views a composition. The value pattern is the careful choice of arrangement of all the values of a piece of artwork by an artist in order to guide the eye and unify all the objects/figures in the piece.
Visual Weight Drawing
Visual weight is the ability of a region or art element within a composition to draw attention to itself. Visual weight is often created through the use of contrast and/or through the use of color.
Adobe Acrobat Graphic Design
A group of computer applications that allow one to make and display PDF files.
Alley Graphic Design
An alley refers to the spaces that reside on a page between the columns. (An alley is not the same thing as the gutter – this is the joining of the interior margins of pages that face one another.)
Banner Graphic Design
A banner is the title of a periodical; this is displayed on the front of a magazine as well as on the first page of a newsletter. A banner includes the publication’s name, volume, date, number and serial info.
Baseline Graphic Design
A baseline is the imaginary horizontal line that the majority of the letters reside. To lend a sense of optical balance, letters that are rounded slightly go under the baseline.
Bevel (graphic design) Graphic Design
One can give an image a raised appearance by the addition of a beveled effect; highlight and shadow colors are applied to the interior and exterior edges of the image.
Bit-mapped Graphic Design
In graphic design, the paint graphics mode tells a person if an image is created from pixels includes either the pixel being off (white) or on (black).
Black (font) Graphic Design
Black refers to a font that contains more weight in comparison to the typeface that is its bolded rendition.
Bleed Graphic Design
In graphic design, to bleed refers to a design element that reaches to the edge of the page. In order to print a bleed, the item is printed on paper that is bigger in size than the item being printed. Once printed, the paper is trimmed to accommodate the bleed.
Block Quote Graphic Design
A block quote is a quotation that is at least 4 or more lines in the body text. A block quote is placed on a page separately from the words of the author in order to make it clear to the reader that the quote comes from another source.
Body Type Graphic Design
Body type refers to the plain, book or normal type utilized for big passages of text. Body type is frequently 9 – 14 point and is used in places like chapters in a book or in articles within a magazine.
Byline Graphic Design
A byline is simply a credit line in an article for the author; it is used in magazine and newsletter design layout.
Callout Graphic Design
A callout is a label that explains an illustration; a section of the illustration is frequently pointed out with a leader line.
Camera-ready Copy Graphic Design
This term refers to the material ready to be published that is prepared into a negative for a printing plate. An example of a camera-ready copy could be an actual print or a computer file.
Cap Height Graphic Design
Cap Height is the amount of distance that exists from the top of the capital letters to the baseline.
Caption Graphic Design
A caption is used as a title for a picture or an illustration; frequently a caption is a short phrase. It should refer and relate to the content used around it.
Color Spacing Graphic Design
Color spacing is the placement of spaces to areas of words that are congested in order to improve the sense of balance after the line is set normally.
Comprehensive Layout (Comp) Graphic Design
A comprehensive layout is the publication’s blueprint; it displays how the type will be set and placed; it also shows the sizing, position of the illustrations on the page, and the treatment to be used.
Condensed Font Graphic Design
Condensed font is a font that involves the set-widths of the characters being narrower in comparison to the normal typeface.
Continuous Tone Graphic Design
Continuous tone refers to pieces of art that include variations of gray (versus black and white line art). Drawings and photographs sometimes need treatment as continuous tone art pieces.
Copy Graphic Design
Copy refers to text used in things such as word-processing files or typewritten pages. The term may also refer to the graphics and text in a publication.
Copyfitting Graphic Design
Copyfitting is the layout of a certain section of copy in a particular set amount of space.
Crop Marks Graphic Design
Crop marks show the edge of a printed piece on vertical, horizontal and mechanical lines.
Cropping Graphic Design
Cropping is used in pieces of art in order to remove extra parts of an image; cropping is frequently used in photography.
Cutlines Graphic Design
Cutlines are the description text that gives illustration information. They are also referred to as legends or captions. The term “title-captions” is often mistakenly used for cutlines; title-captions are illustration headings that are included as part of the piece of art.
Dingbat Typeface Graphic Design
Dingbat typeface is a kind of typeface that is created from non-alphabetic marker characters (like arrows, numbers within circles, and asterisks).
Discretionary Hyphen Graphic Design
A discretionary hyphen is a type of hyphen that happens if a word is displayed at the end of a line, as opposed to if the word is displayed in the middle part of a line.
Display Type Graphic Design
Display type is the decorative and/or big type utilized as visual elements or headlines in shown pieces. Usual sizes of display types include: 14, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, and 72 point.
Dither Graphic Design
A dither is the making of a flat bitmap to create digital halftones. Dots are the same size and are congested in darker areas and spread out more in light areas (versus deep bitmaps that are utilized in gray-scale images).
DPI (dots per inch) Graphic Design
DPI refers to the unit of measurement that gives the resolution of printed output. 300 dpi is the standard desktop laser printer output. 600 dpi is the medium resolution printer output.
Drop Shadow Graphic Design
A drop shadow is a shadow that goes below the image or text that lends an illusion of shadows from the effect of the lighting used, as well as giving a three dimensional appearance to an object or figure.
Duotone Graphic Design
A duotone is a halftone image that is printed with one dark and one light color. A photograph is half-toned a second time (the screen is used twice at two different angles). By using both, the detail and contrast of the image is improved.
Egyptian Type Graphic Design
A type created in 1815. It showcases a bold face along with square serifs or heavy slabs.
Em Space Graphic Design
Em space is a space that is the same width as the point size of the types. Em space depends upon the point size used. For example, an em space is 16 points wide for 16-point type, and 12 points wide for 12-point type.
Emboss Graphic Design
To emboss an image means to give the image dimension by giving the image an appearance as if it was projecting from a flat surface.
Export Graphic Design
To export means to permit a user to save a file in a different format in order to open it in another program.
Expanded (font) Graphic Design
A type of font in which the set widths of the characters are wider in relation to the normal typeface.
Extended Type Graphic Design
Extended type is horizontally wide typefaces such as Hellenic, Latin Wide, Egyptian Expanded, Microgramma Extended and Hellenic.
Facing Pages Graphic Design
Facing pages are two pages that are displayed as a spread if the publication is open in a double-sided document.
Feather Graphic Design
To feather means to insert tiny portions of leading within paragraphs, lines and in front of or after headings to balance the baselines of a page’s columns.
Flash Graphic Design
Flash is a type of vector graphic animation software. It was made by Macromedia to make browser-independent graphics; these type of graphics are thus displayed in the same manner across all browsers – keeping the Internet unified and ensures users are seeing what the website designer intended. Using Flash animation is efficient way to animate something, because Flash download time is fast.
Folio Graphic Design
A folio is a page number; the page number often includes running footers or headers.
Font Graphic Design
Font refers to a set of characters that are in a particular typeface in a particular style and in a particular point size. For example, a 14-point Times Italic is a font. The typeface is Times, the style is Italic, and the point size is 14.
Galleys Graphic Design
Galleys refer to type set that is in long columns. They may be printed using a page-assembly program in desktop publishing to use for copyfitting or proofreading.
GIF Graphic Design
GIF stands for graphic interchange format. A GIF image can be shown with up to 256 colors. Usually this type of image contains small file sizes; as such, they are a frequently used graphic format on the Internet. They cannot be used successfully in printing because their compression creates a low quality image.
Gradient Graphic Design
Gradient refers to a function in graphic software permitting a person to make an image contain a gradual change of colors (such as purple turning gradually into blues and then greens).
Greeked Text Graphic Design
Greeked Text refers to text that is displayed as gray bars that is similar to the lines of type as opposed to the actual characters. Greeked text lessens the amount of time necessary to draw images on the screen.
Graphic Design Graphic Design
Graphic design is the visual display of a concept or idea. Various sub-categories exist under the umbrella term “graphic design.” For example, graphic design includes under its actitivites web design, logo design or poster design.
Gray-scale Image Graphic Design
A gray-scale image refers to a deep bitmap that keeps track of every dot with its gray-scale level. A function of the size of the dot is the impression of greenness. A section of small dots will appear light, and a section of large dots will appear dark.
Halftone Graphic Design
Halftone refers to a continuous-tone image that is photographed through a screen to make different sized dots that may be reproduced during the printing process. It is used in traditional publishing; one creates the digital halftones by sampling a continuous-tone image, and arranging numbers of dots; this in turn will simulate the various sized dots to create the same appearance.
Halftone Screen Graphic Design
A screen used in traditional publishing that a continuous-tone image is photographed. The term describes the dot sizes (the digital halftones are not photographed through a screen in actuality). One can create special effects using special screens. The smaller the dots, the less grainy an image appears.
Hang Indent Alignment Graphic Design
Type set in which the first line is flush left. The rest of the lines are indented.
Hard Hyphen Graphic Design
A hard hyphen is a hyphen that is continuous; it is used for the two sections of a hyphenated word that should not be broken apart. (A hard hyphen is different than a soft hyphen in that in a soft hyphen the program’s word-wrapping function separates a line.
Hard Return Graphic Design
A hard return is made by pressing the Enter key or the Return key. (A soft return changes according to the column width and character count.)
Head (graphic design) Graphic Design
A head is a single line or multiple lines of copy that is set in a bigger face in relation to the body copy.
Hyphenation Zone Graphic Design
A hyphenation zone is a random zone around 1/5 to 1/10 of the measurement of a line. Hyphens are used to “fill in” the line of a long word that does not include a hyphen and creates a break within that zone.
Image Area Graphic Design
An image area is the region within a page that includes the copy; the image area is designated by the margins of the page.
JPEG Graphic Design
JPEG stands for joint photographic electronic group. It is a compression method that compresses a file’s size by removing non-essential picture information. If used too much, an image’s apperance will not display well.
Kern Graphic Design
To kern means to push together characters in order to make a bitter fit of white space and strokes. Usually characters must be kerned in display type due to the white space amongst characters at bigger sizes being more obvious.
Kicker Graphic Design
A kicker is a short lead-in phrase to a narrative or chapter. Often a kicker is set smaller than the headline of the narrative, or the title of the chapter. However, the kicker is bigger in size then the text type.
Knockout Graphic Design
Knockout refers to a color being printed right next to a second color (there exists a small overlap in the printing of the colors).
Landscape (graphic design) Graphic Design
A landscape is a layout of a page that is contains a bigger width measurement than its height measurement.
Lap Register Graphic Design
A lap register is used to ensure there exists no white line between two ink colors when printing the colors next to each other. The colors are overlapped slightly to do this.
Leader (graphic design) Graphic Design
A leader is made up of dots forming a line (or dashes) in order to move the eye from the page to other copy.
Leading (graphic design) Graphic Design
Leading is the space that exists between type lines. Usually, leading is measured in points from baseline to baseline. One or two points of leading are often used to set text type. For instance, 16-point type with 2 points of leading is described as 10/16 (read 10 on 16).
Ligature Graphic Design
Ligature in typography are characters that are linked with one another (like ae). The lowercase “f” is frequently set as a ligature along with other characters – like fl” or “fi” - in professional typefaces.
Light (font) Graphic Design
A type of font lighter than the roman version of the typeface (such as plain, book or normal).
Line Art Graphic Design
Line art is artwork that consists of only black and white areas (no gray). Many images made using desktop publishing graphics programs are considered to be line art. Another example of line art is a pen-and-ink drawing.
Low Resolution Image Graphic Design
A low-resolution image is an image that contains only a certain amount of detailed information. To view an image with sharp, clear colors, it is best to use a high-resolution image.
Masthead Graphic Design
A masthead is the credit box that lists information such as the names of designers, illustrators, writers, editors, sponsors, as wells as pieces of information like publication office location details, and subscription information. The masthead is headed by the name of the publication.
Measure (typography) Graphic Design
The measurement of a line’s length (including lines that do not contain characters - like a partial line) that is designated in picas. The length of a line is termed a “columnmeasure” if the text is set in columns.
Mezzotint Graphic Design
A mezzotint is a particular screen that creates joined, rather dusty-looking dots.
Moiré Patterns Graphic Design
Moiré patterns are patterns that are irregular in shape and resemble a plaid pattern; they happen if a bit-mapped image is changed (enlarged, printed, displayed or reduced) to a resolution that is not the same as the original’s resolution.
Monospaced Type Graphic Design
A kind of typeface that involves the horizontal space used by each character being the same. Monospaced type is a typewriter typeface.
Nested Stories Graphic Design
Stories set in multiple columns at varying column depths in magazine publication layouts or newsletter layouts.
Objected-Oriented (mode) Graphic Design
A grouping of algorithms display graphic form in abstract geometrical terms as object primitives (the basic shapes that other shapes are created from – curves, lines, plan or patterned area masses).
Oblique Type Graphic Design
Oblique type includes characters that slant to the right. Sans serif typefaces frequently contain oblique rather than true italics. True italics are regarded as a different font.
Offset Printing Graphic Design
Offset printing is used for high-volume reproduction. It involves 3 drums that rotate (an impression cylinder, plate cylinder and blanket cylinder). The process involves wrapping the printing plate over the plat cylinder that is inked and moistened. Then, the plate image is moved on the blanket cylinder. The paper moves between the impression cylinder and blanket cylinder, allowing the image to pass onto the paper.
Orphan Graphic Design
An orphan is the very first line of a paragraph set apart by a page break or column from the remainder of the paragraph. A heading may be considered to be an orphan if the text beneath it is not enough. Ideally, the type under the heading should be the same as the height of the heading (this includes the white space).
Outline (graphic design) Graphic Design
The outline is the outer border of a graphic or area of text.
Pantone Matching System Graphic Design
The Pantone matching system is a system that functions as a method to distinguish and blend match colors. Designers are given more than seven hundred colors to choose from; printers are given the necessary recipes to create these colors.
Paste-Up Graphic Design
A paste-up is the preparation of mechanicals. In regard to desktop publishing, this involves the page-assembly software that allows the user to accomplish the electronic pasteup. In terms of traditional publishing, it involves the layout and pasting of type and graphics onto a board.
Pica Graphic Design
A pica is a measurement utilized in typography for the widths of columns as well as other space measurements in a page layout. There are about six picas to one inch; twelve points are contained within one pica.
Pixel (graphic design) Graphic Design
A pixel is the smallest unit of measurement that a device can work with. Usually the term “pixel” is used in reference to display monitors since a pixel is the smallest area of phosphor that a screen can light up. If you enlarge an image on a computer screen, you can view the individual color pixels that make up that image.
Pantone Matching System (PMS) Graphic Design
PMS is the standard color-matching method that graphic designers and printers use for materials – such as ink and paper. Percentage mixtures of various primary inks make up a standard color called a “PMS color.”
Point (typography) Graphic Design
A point is a measurement in typography that designates leading, type size and other space details within the layout of a page. There are about seventy points to one inch; one pica is twelve points.
Posterization Graphic Design
Posterization is the decrease of the amount of gray scales in an image or graphic in order to create a high-contrast effect.
Printer Font Graphic Design
A printer font includes font outline masters or high-resolution bitmaps that put characters down onto the printed page (versus to display on the screen).
Process Color Separation Graphic Design
Process color separation is used to re-create color photographs. Halftone dots of the process colors (including magenta, yellow, black and cyan) are superimposed to create many different kinds of hues.
Proportionally Spaced Type Graphic Design
Proportionally spaced type is a kind of typeface that involves the horizontal space of characters being dictated by the character’s shape, as well as the characters around it.
Pull Quote Graphic Design
A pull quote is a short phrase from the body text that is set apart from the rest of the text with a box, rules and/or a screen and increased in size. It is placed in the center of a paragraph in order to add interest and to stress the text set apart.
Punctuation Block Graphic Design
A punctuation block includes multiple consecutive lines that finish with punctuation and cause the right margin to appear uneven in right-aligned or right-justified text.
Quark X Press Graphic Design
Quark X Press is a type of software frequently used by the publishing industry.
Quick Time Video Graphic Design
Quick time video was created by Apple; it is a video streaming technology.
Ragged Right Alignment Graphic Design
Ragged right alignment is a type set that involves the additional white space in a line set to the right – allowing the text to have a ragged margin. Often it is set with flush left.
Recto Graphic Design
A page displayed on a spread’s right side. A recto is a page that is even-numbered.
Reverse Graphic Design
Reverse is the light-colored or white type of an image over a background that is dark.
Right-justified Alignment Graphic Design
Right-justified alignment is a type set that involves the text being even on the right AND left margin. The additional white space is located amongst words and between characters on the line evenly.
Roman Type Graphic Design
Roman type is called normal or plain type in desktop publishing systems; it is also known as regular or book weight. Roman type is utilized for the body type in publications that contain large amounts of text.
Rough Graphic Design
Rough refers to a detailed thumbnail sketch used for a publication design. A rough is completed at actual size with detail; clients use the roughs for review.
Rule Graphic Design
A rule is a geometric line that functions as a graphic aid in assembling pages. A rule (or ruling line) is different that a line of type.
Run-around Type Graphic Design
A run-around is a type set to fit within the outline of an ornament, initial, illustration or photograph.
Run-in Heading Graphic Design
A run-in heading is a heading positioned upon the very same line as the text. Frequently this text is put in either italic or bold type.
Running Heads/Feet Graphic Design
Running heads/feet are titles positioned at either the top or bottom of the pages of text on a publication containing multiple pages. Frequently, running heads/feet include page numbers as well.
Scaling Graphic Design
Scaling refers to the enlarging or reducing of a piece of artwork that may be either proportional or disproportional to the original piece.
Screen Font Graphic Design
Screen resolution bitmaps of type characters that display the layout and size of the characters seen on the screen. Screen font is not the same as printer font; printer font may include font outline masters or high-resolution bitmaps.
Screen (tint) Graphic Design
A screen is a dotted fill pattern used in graphic arts that is described in percentage (such as 30 percent screen).
Set Width Graphic Design
The horizontal width of characters in typography; the typefaces contain different horizontal set widths of each character (Times, for example, contains a narrow set width). Also, set widths of single characters differ in typeset copy based upon the shape of the character and the characters around it.
Sidebar Graphic Design
A block of information or a story relating to other text which is placed separately from the main body text. Frequently the sidebar is screened or boxed to separate and distinguish it from the main text.
Small Caps Graphic Design
Small caps are capital letters positioned at the x-height of the font.
Solarization Graphic Design
Solarization is a photographic image displayed in a manner in which the whites and blacks of the image are black in appearance; the midtones of the image lean more towards white in appearance.
Solid Graphic Design
Solid refers to the lines of type that do not contain space between each of the lines.
Spot Color Separation Graphic Design
Spot color separation involves the division of solid pre-mixed ink colors (such as brown or green) in offset printing.
Spread Graphic Design
A spread is the joining of two facing pages that are created to work as a unit in a double-sided document. A spread also refers to the inner panels of a brochure.
Standing Elements Graphic Design
Elements in a page design that are repeated in an identical manner in every page in both content and page position. Footers with automatic page numbers are examples of standing elements.
Standoff Graphic Design
Standoff is the amount of space that exists between two text blocks that wrap, or a graphic and a clock of text.
Stress Graphic Design
Stress is the axis that the strokes are created around in a typeface; stress may be vertical or oblique (positive or negative). Stress is not the angle of the strokes. Italics, for example, are created with slanted strokes. However, italics do not necessarily contain oblique stress.
Stroke Weight Graphic Design
The degree of contrast between the thin and thick strokes in a typeface. Various typefaces contain particular stroke-weight characteristics.
Style Sheet Graphic Design
A style sheet involves the typographic specifications included within tagged text in desktop publishing programs. Style sheets may be used to prepare headings, titles and the attributes of text blocks (like tables), and the text used along with images. Style sheets are used in order to create an efficient means of changing attributes and ensuring everything is uniform.
Subhead Graphic Design
Subhead is a phrase that follows a headline. A subhead is presented in a smaller size than the main headline because it is secondary in importance to the head.
Subscript Graphic Design
A subscript is a character a little smaller in size in comparison to the remainder of the font. Subscript is placed under the baseline; it is used within chemical equations, and as a base denotation in mathematics. It may be used as the denominator of fractions.
Superscript Graphic Design
Superscript is a character that is a little smaller than the remainder of the font. Superscript is placed over the baseline, and functions in footnote markers. It is sometimes used as the numerator of fractions.
Tabloid-sized Page Graphic Design
A tabloid-sized page is a size frequently used for newspaper or portrait layouts. The page measures 11x17 inches (tabloid-sized page is not the same thing as a 11x17 inch spread – this is created from two letter-sized pages).
Tags Graphic Design
Tags are delimited sets of characters placed within the text of style sheets, or are internally coded. Tags are used for paragraphs to show the purpose of the paragraphs. The style sheet associated with a tag determines the actual type specification.
Text Wrap Graphic Design
Text wrap is the spatial relationship that exists amongst graphics and blocks of text (or amongst two blocks of text). Usually a text wrap is rectangular in shape. However, a text wrap may also be arbitrary or irregular in shape.
Thumbnail/ Thumbnails Graphic Design
A thumbnail is a tiny picture that is drawn roughly to get one’s design ideas upon paper. A thumbnail is used primarily as a thinking tool aid – it helps a person figure out the basic layout of an idea.
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) Graphic Design
A TIFF file is a graphics file format that is independent of any particular device. They can be worked with on either Mac or IBM computers, and they can be output to PostScript printers.
Tiling Graphic Design
Tiling involves the printing of a page design in parts with edges that overlap in order that the pieces may be pasted together.
Tombstoning Graphic Design
Tombstoning occurs when two or multiple headings are positioned horizontally on a page in multi-column publications.
Track Graphic Design
To track is to lessen the amount of space placed uniformly among characters in a line. (This is not the same thing as kerning – a lessening of the amount of space among particular characters.)
Type Alignment Graphic Design
Type alignment is the placement of white space in a line of type in which the characters at their standard set width do not exactly fill the line length. One may position type to be aligned either centered, right, right-justified, or left.
Typeface Graphic Design
Typeface is the set of characters designed by a type designer that involves both the lowercase and uppercase alphabetical characters, special characters, punctuation, and numbers. Each typeface includes several fonts with various styles and sizes.
Type Families Graphic Design
Type families are a group of typefaces that are created with a similar design; however they each differ in their proportions and weights.
Verso Graphic Design
Verso is the page that is displayed on a spread’s left side; it is a non-even numbered page.
Vector Graphic Graphic Design
A vector graphic is created in paths. The paths permit a person to change an image’s size easily without pixilated edges. This type of format is primarily used in printing (as opposed to the bitmap format which is used for displays that are onscreen).
White Space Graphic Design
White space is the negative space on a page’s layout where there exists neither graphics or text.
Widow Graphic Design
Widow consists of the short last lines of paragraphs in a page’s design. Widow is often considered inappropriate if it is divided from the paragraph by a column break, and is always considered inappropriate if it is divided from the rest of the paragraph by a page break.
Word Wrap Graphic Design
Word wrap consists of the automatic removal of characters to the following line if the right margin is reached in a text editor or word processor.
WYSIWYG Graphic Design
WYSIWYG is a mode of computer processing that is interactive; it involves a screen display of the printed output. However, WYSIWYG is not necessarily accurate due to the various resolutions amongst printers and display screens.
Abstract / Abstraction Painting
To abstract something (whether it be a figure, animal or object) is done by either the distortion or the simplification of the item’s form. The form is changed or modified in a way that takes away details and other pieces of information describing the form.
All-over Space / All Over Space Painting
All-over space refers to a kind of space that exists in modern painting; it involves the distribution of forms filling a 2D surface versus creation of a center of interest used in traditional compositions. In this type of space, the forms are displayed as filling in the spatial depth, as well as displaying similar degrees of significance within the composition. This is in opposition to traditional composition in which there is a center of interest that is considered the most important part of the composition. The forerunner of all-over space was Jackson Pollack. He used all-over space in his drip paintings during the 1940’s and 1950’s.
Assemblage Graphic Design
Assemblage is a kind of modern sculpture. It involves the joining of various forms or objects. Famous assemblages include those completed by Robert Rauschenberg in the 1950’s and 1960’s. Often objects are joined and assembled for both expressive as well as visual characteristics.
Atmospheric / Atmospheric Perspective Painting
Atmospheric refers to a certain quality of 2D work that involves the property of the atmosphere. Something that is “atmospheric” contains within a quality of airiness. This quality is frequently used in contemporary images. Atmospheric also refers to the use of fading and using paler colors and values in order to give a sense of distance within a composition.
Automatic Writing Art Materials and General Art Terms
Automatic writing is a technique developed in the 20th century by the Surrealist and Dada artists to use as a tool to enter into their subconscious minds to write poetry. The artists would endeavor to access their subconscious thoughts in order to write more open, uninhibited poetry.
Biomorphic Painting
An attribute referring to organic shapes made from natural or biological forms. The artists Calder, Arp and Miro used biomorphic attributes in their artwork.
Broken Color Color
Broken color was incorporated into the Impressionists’ paintings during the 19th century in French painting. The color was painted on a canvas using small short strokes (versus the normal method of carefully blending the tones and colors together. The result was a “patchwork” appearance in which the strokes gave the visual effect of light falling over the planes and forms of objects and figures. Today broken color continues to be used popularly in paintings.
Camera Obscura Art Materials and General Art Terms
Camera obscura refers to a system of mirrors and lenses created during the 16th and 17th centuries. It was used as a primitive camera for artists. Using a camera obscura, a painter could project an image on a 2D surface to use it as a preliminary sketch.
Color Field Painting Painting
Color field painting is a technique of painting started in the 1950’s – 1970’s. It involves either big or small regions of abstracted color. Well-known color field painters include Helen Frankenthaler, Morris Louis, Jules Olitski and Mark Rothko.
Conception / Execution Art Materials and General Art Terms
Conception refers to the initial development of an artist’s idea. It involves the start of a creative idea that is refined aesthetically through careful visualization and the solving problems that come up. As the idea is developed, the execution of the idea begins. The method of how to carry out the idea, as well as the use of materials to be used determines how the conception is realized. Usually artists that follow the traditional genre are more concerned with the techniques of how to make their artwork come about. Contemporary artists, for the most part, frequently put more time and effort towards the initial idea and what they wish to “say” to the viewer.
Art Grant
An art grant is a sum of money offered to an individual or organization to fund a particular purpose - such as education, research, a work of art, or living support so the person/persons are free to concentrate on a body of work.
crayon art Art Materials and General Art Terms
Crayon art is artwork made or created with crayon wax. There are several varieties of crayons - including conte crayon and wax crayon. Example of crayon artwork can be seen from artwork individuals do as children. Some artists use crayons professionally to make fine art. Tiona Marco is one such artist. She creates realistic artwork using crayola crayons.
Color perception / Seeing color Color
Color perception is the color that we see when we view an object or scene. Color perception can be influenced by a number of factors, such as color blindness, the inability to observe without preconceived notions, and the quality of light that one is seeing an object/scene in. There are many theories about color perception. There even exists a school in California dedicated solely to the art of seeing color! When one simply “observes” something without the input of any preconceived notions, a better color perception occurs. Becoming aware of color and trying to perceive color accurately is a skill that takes much time and effort to acquire. Painters especially practice the art of perceiving color in order to paint objects as they are.
Color symbolism / Color meaning Color
Color symbolism refers to the meaning associated with that of a certain color. Each color may have several different color symbolisms attached to it depending on the context and culture it is used in. (For example, white in some cultures symbolizes purity. In other cultures, it symbolizes death.) There are a number of influential factors that affect the symbolism of a color. These influences include the following:
1. The different shades of a color (like red and pink).
2. The object or shape the color is contained within.
3. The position and amount of the color in an area.
4. The color combination used (such as red, white and blue, or red and green).
When color is used in a large region or shape, it can have a strong impact in its symbolism. Moreover, when a color is used along with a certain shape – such as a star, triangle, or hexagon – the symbolism of the color becomes more complex.
One example of the use of color symbolism is the common use of the color black to symbolize one is in a state of mourning.
Abstract dance Dance
Pure dance movements that make up a piece of work containing no plot; often the dance movements suggest a particular subject or mood.
Adagio Dance
Adagio is any type of dance that is paced to slow music. It also refers to a section of the classical pas de deux in ballet. (The pas de deux in classical ballet is made up of an opening adagio; a lady is supported by a man while doing turns and balances. This is then followed by a solo by both individuals; next comes a fast coda that involves a dance by the partners together.)
Air, en l' Dance
In ballet, this is a step completed off the ground. A rond de jambe en l'air is an example of this.
Alegrias Dance
An alegrias is a Spanish Gypsy dance. The dance refers to the action of the bullfight and is frequently danced a woman without the support of a partner.
Allegro Dance
An allegro is a dance that contains either a moderate or fast tempo. It is often followed by the adagio, and is typified by jumps or fast turns.
Allonge Dance
In ballet, an allonage refers to an elongated line, especially the horizontal line of an arabesque which involves a dancer placing one of his/her arms toward the front and the other arm towards the back.
arabesque Art Styles/Movements
An arabesque is a decorative form of art that displays rhythmic linear patterns of interwoven lines that may include animal, flower, leaf or fruit placed within the total art design. Often arabesques are graceful and curvy. In regards to the West today, arabesques are primarily present in the decorative arts. However, they have a greater presence in Islamic art because that type of art does not usually include figures in the designs. The term arabesque may also refer to a dance position. It involves a dancer standing on a single leg that is either bent or straight; the other leg is positioned at 90 degrees to the back.
Argentinean tango Dance
An Argentinean tango is a dance that began in the West Indies. Only the lowest classes danced the tango; gradually, the dance became more and more popular. Nowadays it is a common sight to see couples dancing the tango in Argentina. Because of its sensuality, at one point the tango was forbidden by the pope!
Arkansas traveler Dance
An Arkansas traveler refers to an old time barn dance; in the dance, a vendor from Arkansas selling tin ware is depicted.
Assemble Dance
An assemble in dance refers to a jump completed from one to both feet; frequently the dancer lands in fifth position.
Attitude Dance
An attitude refers to a dance position that involves a single leg raised either to the front with the knee bent or to the back; usually a dancer’s arm is raised as well.
Bailatino Dance
A bailatino is a combination of Latin dances; in these dances, no partner is required.
Baion Dance
Baion refers to a kind of Samba rhythm from Brazil that is slow; during the 1950’s the Baion became popular.
Balance Dance
In dance, balance is a step that shifts from one foot to another (often in ¾ time).
Balance (ballroom) Dance
Balance refers to the skill of a dancer maintaining his/her body in an upright and steady position. Balance may occur either when the dancer is still or when the dancer is moving.
Balboa Dance
Balboa refers to a type of Swing that became trendy in California during the 1950’s.
Ballerina Dance
The term ballerina refers to a female dancer. The female that plays the leading role in a dance is referred to as the prima ballerina.
Ballet Dance
Ballet consists of classical theatrical dancing derived from the danse d'ecole. Ballet’s structure and vocabulary were set during the 1700s in France.
Ballet blanc Dance
Ballet blanc refers to a ballet that involves women clothed in white tutus (as seen in the 2nd and 4th acts of Swan Lake).
Ballet de cour, le (court ballet) Dance
Ballet de cour, le (court ballet) refers to either mythological or allegorical themes played out for entertainment by the aristocracy during the 16th and 17th centuries. The spectacles involve a mixture of mime, recitatives and music.
Ballo Dance
Ballo refers to dances and the accompanying music originating in Italy during the 15th and 16th centuries.
Ballon Dance
Ballon refers to the skill of a dancer that involves maintaining a suspended position in the air throughout a jump; the term may also refer to one’s elasticity while jumping.
Ballroom dances Dance
Ballroom dances refers to social dances. Often ballroom dances are done by partners. Examples of ballroom dances include the mambo, samba, cha cha, fox-trot, waltz, tango and the rumba.
Barn dance Dance
Barn dances originated during the colonial times in the United States; the dances were created from the dance movements of England’s country dances. Barn dances were danced in the barns and halls of the colonials in order to socialize with one’s neighbors.
Barre Dance
A barre refers to a wooden bar extending around a ballet studio’s wall positioned at waist height. An individual uses the barre in order to fix or adjust his/her balance often during the first part of class.
Basse danse Dance
Basse danse is a serious court dance that is performed in duple time. It was a dance that was common during the 15th and 16th centuries.
Beguine Dance
Beguine refers to a particular type of Rumba that is thought to have originated in either Cuba or Martinique.
Black bottom Dance
Black bottom refers to a black couple dance that is thought to have originated in the 1920’s.
Bolero Dance
Bolero refers to a dance that started in Spain. The dance often includes Spanish singing with a very slow Rumba rhythm.
Boogie Woogie Dance
The term Boogie Woogie refers to an African American jazz dance. An individual holds one’s knees close together and then shifts the hips from one side to the next while the person moves forward. At first the Boogie Woogie was a particular type of music. Nowadays however it is also a certain type of dance common in Europe. The Boogie Woogie originates from the Rock ‘n’ roll style popular in the 1950’s.
Boston Jive Dance
The Boston Jive is a type of Swing dance that contains similarities to the Lindy, but it also contains kicks.
Bossa Nova Dance
Brazilian musicians changed the “cool jazz” of the United States into a softer, more gentle samba rhythm known as the Bossa Nova. Bossa Nova became well-known around the world when the single “Girl from Ipanema” became a hit in 1964.
Bourree, pas de Dance
The term refers to a number of quick, short steps performed with one’s feet kept close together.
Brise Dance
Brise is a type of jump that consists of a jump off of one foot that in turn is “broken” through beating one’s legs while in the air.
Buck Dance
Buck dancing stresses percussive rhythms using the movement of the heel and toe. It is different from “shuffle” clogging style in that one bends his/her legs more.
Cabriole Dance
The cabriole is a leap in ballet that involves the beating of the lower leg at an angle against the upper leg prior to the dancer touching the ground on the lower leg.
Cachucha Dance
The cachucha is a type of Spanish dance that occurs in either ¾ or 3/8 time with castanets.
Cakewalk Dance
The cakewalk is a type of African-American dance that involves partners strutting and performing high kicks and quick steps.
Calypso Dance
“Calypso” refers to music typical of the England ballads performed by the people of Trinidad. Several steps were made for this type of music in 1956 (probably because of the singing of Harry Bellafonte) because the music became so popular. The steps are similar to the steps found in Martinique Beguine or the Cuban Bolero.
Cambre Fashion
Cambre in ballet refers to the bending of one’s wait either to the back or to the side.
Can Can Dance
The Can Can is a dance that began around the 1830s. In a short time, the Can Can became an energetic dance performed in the music halls of France for social events. Black silk stocking legs were kicked high in the air – a wild and extreme thing during this time period. It is thought that the Can Can started as a variation of the Quadrille or Polka.
Canyengue Dance
The Canyengue is at the root of the tango. It goes back to the 1900s. The title means “walk with cadence” and comes from Africa. The dance is a sensual, rather upbeat performance. It contains short steps and a strong beat. Overtime the musical signature of 4x8 was changed to the tango’s musical signature of today of 4x2.
Carioca Dance
The carioca is a term referring to a native of Rio de Janeiro; the term also is shorthand for the Brazilian dance called the Samba Carioca. During the dance, people join together in chains or cues (called cordoes) and move their bodies back and forth to the Samba-Carioca and the Marchas. The dance is performed at the Carioca Carnival.
Carolina Shag Dance
A type of Swing dance style originating performed in the states of Virginia, North and South Carolina, and Georgia. Usually the dance is performed to the music of The Embers, The Drifters, the Tarms, and a variety of “Motown” artists. The dance is similar to West Coast Swing – containing similar coaster steps, shuffles, slot movement… The tempo of the music is slow to medium and is danced by a wide variety of ages.
quilt batting Quilting
Quilt batting is the wool, synthetic fiber, or cotton wadded into rolls or sheets that quilters use to line quilts.
Filler (quilting) Quilting
Filler refers to the type of quilt batting used to line the inside of a quilt. Examples of filler include: wool, synthetic fiber, or cotton. These items are wadded into rolls or sheets and used by quilters to line quilts.
All in One Fashion
A term used for a foundation that includes a girdle and bra pieced together into a one-piece garment.
Amazone Fashion
A term used for women’s riding clothes. The word “Amazone” was popularized in the 1800s; the word is derived from the female warriors of Greek mythology called the Amazons.
Aumoniêre Fashion
The term originally referred to a small bag used to carry alms by people during the Middle Ages. Later, women used the bag as both a practical and fashionable accessory during the 1700s. This bag was a catalyst of the reticule and eventually the handbag.
Baby doll Fashion
A type of dress that contains short puffed sleeves and a waistline that is not defined. The term was taken from the film Baby Doll from 1956.
Banyan Fashion
An indoor garment worn by men in England during the 1600s and 1700s. The garment was first worn in Inida by the Hindi.
Bare-midriff top Fashion
A clothing style popularized in the 1970s that exposes the body from the waist or hips to the rip cage under the bust.
Beach pajamas Fashion
A full-length trouser ensemble worn between the 1920’s and 1930’s by women as sportswear.
Berthe Fashion
A big cape-like collar worn by women that was first worn in the 1800s to cover their neckline.
Bicorne Fashion
A crescent-shaped hat worn by men during the Napoleonic period. This hat was a favorite of Napoleon 1, and worn by the Incroyables as a substitute for the tricorne.
Bizarre silk Fashion
A type of silk fabric created with exotic and unique patterns that usually include both baroque and Oriental motifs. This type of silk was famous from the 1600s to the early 1700s.
Blonde lace Fashion
A type of fine silk bobbin lace produced in Bayeux, Caen and Chantilly in France. This silk was first created with cream-colored unbleached China silk thread. The lace was popular between the 1750s to the 1800s.
Bloomers Fashion
A type of underpants that contains loose legs that gathers at the knee length. A woman named Amelia Bloomer created them to encourage dress reform for women. However, the bloomers were not received very well. Later, the bloomers became popular as bicycle riding attire in the 1880s. As time went on, girls wore them as gym clothes.
Bobbin lace Fashion
Lace created on a pillow that patterns are marked out by pins. The bones (or bobbins) are crossed back and forth over the positioned pins. There are varieties of bobbin lace, including Binche, Mechlin, Chantilly, and Brussels.
Bonding Fashion
Bonding is the textile process of making two fabrics into a single piece by backing with foam or adhesive.
Boro look Fashion
A term coined for Rei Kawakubo and Yohji Yamamoto’s collections in 1982. In Japanese, “Boro” means “ragged.” Shabbiness became fashionable from the monochromatic, ragged and simple clothes. The fashion statement expresses a feeling of absence.
Bustle Fashion
A bustle is a pattern of steel springs placed under a skirt to make a projecting derriere. Bustles were fashionable in several forms during the second part of the nineteenth century.
Cardigan Fashion
A cardigan is a knit jacket that opens in the front. The term “cardigan” comes from Great Britain’s Earl of Cardigan (also known as James Thomas Brudenell).
Carmagnole Fashion
A carmagnole is a type of jacket containing gold buttons and wide lapels that was worn by French Revolutionaries. Workers originally from Carmagnola, Italy introduced the jacket to France.
Chambre Syndicale de la Couture Parisienne Fashion
Chambre Syndicale de la Couture Parisienne is an organization centered on promoting Parisian high fashion. The organization is involved with press relations, defending copyrights, operating vocational schools and arranges collections of work. It was founded in 1910.
Chemise à la Reine Fashion
A style of dress worn by Marie-Antoinette, queen of Louis XVI of France during the 1780s. The style originated from the chemise dress.
Chemise dress Fashion
The chemise dress is a muslin dress originating from the Empire period. It was designed with a slim skirt and high waistline and was worn without a corset.
China silk Fashion
China silk is a type of lightweight plain-weave shiny silk created in either Japan or China.
Cloche Fashion
A cloche is a hat worn in the 1920s. The name is derived from the French word for “bell,” because of the deep-crown shape of the hat.
Cockade, cocarde Fashion
A rosette created with pleated ribbon. It was used originally for military insignia.
Compères Fashion
Compères - two cloth panels used in during the middle of the eighteenth century for women’s open robes. The panels were joined to the inside front bodice and positioned with buttons or hooks. They were an improvement in functionality from the stomacher (it needed to be pinned to the dress every time it was put on).
Confection Fashion
Confection is a French word for the affordable, mass-produced clothing that started during the middle of the nineteenth century.
Corset Fashion
A corset is a fitted inner bodice stiffened with wood, metal or whalebone that was positioned with lacing. The actual term “corset” was used later after the invention had been around for some time. Until then, the corset was referred to as an undergarment (called stays in English).
Costume jewelry Fashion
Costume jewelry is jewelry created from imitation stones or gemstones that look like precious stones. Costume jewelry became popular when Gabrielle Chanel displayed imitation jewels during the 1920s. The idea gradually grew so that costume jewelry became an indispensable accessory.
Coutil Fashion
A firm, long-lasting linen or cotton that contains a herringbone twill weave. Coutil is used for undergarments.
Cravat Fashion
A cravat is a tie or neckcloth. This was the first men’s neckwear used in the 1660s. Over time, the cravat became the modern necktie of today.
Crinoline Fashion
A petticoat designed in order to create skirts of fantastic volume popular during the middle of the nineteenth century. The term crinoline is the word for petticoat made of woven fabric from horsehair (crin) and linen (lin). The cage frame crinoline originated in the 1850s from whalebones/steel hoops.
Dandy Fashion
“Dandy” is a descriptive term used for men self-conscious about their appearance and looking smart in their choice of clothes.
Dolly varden style Fashion
A particular women’s fashion between the 1870s and1880s. The dolly varden style was coined after Charles Dickens’ novel Barnaby Rudge published in 1841. The style was a revival of the Robe A La Polonaise style.
Drawn work Fashion
Drawn work is openwork embroidery created by taking out some threads in either direction of the fabric and interlacing the leftover yarns with decorative stitches.
Drugget, droguet Fashion
A fancy silk fabric created with detailed, complicated patterns from the eighteenth century.
Dust ruffle Fashion
A dust ruffle was a ruffle placed on the inside of the hem of a full-length petticoat or dress during the nineteenth and early twentieth century in order to guard the dress from getting dirty when a woman was outdoors.
Echelle Fashion
A decorative ribbon lacing positioned on the front of a stomacher; it was fashionable from the later part of the seventeenth through the eighteenth century. The term originated from the French word for “ladder,” because the ribbon pattern looked like one.
Empire styles Fashion
A dress characterized by a high waistline, puffy sleeves and a straight skirt. The style was worn during the First Empire in France, 1804-1815.
Engageantes Fashion
Engageantes are sleeve ruffles created from either drawn work or fine lace in both double and triple layers. This type of ruffle was popular during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.
Fichu Fashion
Scarves designed for women that were worn in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. The scarves were generally created from muslin.
Fly fringe Fashion
A silk fringe made up of small tassels or tufts. The fringe was generally used to trim women’s gowns in the eighteenth century.
Frock coat Fashion
A single or double-breasted coat designed for men containing fold-back lapels. The coat was fashionable during the late eighteenth century and nineteenth century.
Fuki Fashion
A lining projecting from the hem and sleeve openings in the Japanese kimono. Usually it is in a contrasting color and sometimes it is padded.
Garconne Fashion
A term used after WWI to describe women who both looked like and dressed like boys. The term originated from the title of a novel published in 1922 by Victor Margueritte.
Gazar Fashion
Silk gauze created by a textile manufactory founded in Switzerland called Abraham. Gazar has a smooth, crisp feeling to it.
Gibson girl Fashion
A character made up by Charles Dana Gibson, an American illustrator. The character was first seen by viewers in his artwork in 1895.
Gigot sleeve, leg of mutton sleeve Fashion
A sleeve in the shape of a leg of mutton – the sleeve is rounded and full starting from the shoulder and extending to the elbow. It then narrows at the wrist. In the 1830s very full sleeves were fashionable, and they again came into fashion during the 1890s.
Gilet, vest, waistcoat Fashion
A man’s sleeveless garment the length of the waist; the garment was worn over a shirt and under a jacket.
Girdle Fashion
A flexible undergarment worn (usually) by women over the waist and hips to give the body a slimmer appearance.
Glass beads Fashion
Glass beads - beads made of glass since ancient times all over the world. Glass beads from Venice are especially well-known. Mariano Fortuny used glass beads frequently in his designs.
Habit, justaucorps Fashion
The term “habit” replaced the word justaucorps during the 18th century when referring to a man’s jacket.
Habit a la Francaise Fashion
Men’s formal attire that included knee-breeches, a waistcoat and a jacket during the 18th century.
Habutae Fashion
A plain-weave, soft silk fabric of Japan that is lightweight. In Japanese, the fabric is often called hiraginu.
Harem Pants Fashion
Bouffant pants that originated from the Middle Eastern style of pants. The pants gather into bands at the wearer’s ankles.
Haute Couture Fashion
Charles Frederick Worth started the industry of haute couture in the late nineteenth century that developed into this Parisian high-quality clothing and its special system of creation.
Hobble Skirt Fashion
A skirt that is rounded over a woman’s hips and narrows together as it reaches the ankles. The skirt impedes walking because it is so narrow at the bottom. The skirt was introduced to society in 1910 by Paul Poiret.
Hostess Gown Fashion
An entertainment gown worn at home by the lady in charge of the festivities.
Hot Pants Fashion
“Hot pants” is slant for women’s short pants. The term was coined by the fashion industry in 1971 from the newspaper Women’s Wear Daily.
Hussar, Hussard Fashion
The French army’s light cavalry. The soldiers’ uniforms originated from the cavalry unites of Hungary. The Hussar style gradually became fashionable starting from the end of the 18th century.
Incroyable Fashion
Another term for “fop” or “dandy” for men self-conscious about their fashionable appearance during the Directoire period (1795-1799).
Indienne Fashion
A French word for printed or painted muslin from India. In England the term is chintz.
Irish crochet lace Fashion
Handmade lace created with the chain stitch. The lace repeats the needlepoint lace style developed in Ireland. The Irish crochet lace was fashionable from the late 19th century to early 20th century.
Jabot Fashion
A lace or cloth ornament hung over the chest. Although the jabot was originally intended for men, it became a fashionable accessory for women during the middle of the 19th century.
Japonsche rock Fashion
A Dutch term for the Japanese kimono with cotton padding. The garment was worn indoors by European men during the 17th and 18th centuries. The kimonos were imported by the East India Company. However, since there was a shortage of the number of imported Japanese kimonos, gowns created with indienne were made to meet the need. In Holland, both these gowns were called “Japonsche rocken.”
Jumps Fashion
A soft bodice for women to wear at home without the stiffening bones of a corset during the 18th century.
Jouv print, toile de jouy Fashion
Fabrics printed by Christophe P. Oberkampf. He founded a factory in Jouy, France. Jouy gradually grew into a big center for the printing industry in France once the ban on importing or producing indienne was taken away in 1759.
Kimono Fashion
A traditional costume designed in Japan. It became fashionable for Western women to wear the Japanese gown as a special at-home gown in the late 19th century, and thus the term kimono was used to refer to a dressing gown. In the early 20th century, the kimono sleeve and kimono coat were changed from the traditional Japanese kimono to Western style.
action painting Painting
A style of painting popularized by Jackson Pollack. In action painting, paint may be smeared, dribbled or splashed on a canvas in such a way that the physical act of making the artwork is stressed. This style of painting counterposes the carefully thought-out brushstroke work of other styles of painting. Action painting is sometimes referred to as "gestural abstraction."
aesthetic experience Art Materials and General Art Terms
A person's interaction and response to a piece of work, including its visual, literal and expressive qualities.
albumen print Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of print invented in 1850 by Louis Désiré Blanquart-Evrard. This type of print (also referred to as a albumen silver print) was the first commercially exploitable means of creating a photographic print on a paper base from a negative.
alligatoring Painting
Cracks that form on the surface of layers of paint; they take on the appearance of alligator hide.
allover painting / all-over painting Painting
A style of painting in which the entire surface of the piece is worked on in a more or less uniform way, and the normal way of treating composition (with the picture having a center, top or bottom) is not considered. The term was originally used in response to Jackson Pollock's drip paintings. Later the term was used to refer to other pieces that refrain from the usual compositional approaches.
allover design Art Materials and General Art Terms
A design that is repeated and fills an area entirely. Textiles and wallpapers are examples of items that contain allover designs.
art brut Art Materials and General Art Terms
Coined by Jean Dubuffet, "art brut" is a term for art created by people on the out-skirts of the established art world such as psychiatric patients and people living on the edge of society. Dubuffet was of the opinion that this type of art - since it derived from people who were not inhibited but educational training or social constraints - was respectable.
ambrotype Photography
A photograph that causes a positive image on a sheet of glass utilizing the wet plate collodion method. It was first used in the 1850s in the United States. The method was invented by Frederick Scott Archer but ambrotypes utilized the plate image not as a negative, but as a positive. James Ambrose may be credited with coining the term "ambrotype"; he took out many patents in regards to the process.
anaglyph Photography
A still or moving picture comprised of two similar but different perspectives of the same subject matter in superimposed contrasting colors; the result, when seen through two similarly colored filters. The anaglyph may also refer to a section of decoration or sculpture made into relief such as a boss/cameo. It is different than a diaglyph which features depressed carvings/engravings.
authorial irrelevance Art Materials and General Art Terms
The concept that the viewer's comprehension of the underlying meaning of a piece of artwork should not be influenced by the author's stated intentions, social background or biography.
academic art Art Styles/Movements
academy Art Materials and General Art Terms
An academy is an institution created during the Renaissance in order to liberate artists and scholars from the tyranny of guilds, and to raise them to a higher status so people see them as professionals.
alabaster Sculpture
A slightly translucent stone with a smooth, white surface. The stone is soft enough to be sawed with a handsaw and is easily carved. It is best used inside because of its susceptibility to scratches. The alabaster mentioned by people in the distant past is actually a different and more sturdier stone variety called onyx marble.
Buon fresco Painting
Cartoon Painting
Chiaroscuro Painting
A modeling effect in fine art painting in which strong contrast between dark and light values is used, lending a three-dimensional appearance.
Contrapposto Art Materials and General Art Terms
Fresco secco Painting
A type of painting technique in which the pigment is combined with a binding agent and then applied on dry plaster. A true fresco painting is better than using the method of fresco secco in terms of durability.
Humanism Art Materials and General Art Terms
An historical movement associated with the Italian Renaissance founded upon the literature and culture of classical Greco-Roman antiquity in regards to scientific, intellectual, literary and educational branches between the 14th - 16 centuries.
Grisaille Painting
A style of painting using only various shades of gray; this type of painting is used in particular to create relief sculpture.
Illusionism Painting
A style of painting in which the painter aims to create three-dimensionality from two-dimensional objects.
Polymath Art Materials and General Art Terms
Predella Art Materials and General Art Terms
Terribilita Painting
Base (sculpture) Sculpture
A base (also called plinth) is the item that a sculpture is mounted, attached or fixed upon; it should not be confused with a pedestal, because a base is positioned between a pedestal and the sculpture.
blown glass Blown glass
Blowing through a glass bubble at the end of a hollow tube creates blown glass. Through the activities of rolling, pinching, and spinning an artist can form the glass into various formations. Another way to create blown glass is to put the bubble in a hollow mold and then blow into it until it grows into different areas of the mold.
Conceptual art Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of art in which the concept or idea of the work is the essential element regarding the overall message and assessment of the work. It is the idea behind the work that is considered important, and all the planning and decisions regarding the work stem from the initial idea. Marcel Duchamp, a French artist, is credited with showing conceptualists examples of conceptual works, such as his piece called, "Fountain" in 1917.
Coil building Ceramic Art
A hand-building technique employed to create pots. Clay plastic "snakes" are formed, pushed and pinched to combine them into a pot. Sometimes the artist leaves the coil appearance to achieve a particular affect. Ceramics created with coil building depend largely on the artist's hand to create the object's form vs. using a potters wheel or mold. The coils themselves may be defined or smooth based upon the texture of the object or the intent of the artist.
Pyrometric cones Ceramic Art
Pyrometric devices utilized to asses the conditions of heat during the firing of ceramic materials. The cones give a visual portrayal of when the items have attained a level of maturity (related to temperature and time). They are made out of clay and glaze material.
Foundry Ceramic Art
A factory that creates metal castings. Metals, such as aluminum or iron, are cast into shapes by pouring melted metal into molds and then taking off the mold or casting once the metal has solidified.
Kinetic art Art Materials and General Art Terms
Patination Sculpture
Relief sculpture Sculpture
Sculptured artwork that projects or sinks in relation to a plane - it may be a carved or modeled form. Material is taken away from the plane that is not necessary for the composition of the image. A common use of relief sculpture is to place a number of relief panels together to portray scenes of an event.
andamento Mosaics
The pattern that tesserae are positioned which creates the mosaic composition.
backerboard Mosaics
Panels made from fiberglass or cement that are used as the foundation for mosaic work when water-resistant, underlayment is required.
Multimedia sculpture Sculpture
Callipers Sculpture
A tool used by sculptors to measure in the round as they work. The tool contains two jaws that adjust and can be purchased in a variety of sizes in plastic, metal or wood.
Art for art's sake Art Materials and General Art Terms
Armature Sculpture
Welding Welding
Sprue Welding
orthogonal lines Art Perspective
Perspective lines that point to the vanishing point; orthogonal lines are perpendicular to one another.
perpendicular lines Art Perspective
perspective drawing Art Perspective
Perspective drawing was developed by Filippo Brunelleschi (1377 - 1446) and Leon Baptista Alberti (1404 - 1472), two architects from the 15th century. It was one of the main ideas behind Western art until the Cubists started to question it during the early 1900s. There are two main types of perspective drawing; they include linear perspective and aerial perspective. Linear perspective is perspective as it relates to the arrangement of shapes in space. Aerial perspective is perspective as it relates to changes of the atmosphere through the use of tones and color. “Perspective is to painting what the bridle is to the horse, the rudder to a ship...There are three aspects to perspective. The first has to do with how the size of objects seems to diminish according to distance; the second, the manner in which colors change the farther away they are from the eye; the third defines how objects ought to be finished less carefully the farther away they are.” (Quote by Leonardo da Vinci)
zero point perspective Art Perspective
measure line perspective Art Perspective
ground line Art Perspective
perspective grid Art Perspective
observation point OP Art Perspective
centerline CL Art Perspective
center vanishing point CVP Art Perspective
The point located on the horizon line that connects to the observation point. Usually it is at this point where the horizon line and centerline intersect each other. It is also at this point where lines parallel to the picture plane disappear.
carving Sculpture
caryatid Sculpture
slide cutting Cosmetology
A hair cutting method that takes away excessive hair volume without changing the design of the cut encouraged for thick, medium hair. This method helps to lift hair roots, create softness and adds movement to the hair. Using this method for thinner hair may alter the intended results and so should be used with caution.
feathering Cosmetology
graduation Cosmetology
razoring Cosmetology
point cutting Cosmetology
demi permanent Cosmetology
A color that washes out after around twenty to twenty-five shampoos. It is ideal for people who wish to blend small bits of grey, make their hair brighter, add some shine, or go darker. On the other hand, if used extensively, the color will build up in the hair and not be able to be washed out, contributing to regrowth issues and making the demi-permanent permanent.
hair color shade Cosmetology
hair colorist Cosmetology
slicing Cosmetology
undercutting Cosmetology
adze Carpentry
buff Carpentry
check Carpentry
chordal distance Carpentry
The distance between two points located on a curve; the measure of the distance circling the curve is longer than the chordal distance
aerosol Painting
adhesion Painting
air cure Painting
anti fouling paint Painting
Paints that are designed specifically for things that reside beneath the water - such as boat docks or hulls, in order to stop the growth of organisms from covering their surfaces.
paint binder Painting
The ingredients inside a coating that keep the pigment particles floating and join them to the substrate; binders are made up of resins, such as alkyd, latex and oils. The properties of the binder affect several of the paint's capabilities - such as adhesion and color retention.
blistering (painting) Painting
The forming of bubbly protrusions in varnish films or paints due to lack of adhesion and the raise of the film from the surface beneath.
nonobjective art Art Materials and General Art Terms
assemblage (texture) Art Materials and General Art Terms
Assemblage refers to adhering three-dimensional objects to an image's surface, adding actual texture to the image. Assemblage should not be confused with collage.
diptychs Art Materials and General Art Terms
Formatting is often used to convey meaning in an artistic work. One way to do this is to create a diptych - combining of two canvases together. By presenting images that relate to one another, an artist is able to make a statement with more force than if the image stood by itself.
distortion Art Materials and General Art Terms
external focus Art Materials and General Art Terms
Artists that draw inspiration from the physical world around them are externally focused. Drawing what is around them is often the first thing people do to start developing as artists, and they may continue to be externally focused as artists for the rest of their lives. However, in time they may change and become more internally focused. Approaching art with an external focus creates objective art - art that is perceived rather than art that is subjective - stemming from the mind or heart.
hard edges/sharp edges Art Materials and General Art Terms
intermediate edges Art Materials and General Art Terms
soft edges Art Materials and General Art Terms
An edge is the place where two different colors, textures or values meet. Edges may be characterized in a variety of ways. Soft edges blend together, making it difficult to distinguish where one texture/color/value stops and another begins.
lost edges Art Materials and General Art Terms
An edge is the place where two different colors, textures or values meet. Edges may be characterized in a variety of ways. Lost edges disappear; the transition between two colors/values/textures cannot easily be seen because the transition between the two is gradual.
implied texture Art Materials and General Art Terms
Texture refers to the surface quality of something. Texture may be implied or actual. Implied texture is texture that is visual.
actual texture Art Materials and General Art Terms
Texture refers to the surface quality of something. Texture may be implied or actual. Actual texture is texture that can be felt.
internal focus Art Materials and General Art Terms
internal vision Art Materials and General Art Terms
directional line Art Materials and General Art Terms
implied lines Art Materials and General Art Terms
Implied lines are lines that are not necessary drawn in an image, but are lines created by values, colors, textures or shapes that guide the eye though the piece of artwork.
edge variation Art Materials and General Art Terms
Changing the types of edges included within a piece of work to avoid monotony and add interest; these edges may be hard, soft, intermediate or lost.
Hugo Alvar Henrik Aalto Furniture
A Finnish designer and architect, Aalto influenced many people with his Scandinavian modern designs. He influenced people in Finland, as well as the United States in regards to his furniture design. Aalto started designing furniture in the 1920s and was drawn to using wood, rather than metal in his designs. He is best known for his laminated beechwood chairs which he created in the 1930s. Aalto is the first designer who used the cantilever principle for the designing of chairs with the employment of wood, rather than tubular steel. In addition to furniture, he designed glassware, lighting fixtures, and fabrics.
Eero Aarnio Furniture
The “Globe” chair is an ovoid fiberglass shell, featuring a big circular opening. It moves on a cast aluminum base, which (along with the chair) is painted in either yellow, blue or red. A person takes a seat on the opening, which may include stereo speakers and the chair is totally upholstered. The chair has the creative twist to it of fantasy. Its creation stems from Charles Eames and follows through the lines of Scandinavian design.
abacus Furniture
A slab that the architrave rests upon; it is the member placed at the top of the capital of a column.
Nikolai Abraham Abildgaard Furniture
Nikolai Abraham Abildgaard (1743 - 1809) In addition to being a Danish painter and neoclassical style interior designer, Abildgaard designed furniture. At first he designd the furniture for himself. Later, he designed furniture for the Danish family. He enjoyed copying ancient Greek furniture as can be seen in ancient pottery painting.
abura Furniture
A pale yellow-brown Nigerian hardwood. Abura works well for furniture because it stains easily and contains a uniform texture. It is especially useful for creating moldings.
acanthus Architecture
acroter Furniture
A pedestal used for an ornament or statue and positioned at the lower corners of a pediment. The term may be used to refer to the ornament alone. The acroter was often used in European case furniture in the Neoclassical style, most notably in the 1700s.
Robert Adam Furniture
Robert Adam (1728 - 1792) A famous Neoclassical style architect and designer from Britain, Adam is known for thinking that architects should create both the exterior and the interior details of places in order to create harmony and consistency in a decorative scheme. Adam followed this course of thought by designing objects placed within his rooms, including carpets and furniture. He created the “Adam style,” which was a reaction against the previous Rococo. His work had a sense of light and airiness to it.
Adam Style Furniture
A British Neoclassical style in furniture and interior decoration in later 1700s started by Robert Adam. In this style, there was a wide use of classical motifs that were painted or with inlaid decoration on rectilinear shapes with graceful proportions. The style was a reaction against the whimsical, somewhat frivolous and asymmetrical Rococo furniture of the 1750s. The style was characterized primarily by its ornamentation. Adam thought architects should follow consistent actions in their buildings, and so he designed both the exterior and interior of his buildings with care. His furniture was often ornamented with gilding of bronze or wood mounts, and he liked to use exotic woods. His primary patrons were wealthy, as they could afford his elegant and often luxurious works. In the same decade, the Adam style was put down as being frivolous and just too much. Yet, the style had a strong influence not only in Europe but also in Russia and the United States.
Nathaniel Adams Furniture
Adams was a furniture maker from Boston, MA who studied under Thomas Edsall. He created American Jacobean furniture harnassing elements of the English Jacobean style that took place in the 1600s.
Nehemiam Adams Furniture
Nehemiam Adams (1769 - 1840) Born in Salem, Massachusetts, Adams was a furniture maker of the federal period.
Adirondack furniture Furniture
A type of American furniture featuring a rustic flair that was manufactured from around 1898 to the early 1940s. The furniture was popular with the owners of resorts, summer residences and camps of the Adirondack Mountains in upstate New York, and was thus dubbed with its name because of its popularity from that area. The furniture was primarily made in Indiana, and was marketed throughout the United States. Most of the furniture was made up of chairs and sofas, though tables and hat-racks and other items were created along its style as well. Later, in the 1930s and 1940s, its style was influenced by the current styles, and it shifted from its original look and feel.
basic color theory Art Materials and General Art Terms
electromagnetic spectrum Art Materials and General Art Terms
Light is made up of a long band of radiant energy. On one side of the band are X rays and ultraviolet rays. On the other side of the band are invisible heat and infrared rays. The band includes a section of visible light rays where all color is found. This is called the “spectrum.”
color chemistry Art Materials and General Art Terms
Chemists work with pigments to test their characteristics, and they use the knowledge they glean from this in order to create paints from colorants. William Henry Perkin discovered aniline dyes created from coal tar in 1856. And since then many improvements have been made in regard to performance and quality of artists’ pigments. Synthetic pigments are available today that provide greater safety in their use, as well as strength and beauty not always available in natural pigments (some of which fade over time). Scientists have been able to restore and save paintings from hundreds of years ago because of their knowledge of pigment permanence.
basic triads (color) Art Materials and General Art Terms
color systems
Albert Munsells color system Art Materials and General Art Terms
Munsell created a numerical color notation system that rested upon the five colors of blue, purple, green, yellow and red. The original sphere is made up of ten pure hues around its perimeter. When colors are combined with white they turn into tints, and they move up the vertical scale. When they are combined with mixtures of black, they are positioned further down the scale, and become shades. In addition to moving vertically, the colors move horizontally toward the sphere’s center, and change gradually in purity as they turn into neutral gray tones.
M.E. Chevreuls ideas Art Materials and General Art Terms
M.E. Chevreul (Director of Dyes at the Gobelins tapestry works in France) wrote The Law of Simultaneous Contrast of Color in 1839. He included within his work about how the eye perceives color in multiple combinations. He made the point that it becomes more and more difficult for the viewer to pinpoint the focal point of the composition when the picture includes more color and objects. Hiis observations helped to begin the Impressionists’ painting discoveries with light and color.
The Gordon Parks International Photo Competition
The Gordon Parks International Photo Competition
Fort Scott Community College awards prizes of $1,000, $500, and $250 to artists with photography work reflecting significant themes in the life and the work of Gordon Parks (such as family values or injustice).
Aegricanes Furniture
A head of a goat or ram; a decorative motif developed from ancient Greek religious iconography. It was implemented in furniture design by Neoclassical style designers during the late 1700s and early 1800s.
Jacques Adnet Furniture
Adnet was a French furniture designer from the 1930’s - 1950’s. Art Deco was his expertise during the 1930’s, which was, for the most part, out of style during that time. After the war he became known for his leather-covered furniture which was popular in the 1940’s and 1950’s.
Afara Furniture
A type of West African hardwood that may range from dark brown to yellow in color. It is used in furniture as either a solid wood or veneer.
drawing on the right side of the brain Art Materials and General Art Terms
There are five basic skills to drawing. These basic skills include the perception of edges, the perception of spaces, the perception of relationships, the perception of lights and shadows, and the perception of the whole (gestalt). Switching to the right side of the brain allows one to perceive all of these things in a way that faciliitates greater ease of drawing them.
In order to access the right side of the brain, it is necessary to shut off the left side of the brain so the right side can take over the job. This process is achieved by presenting the brain with information that the left side of the brain does not want to process. In essence, the left side of the brain gives up, thereby giving the right side of the brain the freedom to operate freely. A number of drawing exercises can assist this transition.
Most people prefer to use the left side of their brain to operate on a day-to-day basis. Reading, writing and arithmetic are all activities that the left side of the brain enjoys because the left side of the brain is analytic and verbal. But in order to draw, it is best to switch into the right side of the brain, because it can best handle information that is spatial, nonverbal and holistic. Tapping into the right side allows one to ease into a state of drawing with success.
left side of the brain L-mode characteristics Art Materials and General Art Terms
The left side of the brain (left-mode) is 1) verbal - likes to use words to explain and describe things 2) digital - likes to use numbers such as adding or subtracting 3) rational - likes to use reason and facts to make judgements on things and situations 4) temporal - likes to know what time it is and enjoys being aware of the sequence of things 5) analytic - enjoys knowing how things go, step-by-step 6) symbolic - likes to use things to represent something 7) abstract - enjoys taking one snippet of information and using it to access the entire situation or whole thing 8) linear - likes to process things in relation to connected ideas, with one thought leading to the next one in a one-path manner and 9) logical - likes to make conclusions with one item following the next in a rational manner.
right side of the brain R-mode characteristics Art Materials and General Art Terms
The left side of the brain and the right side of the brain have two distinct sets of characteristics. In normal everyday activities, the brain is constantly switching back and forth between the two sides to complete whatever tasks are at hand. The brain uses whatever side of the brain that can best handle the current task.
The right side of the brain (right-mode) is 1) holistic - likes to view things all at once, enjoys understanding things in overall structures and patterns which often leads to an assortment of conclusions 2) nonverbal - likes to be conscience of things without giving attention to words 3) intuitive - likes to make broad leaps of insight and understanding which are often founded upon feelings, visual images, guesses or unfinished patterns 4) synthetic - likes to combine things into complete wholes, such as putting together puzzle pieces into one big image 5) spatial - likes to perceive how things are in relation to other things, enjoys understanding how things fit together into a whole 6) concrete - likes to find connections between things as they are at the present moment 7) nonrational - likes to not have an awareness of time and is 8) analogic - likes to find similarities between things and perceive metaphoric relationships.
alert box Computer
An alert box (also known as an alert window or alert dialog) is a small window that pops up on the computer screen that gives information to a user. Frequently an alert box contains a cancel button and an OK button.
drawing is not a magical ability Art Materials and General Art Terms
Drawing, like anything else, takes practice. By taking the time and diligently practicing drawing exercises, a person will improve his/her draftsmanship over time. And the learning never ends - there is always more to learn in the realm of art. But once the basic master of drawing skills is achieved, a person has the ability to draw anything - ships, portraits, animals, flowers, landscapes...
artists way of seeing Art Materials and General Art Terms
The key to perceiving things and drawing them is to have a mental shift in the brain - from the left-mode of thinking to the right-mode of thinking. In each mode, a person perceives things differently.
For example, while in the left-mode of the brain, if a person saw a fire, he/she would run to get some water. But a person in the right-mode of the brain would think, “Look at all the pretty colors of yellow, orange and red!”
This is why artists may mention that they notice a different state of mental awareness as they draw - time seems to fly out the window and does not exist! Words are no longer important, and a state of relaxation combined with an alert mind takes over. Drawing, playing music, painting, cooking....all of these things can bring one into this state of awareness. It is a pleasurable experience.
Therefore, the artist’s way of seeing begins with shifting into using the right side of the brain in order to truly SEE what is in front of him/her. By shifting to the drawing mode, people can begin to draw their perceptions, rather than draw preconceived notions of what is there.
drawing on your creative side Art Materials and General Art Terms
Through drawing, a person not only learns a new skill, but learns to open up the creative side of his/her brain. The imagination is unleashed and one perceives himself/herself in a whole new way, as well as the rest of the world.
why draw realistically Art Materials and General Art Terms
Drawing is a tremendous asset for those willing to challenge themselves and learn it.
5 tips on how to make money as an artist
If your work is mediocre, people will know it and they will not pay attention to it. Focus on your craft. Get really good at what your do. Only then can you demand the attention of other people’s eyes.
2) No matter what happens, be productive as an artist.
If you want to make it as an artist, you need to be producing artwork. It may seem obvious, but after your day job you need to be creating artwork. You cannot expect to make it as an artist with a tiny portfolio. Build up a number of pieces. This helps people to realize how serious of an artist you are. And a larger body of artwork helps people to gain a sense of your own personal style and way of looking at the world.
3) Do not compare your successes or failures with other artists.
You will get discouraged and frustrated if you continue to look at other people’s successes. Remember, art is a very subjective thing and business is tough. Artists are not selling a product that a necessity - we NEED groceries, but people can survive without artwork on their walls (though not as well - art DOES lift the spirit). Just continue your artwork and keep on making it without constantly looking at other artists’ progress and any honors they receive.
In time, if you are patient, people WILL start to notice your artwork if it is done well. Artists must be determined to continue on despite any obstacles or frustrations. Van Gogh is a great example of this principle. He continued to make artwork, despite the fact he NEVER sold a painting in his life. And yet, how many people has he influenced by his work since his death? Millions.
4) Expose your work - somewhere.
If you want people to know you are an artist, then you need to expose your work somewhere where they can see it. It does not matter in the beginning where you begin - just get started. Often artists start to expose their artwork in coffee shops or restaurants. As word gets out, people may contact you for commissions.
Some artists have private art studios where they are able to easily display their artwork. If this is not an option for you, and you can only make your artwork in your home and that is fine. The essential thing is that you somehow expose your work in an accessible place where they can stop by and analyze it. Many artists create a website so they can easily show the world their work. This is a great idea if you cannot travel easily or do not have the time or inclination to attend art shows or put your work in local events/places.
5) Develop a product to put your artwork on.
Mugs, t-shirts, saucers, cards, stationery are all examples of products that you could place your artwork on. People may scoff at the idea of such a “demeaning” idea - thinking it takes away from the fine art ideal of just selling the original pieces. However, people are people. And a lot of people may not have a place on their walls for your work. But, if they like your images, they will be happy to buy a mug or t-shirt from you; the price is cheaper for them, and you gain FREE advertising of your artwork. People like to talk about what they buy. This will greatly assist your art business by hopefully generating more customers.
10 of the most common pitfalls for artists
Artists often fail in their art endeavors for a number of reasons. By simply addressing 10 of the most common pitfalls artists make, people can successfully avoid them.
1) They get discouraged.
When an artist gets discouraged, the first inclination is often to give up. When this happens, a person stops creating artwork. And if an artist isn’t producing artwork, then he/she will not be able to build up a body of artwork. And then, of course, there is not much to sell. And the person’s art career stops.
When frustrated or discouraged, the best thing an artist can do is just press on. Realizing that other artists experience similar sentiments helps to alleviate the pressure. Also, by allowing oneself the freedom to be inspired to create another piece of artwork will lift one’s creative spirits. And a person will be able to climb out of the pit of discouragement.
2) They only copy other people’s artwork.
It is a great thing to expose oneself to art by looking at other people’s artwork. And one gains valuable art skills by faithfully copying other people’s artwork. However, if one continues year after year only copying other people’s work, then the artist becomes simply a good craftsman/craftswoman. A person MUST at some point make artwork inspired from within.
3) They do not take the time to focus on the business side of things.
If a person wants to make artwork for a hobby, then studying up on how to run a business is not necessary. But, if one is seriously interested in making artwork, then he/she needs to know how a business operates. There are plenty of good books that help people starting out a new business. By becoming knowledgeable, a person puts himself/herself into the position of power. When the finances regarding one’s artwork are in order, it is easier to progress in one’s artistic career.
4) They try to do everything on their own.
Trying to do everything on one’s own without a support network is a recipe for disaster. One needs support emotionally, spiritually, physically and (sometimes) financially. When artists take the time to build up a support network of friends, family and with other businesses, life becomes sweeter and they are able to ride the inevitable ups and downs that happen in an art career.
5) They ignore feedback they receive.
Sometimes people’s remarks are harsh and sometimes they are kind. In either case, both sets of remarks can be valuable insights into what is working with one’s artwork and what is not. By listening with open ears, an artist has an opportunity to gain a sense of what kind of reaction his/her artwork is creating. And by responding (with discretion) to the reactions of the work, it may help develop the style and subject matter - and in the end increase sales of the work.
6) They ignore their health.
It is very easy, as an artist, to ignore one’s health. Why? Because artwork is often an engrossing task which also often includes harmful chemicals. This, combined with the physical stamina required to create a piece of artwork, is often hard on the body.
Eating healthy foods, drinking water (not just cups of coffee or cans of soda) and making sure one rests from hard days of labor ensure that one can continue making artwork. When a person gets sick or says he/she is tired of artwork, it may just be that the person has been ignoring his/her body. And as a result, the artwork suffers and may not be able to be continued in the future.
7) They pick the wrong friends.
People may not be able to pick their family members, but they can pick their friends. And friends influence their health, recreation, work, lifestyle and ART.
Choosing good, solid caring friends is important to creating good artwork because people are highly affected by their relationships with people. Knowing good friends are around when bad days come is a huge support psychologically, and this can strongly influence one’s artwork.
8) They do not take the time to get inspired.
When a person sits down to create something, there must be some idea of where to go. If there is no idea of where to go, a person’s art crumbles.
Taking the time to get inspired ensures one’s creative juices will flow. For some people, this may just mean going for walk. For other people, it may mean listening to music. Whatever means a person uses to get inspired, it is important they take the time to do it.
9) They only dream.
Dreaming is often where artwork has its beginning. But if the idea is never given a chance to be birthed into the world, a creative idea will die. By being faithful to get one’s ideas out - even it is just be on sketchbook paper - a person has the chance of going somewhere as an artist.
The best policy: kill all feelings of procrastination before they kill your creativity.
10) They do not produce artwork.
Artists often fail because they are just not producing artwork. They spend their time watching TV, listening to the radio, reading a book, hanging out with friends, drinking or partying and as a result, their artistic output slows down or stops.
Artists MUST be disciplined. By creating structure in their lives and thus allowing time to work on their craft, they have the chance of creating artwork that gets better and better as the years go by.
pulsed spray transfer Welding
Transfer of consumable electrode that occurs when droplets form at end of electrode with high current, and then cease forming at low current. Also referred to as intermittent spray transfer.
burn off rate Welding
The consumption rate of a consumable electrode as expressed in material length and time unit.
welding sequence Welding
The work order and process used to complete joints, welds, and related runs.
pony wall Animation
wall that is framed between the foundation and the first floor at the structure’s perimeter
raised-heel truss / raised heel truss Animation
a truss that at the structure's edge is raised to allow for ceiling insulation
color harmony Color
Unlike the “Rembrandt effect” that some painters seek to create for harmony’s sake that had once been developed from time, dirt, and varnish on old master works – a preferred if not true color harmony in an art piece is one that reflects how that singular source of sunshine can wash over an outdoor scene of whatever colors – and yet allow for a united tone of reflected light and values. Achieving color harmony can give that assuring sense that all parts of a painting are from the same day – and moment.
center of interest Art Materials and General Art Terms
The all-important part of a painting to which all other elements are supportive in that they do not generate distraction. Competing portions of a painting can diminish the power, intensity, or preferred focus on the center of interest.
foreshorten / foreshortening Drawing
Describes the means to create third dimension effect in a drawing by the shortening of lines in the drawing.
colorless blender Drawing
a drawing pencil with fillers and wax sans pigment whose purpose is to permit burnishing without introducing additional color.
Ingredients for varnish and varnish mediums Art Materials and General Art Terms
Finished oil paintings benefit from a protective layer to keep dirt, dust, and other material from damaging the work. These varnish and varnish mediums can be bought commercially or made by the artist. Common components of these protective layers are as follows:
Beeswax oil medium - 10 parts raw linseed oil, 2 parts beeswax, 1/16 part litharge.
Beeswax medium - 1 part beeswax, 3 parts turpentine.
Damar varnish - 1 part crushed damar resin, 4 parts turpentine.
Damar varnish medium - 9 parts damar varnish, 9 parts turpentine, 4 parts stand oil, 2 parts Venice turpentine.
Shellac varnish - 1 part shellac (clear or colored), 7 parts alcohol.
Stand oil medium - 1 part stand oil, 3 parts Venice turpentine.
Varnish medium - 1 part copal varnish, 1 part linseed oil, 1 part turpentine.
equivalent cooking measures Measures
3 teaspoons = 1 tablespoon \\
4 tablespoons = 1/4cup \\
5 1/2 tablespoons = 1/3 cup \\
16 tablespoons = 1 cup \\
2 cups = 1 pint \\
4 cups = 1 quart \\
4 quarts = 1 gallon \\
These are measurement conversions.
Square Measures Measures
- 1 square inch = 6.452 square =~ s/r//g
- centimeters144 square inches = 1 square foot = 929.03 square centimeters =~ s/r//g
- 9 square feet = 1 square yard = .8361 square meter
- 30 1/4 square yards = 1 square rod = 25.292 square meters
- 160 square rods or 4,840 square yards or 43,560 square feet = 1 acre = .4047 hectare
- 640 acres = 1 square mile = 259 hectares or 2.590 square kilometers
Accelerated perspective Art Perspective
An intentional exaggeration of perspective often in a stage setting to permit a shallower than appears actual stage depth.
Curvilinear perspective Art Perspective
A perspective view in which straight lines appear to be curved. Close-up and wide angle views commonly relate to the perspective.
Vantage point Art Perspective
A vantage point is used in linear perspective as a stationary point from which a viewer is related to the object/figure being rendered. It can be thought of as the point of reference from which all things in the artwork can be related to. The vantage point may be very high or very low. High = bird's-eye-view. Low = worm's eye view. It is important to determine the correct station point when starting a piece of work, because the vantage point has a key role in determining how the viewer understands one’s composition and relates to the subject matter. It may also be referred to as "station point".
All-over composition Art Perspective
A style of painting in which the entire surface of the piece is worked on in a more or less uniform way, and the normal way of treating composition (with the picture having a center, top or bottom) is not considered. The term was originally used in response to Jackson Pollock's drip paintings. Later the term was used to refer to other pieces that refrain from the usual compositional approaches. In this way, the Impressionists "liberated" artists from a decided center of interest - and not necessarily to one of no composition - but rather to multiple or all-over points in the picture plane.
Format Art Perspective
Format relates to the size and shape of a painting. If it is a rectangle, the orientation can be longer in the vertical dimension (portrait) - or longer in the horizontal (landscape). Format decisions by the artist on both size and shape of the art surface will impact the composition strategy and the effects.
Mordant gilding Art Materials and General Art Terms
Mordant gilding is the process used to lay leaf in an oil painting. Unlike water gilding where water is used, mordant gilding is laid with an oil or varnish sizing. Used only for a matte finish - because it cannot be burnished like water gilded leaf.
Zones of recession Art Perspective
The area of a picture's surface are apportioned to a foreground, a middle distance, and a background when constructing spatial depth. Variations and hazing of these respective zones influence degree of reduction and severity of contrast in the linear perspective.
Worm's-eye view Art Perspective
A drawing or painting scene that is seen as though the observer is looking up from a position below it. Properly used it relies on the oblique perspective. All vertical lines will converge upward and be parallel to the picture plane.
Wetting down Sculpture
Process of flowing water onto a stone prior to carving and polishing in order to assess patterns, vein location, and graining.
Wet-into-wet Art Materials and General Art Terms
The process of applying fresh paint on a surface that is still wet with other paint. Also, called "wet on wet". The term applies both to like-and-like paint and mixed techniques (i.e. tempura into wet oil).
Varnishing day Art Materials and General Art Terms
An invite-only private viewing of an art exhibition held by an individual or group, or an institution such as a museum. The time is generally the day or evening before the public opening. Now usually thought of as "opening day", the term comes from the time when artists would varnish and touch-up paintings once they were hung for the exhibit - prior to the public coming for the display.
Value Art Perspective
Artists' term for scaling of a composition's lightness with degrees of gray between endpoints of black and white. Colors can also be assessed in the same way for value. Darker relates to "lower" in values. In science, value is "lightness".
Angular perspective Art Perspective
Angular perspective is a type of linear perspective. All categories of linear perspective include a horizon line and a stationary point (the position of the observer). In two-point perspective, there exist two points from which an object’s lines radiate from; the sides of the object vanish to one of two vanishing points on the horizon line. An object’s vertical lines do not relate to the perspective rules of the horizontal lines. By changing the vanishing points of the object, one can make increase or decrease the size of the object. Angular perspective is the same as two-point perspective.
Oblique perspective Art Perspective
Oblique perspective is a type of linear perspective. All categories of linear perspective include a horizon line and a stationary point (the position of the observer). In oblique perspective there are also two vanishing points somewhere on the horizon; however, unlike two-point perspective, there also exists a vanishing point above or below the horizon line that the vertical lines disappear to. Oblique perspective is the same as three-point perspective.
Parallel perspective Art Perspective
Parallel perspective is a type of linear perspective. All categories of linear perspective include a horizon line and a stationary point (the position of the observer). In one-point perspective, only one vanishing point exists; lines radiate outwardly from this point, and perpendicular lines meet at this point. Parallel perspective is the same as one-point perspective.
Sotto in su Art Perspective
In Italian this means "from below upwards." Used in reference to a ceiling painting wherein the people, figures, and scenes are depicted foreshortened so that they appear to be suspended in space - and not contained within the flat structure of the picture plane.
Parallel lines (...in math) Math
Lines that never meet, and always remain the same distance apart.
Order of Operations Math
In math, the rule set that identifies the order in which computations - such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division - must be performed.
Prime number Math
A whole number that is greater than 1 - and has only itself and 1 as factors.
Range (...of numbers) Math
The difference between the largest and least value in a data set.
Reciprocal Math
For any non-zero number x, the reciprocal is 1/x. This reciprocal 1/x is also called the multiplicative inverse of that number - but calling it the reciprocal is easier & more common.
Similar (...in math terms) Math
Figures that have the same shape, but are not the same in size.
Slope (...in math terms) Math
The measure of a line's steepness as expressed in the form -- > slope=rise/run.
Solution (...in math terms) Math
The value of a variable that will make an open statement true.
Data Math
Information expressed in numbers OR factual information that is organized for analysis.
Probability Math
The likelihood or chance of an event occuring. Can be expressed generally (i.e. high or low) - or as a percentage anywhere from 0 to 100%.
Symetry Math
The exact agreement of parts on opposite sides of line. In contrast to asymetry where there is difference between two sides of a line - commonly to a higher degree (when asymetry is used to describe a lopsidedness or imbalance).
abstract art Art Styles/Movements
A type of artwork in which parts of forms and shapes are emphasized in interpreting the subject depicted. Abstract art may not necessarily be recognized as something. The term is subjective in its use because all artwork fits somewhere along the spectrum from full representational art to total abstraction; in other words, there are degrees of abstraction in art. In 1910, the artist Vassily Kandinsky is traditionally given the credit for creating the first totally abstract artwork.
acroterion Furniture
An acroterion is an ornamental finial positioned on a pediment's angles in classical architecture or placed on a stele. The term may also refer to a pediment's angle.
acrylic resin paint Painting
Acrylic resin paint is a type of synthetic art medium thinned with turpentine and linseed oil. It is oil-compatible.
advancing color, retreating color Painting
In art, the appearance of warm colors coming forward in the picture plan and the cooler colors staying back is called advancing and retreating color. This idea of warm and cool colors relates to aerial perspective and is used in painting landscapes; the artist may try to give the illusion of depth in the picture plan by employing atmospheric perspective and geometric methods. However, the concept's use is used judiciously by artists because the theory does not always work effectively in every painting. For example, an artist could easily create a warm, rich sunset in the distance while having cool water in the forefront and succeed in having great depth in a painting.
aegean art Art Styles/Movements
The term Aegean art refers to a broad class of art from ancient cultures (ca. 2800 B.C to ca. 1400 B.C.) located on the coasts and islands of the eastern Mediterranean Sea. Cultures of prominence in Aegean art include Cycladic, Mycenaean (on coast of mainland Greece), and Minoan (on island of Crete).
aesthetic movement Art Styles/Movements
An English movement from the later part of the 1800s that promoted the philosophy of art for art's sake. The movement sproated as a reaction against the train of thought that art needs to have a purpose for its creation. In essence, the movement was a form of art appreciation. James Whistler, Oscar Wilde and Walter Pater were key advocates of the movment.
aesthetics Art Materials and General Art Terms
The term "aesthetics" comes from the Greek word signifying to perceive; it is the philosophy of art. Criticism of art endeavors to create nonsubjective criteria and rules to explain people's perceptions of style and beauty.
afrocentrism Art Styles/Movements
Afrocentrism is an ideology; it is a worldview primarily centered in the United States that is a reaction to global predjudiced mindsets about African people and their historical influences in the world.
The ideology can be viewed as an affirmation of Africans of themselves in a Eurocentric-dominated social world by celebrating their cultural heritage as clearly African. The ideology frequently stresses historical African civilizations as progressing in cultural and technological developements will underpining the contributions of Europeans.
Aaron's Rod Architecture
Aaron's Rod is a type of decorative rounded molding that is interwoven with a motif of tendrils, leaves, a snake and vines.
ABC art Art Styles/Movements
Also known as primary structure and minimal art, ABC art stems from a movement in the 1960's in which 3D structures of basic forms and flat colors are made, indicating the planes, lines and forms of geometry. The artistic flair and interpretation usually linked with creativity are put aside to such a degree that the artist is often able to have an artwork created by a method of craftmanship. Tinsmithing and cabinetmaking are examples of this type of art. In essence, the artist is viewed as the originator, overseer and designer of the piece. The primarily impetus of this movement has been the increase of standard design classes in art schools in which simple geometric shapes are analyzed indepthly in regards to their use in industrial design as well as for their own sake. Los Angeles and New York have been the main hub of activity for this movement.
minimal art Art Styles/Movements
Also known as primary structure and ABC art, minimal art stems from a movement in the 1960's in which 3D structures of basic forms and flat colors are made, indicating the planes, lines and forms of geometry. The artistic flair and interpretation usually linked with creativity are put aside to such a degree that the artist is often able to have an artwork created by a method of craftmanship. Tinsmithing and cabinetmaking are examples of this type of art. In essence, the artist is viewed as the originator, overseer and designer of the piece. The primarily impetus of this movement has been the increase of standard design classes in art schools in which simple geometric shapes are analyzed indepthly in regards to their use in industrial design as well as for their own sake. Los Angeles and New York have been the main hub of activity for this movement.
primary structure Art Styles/Movements
Also known as minimal art or ABC art, primary structure art stems from a movement in the 1960's in which 3D structures of basic forms and flat colors are made, indicating the planes, lines and forms of geometry. The artistic flair and interpretation usually linked with creativity are put aside to such a degree that the artist is often able to have an artwork created by a method of craftmanship. Tinsmithing and cabinetmaking are examples of this type of art. In essence, the artist is viewed as the originator, overseer and designer of the piece. The primarily impetus of this movement has been the increase of standard design classes in art schools in which simple geometric shapes are analyzed indepthly in regards to their use in industrial design as well as for their own sake. Los Angeles and New York have been the main hub of activity for this movement.
absolute alcohol Art Materials and General Art Terms
Absolute alcohol (also known as anhydrous alcohol) is ethyl alcohol taken through a process to eliminate any trace of water. 6% of regular grain alcohol is water. Absolute alcohol can be combined with turpentine, mineral spirits or several other types of solvents.
anhydrous alcohol Art Materials and General Art Terms
Anhydrous alcohol (also known as absolute alcohol) is ethyl alcohol taken through a process to eliminate any trace of water. 6% of regular grain alcohol is water. Anhydrous alcohol can be combined with turpentine, mineral spirits or several other solvents.
academician Art Materials and General Art Terms
An academician is a person who is an elected representative of an academy who follows academic principles and styles.
academicism Art Materials and General Art Terms
Academicism is an adherence to academic methods and ideas. The word can be used to refer to a feature of academic influence in artwork that does not follow traditional methods.
Academie des Beaux-Arts, Academie des Beaux Arts Art Materials and General Art Terms
Academie des Beaux-Arts (also known as "the Academy") is the fine arts academy of the Institute of France. The academy is responsible for sponsoring the Ecole Des Beaux-Arts and hosting in Paris the annual official salon.
academy blue Art Materials and General Art Terms
Academy blue is a color pigment that leans towards the green spectrum of the color wheel. It is composed of blue pigment in which the best grades are created into viridian and ultramarine blue.
academy board Art Materials and General Art Terms
An academy board is a low-cost panel employed for the use of drawings, sketches and smaller oil paintings. The board is created out of smooth, heavy cardboard that is covered with a ground that provides the necessary surface texture needed for oil paint.
Today canvas board and other kinds of specialty boards are frequently used instead of academy board.
academy figure Drawing
An academy figure is a painting or a drawing completed with the intent of teaching and learning purposes. The drawing or painting is not meant as a final piece of artwork (though they may be used as such by some persons because of their aesthetic appeal).
The term may also be used as a negative comment in reference to artwork of the human form that exudes a sense of lifelessness and/or stiffness.
acaroid resin Art Materials and General Art Terms
Acaroid resin (also known as accroides) is a heavily colored resin that materializes in both yellow and red forms originating from Australian grass trees. The resin (gum accroides) contains film-forming characteristics used for years in the processing of orange, red and yellow varnishes. Acaroid resin continues to be utilized for some industrial uses even though bright dyestuffs have been created to fulfill that particular need in the marketplace.
Xanthorrhoea, black-boy gum and Botany Bay gum are terms used for resin in the past.
accroides Art Materials and General Art Terms
Accroides (also known as acaroid resin) is a heavily colored resin that materializes in both yellow and red forms originating from Australian grass trees. The resin (gum accroides) contains film-forming characteristics used for years in the processing of orange, red and yellow varnishes. Accroides continues to be utilized for some industrial uses even though bright dyestuffs have been created to fulfill that particular need in the marketplace.
Xanthorrhoea, black-boy gum and Botany Bay gum are terms used for resin in the past.
acetone Art Materials and General Art Terms
Acetone (also called dimethyl ketone) is a strong, volatile solvent that has the properties necessary to remove paint and lacquer. When used correctly, it is among the less toxic solvents to use in projects. The vapors of acetone are highly flammable and may catch fire despite temperatures below freezing point.
accelerated test Photography
An accelerated test is a test of materials, such as pigments and paints, by artists. The test is performed in a lab with certain equipment in order to simulate situations that will result in cracking, fading and other breakdowns that paintings are vulnerable to over a period of time. Although accelerated tests do not exactly replicate normal effects aging because of their severity and concentrated forces, the tests are able to point out the resistance/lack of resistance that ingredients and materials may manifest when put under severe forces.
acetylene Art Materials and General Art Terms
Acetylene is a gaseous hydrocarbon without color. It generates almost 15 times more light than normal illuminating gas. Acetylene easily polymerizes, containing a triple bond. Uses for acetylene include oxyacetylene welding in which a blowpipe/torch mixes oxygen and acetylene.
acetylene black Art Materials and General Art Terms
Acetylene black is one of the many kinds of carbon black. It is close to benzol black.
acid bath Art Materials and General Art Terms
An acid bath is the tray/container of mordant in which the subject to be etched is contained. The tray in which the mordant is placed must be made up of an acid-resistant material (such as glass) to etch metal plates for printing.
Walling wax may be employed to create a hedge along the edges of a plate, eliminating the need to use an acid bath.
acid number, acid value Painting
An acid number is a lab measurement taken in order to find the degree of free fatty acid in a vegetable drying oil. This amount is valuable to know because it assists in the selection of an oil for whatever purpose it is being used for. The milligrams of potassium hydroxide needed to neutralize the free fatty acids contained in a gram of oil is represented by the acid number.
An acid number between 5-10 indicates that an oil is best employed for grinding paints. And an acid number between 1-3 indicate that an oil is best employed in varnishes and other kinds of clear coatings. Often low-numbered oils are used for paint oil colors due to the nonyellowing characteristics and better color stability. These factors are more important than ease of grinding considerations.
acid resist Art Materials and General Art Terms
Acid resist refers to the resistance employed to stop the destructive action of a mordant over a surface.
acrolith Sculpture
An acrolith is a draped statue (often a Greek one) that features arms, legs and a head made out of marble and upheld by a trunk of material such as wood.
acrylic canvas Painting
An acrylic canvas is a type of canvas made with polymer primer employed for use with polymer colors. These colors are superior to oil paints in flexibility. Moreover, due to breaking the fat-over-lean rule, painting with oil paint on acrylic canvas may not be recommended by some. Due to atmospheric changes, polymer primer is ideal for painting on acrylic canvas, because it does not expand/contract to the same degree as oil paint and adheres better to an acrylic surface.
Quotes by Van Gogh
1) If you hear a voice within you say 'you cannot paint,' then by all means paint, and that voice will be silenced.
2) Love many things, for therein lies the true strength, and whosoever loves much performs much, and can accomplish much, and what is done in love is done well.
3) As we advance in life it becomes more and more difficult, but in fighting the difficulties the inmost strength of the heart is developed.
4) I often think that the night is more alive and more richly colored than the day.
5) For my part I know nothing with any certainty, but the sight of the stars makes me dream.
6) I am still far from being what I want to be, but with God's help I shall succeed.
7) I put my heart and my soul into my work, and have lost my mind in the process.
8) I dream of painting and then I paint my dream.
9) When I have a terrible need of - shall I say the word - religion. Then I go out and paint the stars.
10) When I have a terrible need of - shall I say the word - religion. Then I go out and paint the stars.
11) In spite of everything I shall rise again: I will take up my pencil, which I have forsaken in my great discouragement, and I will go on with my drawing.
12) Do not quench your inspiration and your imagination; do not become the slave of your model.
12) Do not quench your inspiration and your imagination; do not become the slave of your model.
acrylic resin Painting
Acrylic resin is created synthetically from the polymerization of acrylic acid esters. There are several types of acrylic resin, the most prominent being polymethyl methacrylate. Other kinds such as methyl methacrylate are employed in the processing of picture varnish, lacquers and acrylic colors and several other products. Another kind of resin, called polymethyl methacrylate, in solid form is a durable, glasslike plastic that does not yellow over time and is often employed in constructions and present-day sculptures.
acrylic varnish, picture varnish Painting
A varnish employed as the last surface coating on an dried oil painting. The varnish serves as a preservation and protection mechanism and gives the painting a glossy look. Two important varnishes for painters include damar varnish and clear acrylic (methacrylate) varnish. Damar varnish gives the painting a bright gloss finish. And clear acrylic varnish gives paintings a satiny or mat gloss. Over time paintings need to be cleaned because of dirt/dust/grime from the environment. Ideally a picture varnish is easily soluble in a mild solvent (such as mineral spirits) so dirty varnish can be taken off using careful conservation methods. Damar varnished has replaced mastic varnish (used in the 19th century) because of its resistance to bloom, yellowing over time and features a duller gloss. Damar varnish may be used in thin coats.
actinic light, ultraviolet light Painting
Ultraviolet light (actinic light) is light that falls past the visible spectrum at the violet section and features wavelengths shorter than the wavelengths of visible light. Light that encompasses ultraviolet radiation is said to be actinic, because it results in photochemical processes such as paint embrittlement, pigment and dye fading, and the creation of images on paper/photo film. Accelerated tests in labs use strong ultraviolet light for their procedures. Unfortunately, the ultravolet light part of direct sunglight has harmful influences on organic paint ingredients. When manufactuers sell paints, they rate the stability of the materials based upon the presumption that the painting will be displayed in a place where the daylight hitting it is diffused.
a deux crayons Drawing
A deux crayons is a two-colored drawing created with chalk. The colors used are usually black and red.
adjustable curve ruler Architecture
An adjustable curve ruler is a type of ruler that may be bent and set in any curve position. There are different types of adjustable curve rulers available. It is used in general drafting and may be used as a replacement for the French curve or along with it depending on the person's needs.
adjustable triangle Architecture
A draftperson's triangle featuring an adjustable arm capable of being clamped at different angles. It was created to eliminate a draftperson's need of various triangular shapes. A protractor placed between the adjustable arm and the place where it is hinged assesses the angle of the clamped triangle.
adsorption Art Materials and General Art Terms
Adsorption is a molecular cohesion. Adhering to another element as if it were glued on, a thin layer of one element remains solidly attached to another element. Liquids, solids and gases can all be adsorbed by surfaces that are solid. When an element is changed physically or chemically into the colloidal state and when the surface is free of debris, the absorption can be increased.
aerugo Welding
Aerugo (also known as verdigris) is simply the rust that forms on metals over time - such as the common patina that forms on bronze or copper.
aestheticism Art Styles/Movements
Aestheticism is an art philosophy that tout's, "Art for art's sake" (Victor Cousin). Those who adhere to this philosophy hold that the making of art for its own sake has enough merit on its own to merit the act of creating it. This is in opposition to the view that art must have an alternative purpose such as for social or moral values. William Morris (1834 - 1896), the founder of the Arts and Crafts Movement, was a major propagator of this philosophy, as was James Whistler (1834-1903).
afterimage Art Materials and General Art Terms
An afterimage is the word used for an optical illusion in which the eye sees an image even after the original image is taken away. Frequently the secondary image will be seen in the complementary color of the original image's color.
after-yellowing, yellowing Art Materials and General Art Terms
Yellowing is the gradual discoloration of a piece of artwork. The process can result from a number of causes including the use of oils/varnishes susceptible to yellowing, a build-up of dirt on the piece that becomes attached to the varnish and/or by the surplus of linseed oil used on the piece. Fortunately, the majority of oil paintings can be issued a new coat of varnish after the old varnish is taken away, thus bringing back the original's colors.
agaima Sculpture
Agaima was a Greek word used to refer to any sculpture work. Eventually the term was used to refer to a god statue and less frequently a painted portrait.
agaimatolite Sculpture
Agaimatolite (also referred to as pagodite) is a yellow/green/gray stone employed by the Chinese for carving images and pagodas.
agate Art Materials and General Art Terms
Agate is a semiprecious hard stone of a diversified or striped design. The burnishes in gilding are created by the use of shiny gray agate.
airbrush Art Materials and General Art Terms
An airbrush is a tool to which a container with fluid paint is fastened. A skinny hose turns into a chamber of carbonic/compressed gas. The tool applies color and tones in seemless gradations. In essence, an airbrush is a version of a spray gun. Commercial artists generally use airbrush technique far more than fine painters for their art.
irregular curve, drawing curve, aircraft curve, French curve Art Materials and General Art Terms
Known as a French curve, drawing curve, irregular curve or aircraft curve, this skinny, clear, hard material (often plastic), is shaped in a scroll or curved form in order to lead its user past a number of points not found along the curve of a circle. It comes in several forms and sizes and is often named in connection to the particular work it is created for - such as the ship curve employed in ship designs. Draftpersons and artists frequently use French curves in their work.
air eraser Art Materials and General Art Terms
Similar in operation to an airbrush, an air eraser is a tool with the appearance of a large fountain pen that shoots small particles at an area of an artwork to remove mistakes. A compartment containing an abrasive that erases paint or ink is attached to the instrument, as well as a small hose. It appeals to artists because it allows for a delicate approach to erasing mistakes.
a jour, ajoure Art Materials and General Art Terms
A French term referring to openwork patterns/designs used in embroidery, carpentry, lacework and metal artworks.
Alabama Cream Sculpture
Alabama Cream is a kind of American marble excellent for sculpture. Cream Blanc and Madre Cream are other fine-grained, hard, milky kinds available.
alabastron Sculpture
Alabastron is a type of ancient Greek pottery. It features a little oil flask with a curved bottom in the form of a tear drop. Greek athletes used it many years ago to hold and carry the oil they wanted to smear on their bodies.
a la Grecque Art Styles/Movements
A la Grecque is a word signifying that something is in a Greek design. The term has been frequently used to refer to art created under the influence of ancient Greek art.
Albany slip Sculpture
Albany slip is a slip clay that is produced not far from Albany, New York. The clay was used to create stoneware by early American potters; it gave their pieces a blackish-brown gaze.
Alberene stone Art Materials and General Art Terms
Alberene stone is a trade name for a soapstone that comes from the state of Virginia. Its colors can vary from dark black to medium gray.
alcohol colors Painting
Alcohol colors are bright liquid colors produced from alcohol-soluble aniline dyes in a substance that is water-miscible. The colors are ideal for use with an airbrush and for artwork intended to be copied. Alcohol colors can be applied to a variety of surfaces that are resistant to water paints.
alembic Art Materials and General Art Terms
Alembic is a word used in the past to refer to a still. Physicians during the 3rd century in Alexandria are generally given the honor of having invented distillation. The word originates from the Arabic word alanbig (a still) which is itself derived from the Greek word ambix (a spouted cup).
Alexandria blue, Alexandrian blue Art Materials and General Art Terms
Alternative words for Egyptian blue.
Hellenistic period Art Styles/Movements
The Hellenistic period was the last stage of Hellenic art (Alexandrian art) and is generally thought to have started with the end of Alexander the Great's reign. Because of Alexander's triumphs, the Hellenic art created during this time (323 - 100BC) was made vastly beyond the edges of Greece. And as a result, it contained cosmopolitan influences. The ideas of perfect beauty and the harmony attached to it was replaced with an individuality and an energy often resulting in the melodramatic. Artworks of people who were old and in pain, as well as young people full of life and vitality, were created. Also, what newly emerged was that the varying and deep emotions experienced in people's mental states were captured visually. The dignified poses usually applied to the gods were now applied to portraying influential rulers. Figure compositions began to include landscapes, architectural designs and draperies. Huge sculptures were created, as well as small statuettes of the ordinary that were both relatable and more closely resembled real life than the bigger pieces.
Hellenic art Art Styles/Movements
Hellenic art refers to artwork made in places influenced by Greece and in Greece itself from around 1100 BC - 100 BC. Six stylistic stages make up Hellenic art including: 1) the Protogeometric period from 1100 - 900 BC, 2) the Geometric period 900 - 700 BC, 3) the Orientalizing period from 700 - 600 BC, 4) the Archaic period from 600 - 500 BC, 5) the Classical period from 500 - 323 BC and 6) the Hellenistic period from 323 - 100 BC. Rome gradually took in Hellenic art and made its own version of it during the 2nd and 1st centuries BC due to Roman political influence.
alizarin brown Painting
Alizarin brown is a brown pigment color that contains a reddish, clear hue. It is created as a version of alizarin crimson, containing a more dull appearance. It can result from a failed attempt at making alizarin crimson.
alizarin carmine Painting
Alizarin carmine was a term used in the past for alizarin crimson. It is now no longer in use.
alizarin crimson Painting
Alizarin crimson is a brilliant, clear, red lake pigment that features a bluish undertone with a maroon mass value. The pigment is produced from dihydroxy anthraquinone, a coal-tar substance. Alizarin crimson is suitable for permanent painting uses as long as the standard conditions for preserving a piece of artwork are followed. This is despite the face that it does not completely fit in the category of absolute permanence of furnace-made mineral pigments. The pigment shows as a ruby-red when used transparently; and when combined with white pigment, beautiful and brilliant pinks can be created. Moreover, the pigment can be combined safely with other pigments that are listed as safe for its mixture use. The paint will retain its pigmentation when combined with iron-bearing colors so artists do not need to be concerned the pigment will become brown. C. Liebermann and C. Graebe, both German chemists, are credited with discovering it; the pigment is ranked as the first of natural dyestuffs to be synthesized. In time, their version of alizarin was used more in textile dyeing and the producing of the alizarin pigment than the the natural version of it. Also, gradually alizarin crimson was used instead of madder lake, having a stronger tinting capability, and because it does not contain purpurin (an impermanent substance). Artists may combine sepia with alizarin crimson to create Roman sepia. The term alizarin crimson was once known as alizarin carmine.
alizarin violet Painting
Alizarin violet is a clear violet pigment created from purpurin, a synthetic. It shares characteristics of alizarin crimson in regards to its pigment properties. However, alizarin violet is not suitable for artist's work that is permanent, because it darkens when exposed to light over an extended period of time.
alizarin yellow Painting
Alizarin yellow is a clear, yellow pigment that is brownish in color and dull. It features the exact same pigment properties as alizarin crimson but is not suitable for permanent work.
alkaline gaze Ceramic Art
A type of ceramic glaze whose flux is not lead, but an alkali (like soda ash or borax). Low temperatures are used to fire alkaline glazes and amazing effects can be created. Persian and Egyptian blues are examples of such effects. Unfortunately, there are parameters that need to be aware of when using them because alkalis are prone to caking when suspended in a glaze due to their solubility.
alkanet Painting
Alkanet is a red natural dyestuff that is taken out of two plants - one from Asia (Lawsonia alba) and one from Europe (Alkanna tinctoria). Unfortunately, it has stopped being used for creating lake pigments or dyeing textiles because alkanet loses its color quickly.
alkyd resins Painting
A number of synthetic resins that contain film-forming characteristics employed for use in varnishes, industrial house paints and enamels. Some artist materials use alkyds. Currently oil-modified alkyd is in use in artist materials. The kinds created with tobacco-seed, soya bean and safflower oils have stronger pigment retention than those created with linseed oil.
all-purpose ground, all purpose ground, multipurpose ground Painting
All-purpose ground (multipurpose ground) is a prepared panel/canvas created for use with several types of media, including watercolor, polymer and oil. Every painting medium contains its own particular preference for its best use; therefore multipurpose panels and canvases cannot compare to the superiority of a panel/canvas prepared for a particular purpose. However, traditional gesso panel can be modified for use with every artist's type of paint.
altarpiece Painting
An altarpiece may refer to a number of carved or painted panels, a structure featuring a carving or painting, a single painting, or an ornate screen that is positioned behind, on top of, or on an altar. A traditional Renaissance altarpiece features a number of religious paintings on panels that are hinged together (such as a triptych), and contain frames that may be decorated with jewels, gilded or carved. The Spanish word "retablo," the French word "retable," the English word "reredos," and the Italian word "ancona" are all words used as synonyms for the word "altarpiece."
alto rilievo Sculpture
An Italian word for a sculptural relief; shapes stick out from the backdrop of the relief sometimes more than half of the depth's form.
alumina hydrate Painting
Alumina hydrate is aluminum hydroxide; it is made into a light, white powder and is employed as a inactive pigment. It is favored as a base for lake pigments, losing its color almost totally when mixed with oil. Alumina hydrate gives a wonderful brush-quality to oil paints and helps to keep pigment distribution consistent .
aluminum leaf Art Materials and General Art Terms
Aluminum leaf is a type of leaf employed by artists/craftpersons to create a silvery effect in gilding. Palladium and silver leaf are preferred leafs over aluminum leaf, because the later gives off a mated, dull look. Art pieces are not recommended to contain aluminum leaf, because its already rough, dull apperance increases over time.
aluminum paint Painting
Aluminum paint is a type of lacquer or industrial paint that contains aluminum powder employed for use as a decorative effect; it gives off a silvery, mated appearance. Though resistant to tarnishing, aluminum paint does not exude the same luster that silver leaf lends to a surface. It is useful in industrial and commerical products/projects, but is not appropriate for gilding because of its texture and leaden characteristics.
aluminum powder Art Materials and General Art Terms
A type of metallic pigment combined with bronzing liquid to create silver paint. Because of the texture and leaden characteristics of aluminum paint, it is not appropriate for gilding. However, it has many uses for industrial and commericial products/projects.
aluminum stearate Painting
Aluminum stearate is employed by makers of oil paints to be used as a stabilizer to stop oil and pigment division in paint tubes. It is an inactive pigment.
amaranth, purpleheart Carpentry
Amaranth (also known as purpleheart) is a type of purplish hardwood that comes from trees growing in the Guianas. It contains a tight texture and pleasing, varied grain. The term amaranth may also refer to the purple dyestuff created from the wood; however, paint pigments created from it are not stable in the sunlight.
amarna art Art Styles/Movements
Amarna art is a type of artwork from Egypt that occured from 1379 - 1361 BC during the time of Pharoah Akenaten's rule. From the city of Amarna, the style of artwork included fluid lines and a certain naturalism; traditionally it is thought that Amarna art was impacted by the pharaoh's preference towards monotheism after his lapse from polytheism.
amasette Painting
An amasette is a French word for a horn spatula; it was used in the past to scrape together the color from grinding paint. A slice or stainless steel spatula would be a similar tool used today.
amber Animation
Amber is a type of fossil resin taken from the land; the coast of the Baltic Sea in East Prussia contains many deposits of amber. It is often used in ornaments and bead-making. Because amber is such a hardy resin, it is highly desirable as a varnish resin despite the fact it is among the least soluble. Amber varnishes actually are made up of only a small amount of amber, because even when combined with various resins and oils not much amber can be placed in solutuions at hot temperatures.
American scene painting, Regionalism, Social Realism Art Styles/Movements
American scene painting is a particular style of representational, naturlistic art created in the United States from the 1920s - 1950s. In this movement artists shy away from avant garde and abstraction. Many American artists turned away from current art trends after WWI and decided to follow academic realism to portray rural and urban scenes in the USA. A lot of this style portrays a feeling of romanticism and nationalism in the daily life of Americans. Paintings of quaint towns, country landscapes and American city life were created by some artists to retreat from industrialization and by others to give a voice to their own political agendas and/or causes. William S. Schwartz, Alexandre Hogue, Edward Hopper, Charles Burchfield, Thomas Benton and John Rogers Cox are all examples of artists in the movement. And Thomas Benton studied with or taught several of the artists in the movement at the Kansas City Art Institute. Some artworks under the movement focused on depicting the quaint/small towns in the USA and are frequently called American Regionalism. Those artworks under the movement that focused on depicting social/political themes are called Social Realism. Isaac Soyer and Jack Levine are representatives of Social realists.
American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM Art Materials and General Art Terms
ASTM is an organization that tests and makes standards for industrial materials. CS 98-62 standards that were made by the National Bureau of Standards have now been taken over by ASTM standard specifications.
American vermilion Painting
American vermilion is a lake pigment created on a base of chrome red, red lead or orange mineral that contains a bright, man-made dyestuff. The paint (which may be referred to as vermilionette or imitation vermilion) is not appropriate for artist's work that intends to be permanent.
Amherst sandstone Sculpture
Amherst standstone is a light sandstone that is obtainable in various colors including gray and light, tan brown. It originates from the state of Ohio in Lorrain County.
ammonia Painting
Ammonia is an alkaline gas made up of hydrogen and nitrogen that is employed in different degrees of concentration as an emulsifier and disinfectant/cleaner. Ammonia is favored in recipes requiring an alkali for permament paintings; this is because ammonia is changeable and as a result, will not leave behind any by-products.
putto, amorino Art Materials and General Art Terms
A putto (plural putti) is a plumb, often clotheless male child; such infants are frequently included in artwork from the 1400s. Sometimes putti have wings, but they are not the same as cherubim which are angels. Putti are non-religious in nature and represent a secular passion. When a putto is used to portray a cupid, it is referred to as an amorino. On the other hand, putto gradually came to be known as a symbol of God's omniprescence in Baroque art. In the ancient classical world of art, infants with wings where thought to impact people's lives. Putti were generally not used during the Middle Ages. However, during the 1420s a man named Donatello from Florence brought putti back in a big way and is credited with reinventing putti during the time of the Renaissance. He used putti in art with Christian messages, sometimes using them as angels playing music.
amphora Sculpture
An amphora is a big, ancient Greek ceramic jar featuring two handles employed for storing things such as grain and wine. There were different kinds of amphoras made, one of which was placed in a rack instead of remaining upright on its own, and another in which featured a kneck that was offset. Some contained artwork on them. Many numbers of amphoras were used for transportation purposes of goods.
banana oil, amyl acetate, amyl alcohol Art Materials and General Art Terms
Amyl acetate is a lacquer solvent that exudes a potent scent smelling of bananas - and hence is often referred to as babana oil. A lacquer diluent called amyl alcohol, exudes a smell similar to amyl acetate but it is not as strong. Amyl acetate can cause health problems; it can for example, irritate the nose, throat and eyes.
anamorphosis Painting
An anamorphosis is a drawing/painting that cannot be recognized unless seen from a certain distance, angle or with a lens/mirror that corrects itself. During the 1700s anamorphosis was in particular celebrated as an artistic stunt. The distortion was often made by squaring the original piece and then making identical each of the squares into the same area of the distorted grid. Another method was that the original piece could be created with distortion by using a distorting tool or by perforating lines of the piece, sending light through the original piece onto a curved surface area. After this, the points of light would be connected with drawn lines. An artist might chose to use both regular perspective an anamorphosis to create unusual effects - such as drawing a normal landscape and then using an uncommon angle to hide a face or figure in the composition.
anastatic printing Art Materials and General Art Terms
Anastatic printing is a relief printing method that leaves behind the sections/marks/lines that need to be inked - in other words, everything except the printing section of the plate is etched. This process is different from etching (an intaglio printing method). Zinc etching is among the best known anastic printing methods. Asphalt varnish is used to paint the design on a zinc plate. Then the plate is held in a mordant bath of dilute nitric acid after the varnish dries. This causes the areas that are not for printing to be bitten away. The artist William Blake (1757 - 1827) created all kinds of picture illustrations and texts using anastatic printing.
ancien Drawing
Ancien is the argot or cant for a senior student (or monitor) in an atelier or art studio class. Argot refers to a secret language that a group uses so other people cannot understand their conversations.
Ancients, Shoreham Ancients, Extollagers Art Styles/Movements
The term "Ancients" is the title applied to a group of Britich Romantic artists in the early 1800s who were attracted to medieval things. They were also called the Shoreham Ancients and the Extollagers. Their work was primarily pastoral and they were greatly inspired by the writings of William Blake (1757 - 1827). Edward Calvert, George Richmond and Samuel Palmer were representatives of the group. They assembled in Blake's residence and at the residence of Samuel Palmer. The subject matter portrayed in the group included things taken from Scripture and their ideas of pastoral innocence.
androsphinx, sphinx Sculpture
A sphinx is a carved picture of a lion laying down that contains an animal or human head positioned in a fixed gaze. It was a favored theme in art from Egypt. The term "androsphinx" refers to the sphinx that features a human-head; it was the most numerous of the sphinx made in ancient Egyptian art.
angular liner, liners, stripers Painting
Liners and stripers are brushes designed to create hard edges, lines that are straight and for other uses as desired by artists. The liners differ according to the use of the person requiring the brush. Angular liners feature hairs that line up in a diagonal line, and some of these brushes are handled on their corners and edges (versus using their flat side). Examples of different liners include brick liners, dagger liners, Dresden liners and sword liners.
ankh, ansata, ansate, Egyptian cross Art Materials and General Art Terms
An ankh is a symbol representing life used frequently in art from Egypt and also in some Assyrian art. Other words for the symbol include Egyptian cross, ansata and ansate. It looks like a cross with a loop at the top. The origin of the symbol is yet a mystery to Egyptologists.
annatto, orlean, terra orellana Cooking
Annatto is a yellow dyestuff that is both oil and alcohol soluble; it is created from the annatto tree. It has been a popular substance for adding color to cheeses and butter. Annatto should not be used for items requiring permanent coloring.
anodizing Art Materials and General Art Terms
Anodizing is an electrolytic method that involves coating metal with a decorative or protective surface coating. Placing a uniform layer on aluminum of aluminum oxide through anodizing safeguards the aluminum from corrosion over time and aides in its capacity to firmly grasp coating materials and paints.
anthemion, anthemia Art Materials and General Art Terms
An anthemion is a collection of decorations made up of flower shapes and simple leaf forms. The forms were used in ancient Greece and survived until the present day as an established theme. There are about 3-4 main kinds of anthemia, and they can be employed individually or grouped together.
anthrapyrimidine yellow Art Materials and General Art Terms
A clear man-made organic pigment that contains wonderful lightfast characteristics. The color may become soluble in powerful solvents that are organic.
antic work Art Styles/Movements
Antic work is artwork that is absurd, ridiculous and ugly; it is often portrayed with plant, animal or human forms.
antimony orange, antimony vermilion Painting
Reddish/orangish paint pigments created with antimony trisulfide. They were originally discovered and patented by Murock from Scotland. In oil paint form they are bright, but in their dry state they are boring and dull to look at. They are now obsolete, being replaced by cadmium reds in the 1920s. Unfortunately, they had the nature of blackening when mixed with flake white and other lead pigments.
antimony sulfide Painting
Antimony sulfide is a pigment created by crushing gray-black stibnite or through chemical processes. The powder is employed only as a cover-up paint.
antoxidant Painting
An antoxidant is a substance that when combined with oil paint will deter or stop surface oxidation. A retardant is an antoxidant fluid.
retardant Painting
A retardant is an antoxidant fluid. It is combined with paints to prevent them from drying. When an artist desires to delay the painting's drying process, he/she will often use a retardant so work on the piece can be done over a number of days. Oil of cloves is a favored retardant; only a few drops are necessary to combine with oil paints to use as a retardant. Pine oil and oil of lavender are other useful retardants.
Antwerp blue, Haarlem blue Painting
Antwerp blue is a less intense variation of Prussian blue. It holds about 75% of non-active pigment and is not suitable as a permanent paint for artwork.
Antwerp School Art Styles/Movements
The Antwerp School is a term coined for artists during the 1500s in the city of Antwerp, which was the hub of economic activity of the Low Countries. It was also used for the artists during the 1600s when it became the powerhouse of Flemish Barque. The city of Antwerp replaced Bruges as the powerhouse of commerce of the Low Countries. Craftpersons and artists banded together to form the Guild of Saint Luke, which provided necessary skills/knowledge of the arts/crafts and ensured the products produced were well made. The Antwerp Mannerists were the 1st school of artists coming out of Antwerp. These artists were active from 1500 - 1520 in creating Gothic artwork.
During the 1600s Antwerp revived again as an artistic center. Jacob Jordaens , Anthony van Dyck and Peter Paul Rubens were influential in propping up Antwerp as a hub of Flemish Baroque. A large body of book illustrations and old master prints were made during this time. However, over time due to the economy, several artist persons moved away, and towards the late 1600s the city could no longer boast of being a main art center.
anvil Art Materials and General Art Terms
An anvil is a block on which metal is formed. Forging or hammering the metal by hand are the methods used. In the later method, the metal may be placed in a fire until it is red and bendable. Then, it is taken out and hammered on the anvil to the desired shape. The anvil itself may be created out of steel-faced iron.
fruitwood, apple wood, plum wood Carpentry
Fruitwood is a term used by businesses in regards to woods of different fruit trees, such as plum and apple. Pear and apple woods are favored as carving woods because they are stable, permanent and soft. Moreover, their textures are consistent and not rough to the touch. The colors of fruitwood can vary from yellowish red to a carmel yellow.
applied art Art Materials and General Art Terms
Applied arts is a term used for the employment of beauty and design to useful objects. Though it can be difficult to separate the two, fine arts are usually placed in the category of art that awakens the mind and/or appeals to one's academic, intellectual response. Fine art can occur in any type of art form, such as music or sculpture. It often requires years of intense study by an artist to create a piece of excellent fine art. Applied arts, on the other hand, apply imaginative ideas to objects that serve everyday needs. Types of art that are regarded as applied arts include fashion design, decorative design and industrial design. As it relates to academics, some parts of education are regarded as applied science and others as applied arts, though both may contain overlapping methods of areas of pedagogy.
. As it relates to academics, some parts of education are regarded as applied science and others as applied arts, though both may contain overlapping methods and areas of st
apricot gum Painting
Apricot gum is a transparent gum that comes from apricot trees. Fruit gums, such as apricot gum, have been mentioned in ancient formulas for use in varnishes and paint additives. Gums can be put into water for awhile if they dry; this method causes the gums to expand and transform into a gelled material. Cherry gum is the most frequently mentioned gum used in formulas for artists in the past.
aquafortist Art Materials and General Art Terms
An aquafortist is a term used for a person who etches, the same way the term painter is used for a person who paints.
aqua fortis Art Materials and General Art Terms
Aqua fortis is a Latin word used to refer to nitric acid. Its dilution is the main mordant etchers use in their craft.
aquarelle Painting
Aquarelle is a particular style of painting in which the artist uses transparent layers of watercolor to create their artwork. The term may also mean a piece of artwork created in a certain way.
aquatint Art Materials and General Art Terms
Aquatint is a variation of etching; it is an intaglio technique used in printmaking. In this kind of printmaking, a person creates impressions on a matrix (a zinc/copper plate in regards to aquatint) containing ink. After this step, the plate and a paper sheet are inserted in a printing press. The end product is paper coated with an ink layer; this step can be repeated as desired by the artist. Acid is used in aquatint in order to create the impressions on the metal plate. This is different than the engraving method in which a person uses a needle to create the impressions. Aquatint employs rosin in order to make the value gradations. Rosin holds onto the plates surface by heat and resists acid. An image is formed one part at a time by the artist maneuvering the degree of acid exposure over the piece's areas to control the tonal variations. The famous artist Goya (1746 - 1828) created images completed in aquatint with drypoint and/or etched lines. At present, the method of aquatint is favored for use by graphic artists, and is particularly favored when it comes to completing prints in color.
aqueous paint Painting
Aqueous paint refers to all paint that may be diluted with water, as opposed to paint that requires volatile solvents to be dissolved. Examples of aqueous paints include tempera, polymer colors, gouache and watercolor.
underpainting Painting
Underpainting is the starting layer of paint a painter uses to cover a ground/base layer. The underpainting acts as a base layer for all the future layers of paint. Often artists will execute the underpainting in a monochromatic color scheme. This assists the artist in differentiating the tonal values for future paint layers. Grisaille and verdaccio are both examples of kinds of underpainting a person can do. The term originated from the idea that the underpainting is completed with the intent of painting it yet again (overpainting). An artist follows a method of working in layers with the paint to finish the piece. While it is true to many underpaintings are monochromatic, they do not have to be. Underpaintings can be done in multiple colors, and artists such as Jan van Eyck and Giotto both used multi-color underpainting in their work. Multi-color underpainting can be covered with future layers of paint color and be mixed optically by the human eye, thus preventing the artist from having to mix the color pigments physically and risk making the colors muddy.
fat over lean Painting
water soluble oil paint, water mixable, water soluble Painting
acidification Fermentation
Acidification is the method of creating acidity. Usually acidification is the end product of fermentation and plays one of the roles in how fermentation is used to preserve food in a safe manner.
amino acids Fermentation
Amino acids are the blocks that make up proteins. The amino acids gather together to form chains that in turn create a wide variety of proteins. Proteins are made up of twenty different types of amino acids. Of the twenty types, nine are termed “essential” for people since they are not obtained through any other means other than through food. Humans are unable to manufacture essential amino acids in their bodies.
antibiotic Fermentation
Something that is antibiotic is antibacterial – it fights bacteria. It is a substance that retards or destroys the proliferation of both good and bad bacteria.
antioxidant Fermentation
An antioxidant is a substance that mitigates or stops the harm caused by free radicals towards healthy cells.
anemia Fermentation
Anemia is the condition in which one possesses less than normal hemoglobin or red blood cells in the blood. This causes a reduction of oxygen circulating in the body and can cause a number of symptoms, especially fatigue and lethargy. Anemia may be a result of insufficient B12, folate, and iron in the body. It can also be caused by menstrual bleeding, a bone marrow disease, a break in red blood cells, and the abnormal formation of red blood cells.
apoptosis Fermentation
Apoptosis is cell death as programmed by the body depending upon one’s age and current state of cell health. Inflammatory responses by the body are not usually associated with cells destroyed by apoptosis. Apoptosis is fought against by cancer cells.
aspergillus Fermentation
Aspergillus is a genus of mold often utilized in the fermenting of legumes and grains in Asia.
autoimmune Fermentation
A condition that involves the body’s immune system fighting against one’s own tissues. There is wide speculation in what causes the body to fight against itself. One theory is that the body cannot break down proteins properly; therefore, when encountering these partly digested proteins in the blood stream due to intestinal permeability, the body attacks itself. Because fermentation breaks down protein prior to human digestion, people with autoimmune conditions are often able to eat fermented food items that normally would illicit an autoimmune response – such as homemade fermented yogurt and homemade organic whole wheat sourdough bread.
backslopping Fermentation
A method of inserting a small portion of a previous batch of fermented food into the start of new batch of food to be fermented.
bacteria Fermentation
Bacteria are single-celled organisms that can survive either apart from other organisms, dependently on other organisms or working together with other organisms. When depending upon another organism for its survival, the parasitic bacteria may cause harm.
benign Fermentation
Something is termed “benign” to infer it is not harmful. Benign cancer is cancer that is not or is no longer harmful to the body.
bioavailability Fermentation
The amount of degree and the speed at which a given compound attains systemic circulation and is brought to the targeted tissue of the body.
brine Fermentation
Brine is created with water and salt and used in the fermentation process to maintain a certain pH level of the water in order to retard the growth of bad bacteria and foster the growth of good bacteria.
butyric acid Fermentation
Butyric acid is fatty acid that arises in the creation of esters located in animal fats, as well as some plant fats. The fermentation of starch or sugar creates a large amount of butyric acid.
cancer Fermentation
Cancer is the formation of abnormal cells; these cells frequently grow at an alarming rate and may spread to any part of the body if not contained or removed. The abnormal cells can manifest themselves in different ways in a single tissue. The term “cancer” is an umbrella term that covers over a hundred different types of diseases. The consumption of fermented foods, such as yogurt, kefir and sauerkraut, helps to prevent and retard the growth of cancer and disease due to their ability to fight bad bacteria with the good bacteria they contain.
carbohydrate Fermentation
Carbohydrates are created out of hydrogen, oxygen and carbon; they are neutral compounds. Starches, fiber, and sugars are forms of carbohydrates. They are thought of as a “macronutrient” due to the carbohydrate’s ability to provide a substantial amount of energy in one’s food intake.
cardiovascular Fermentation
The term “cardiovascular” is used in reference to something relating to the heart and blood vessels.
cataract Fermentation
A cataract is the fogging over of the eye’s lens; cataracts often cause visual impairment over time. A number of sicknesses and diseases can be helped or alleviated with the consumption of fermented foods, such as yogurt, sauerkraut and kefir.
celiac disease Fermentation
Celiac disease (celiac sprue) is a genetic disease that results when the intestinal lining becomes inflamed as a result of someone eating protein gluten (as found in wheat products, rye, barley and often corn and oats). Prevention of the inflammation is attained by not eating grains containing gluten. The disruption of nutrient absorption can occur with celiac disease due to the inflammation and wasting away of the intestines. This lack of absorption of nutrients can cause tremendous strain on the body and result in a number of symptoms. Because celiac disease is caused by someone unable to properly break down protein gluten, many people who have celiacs disease are able to consume properly fermented organic whole wheat sourdough bread because the fermentation process breaks down the protein gluten. Thus, consuming the bread is no longer a problem for the intestines to digest.
cholesterol Fermentation
Cholesterol is a compound that plays an essential structural part in cell membranes; it is a precursor in the making of steroid hormones. The liver synthesizes cholesterol, but it is gathered into the body by consuming animal products. Among the many things that can raise one’s unhealthy cholesterol levels, table salt is a major factor.
chronic fatigue syndrome Fermentation
Chronic fatigue syndrome is a condition of intense, long-term lethargy and tiredness that is not assuaged by sleep, relaxation or rest. It is often associated with autoimmune diseases and may be a sign of vitamin deficiency, such as iron or vitamin D. Eating probiotic foods such as homemade fermented sauerkraut, yogurt and kefir can have a large impact of those suffering from chronic fatigue syndrome because the good bacteria in these foods fight bad bacteria, boost the immune system and result in higher energy levels.
collagen Fermentation
Collagen is an insoluble fibrous protein that is the foundation of healthy cartilage, tendons, cartilage, skin and other connective tissue. There are over 15 types of collagen that are the building blocks of the human body. It is the most abundant protein in the body. As one ages, the creation of collagen in the body slows down, resulting in joint stiffness, a reduction in ligament and tendon elasticity and thin, weak skin. Eating fermented foods that contain probiotics such as homemade yogurt, kefir and sauerkraut plays an important role in influencing the health of collagen in the body. For example, eating probiotic foods influences the health of skin due to the impact of good bacteria on systemic inflammation throughout the body, tissue lipid content and glycemic control. Atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, acne and rosacea are all skin conditions that can be helped by eating probiotic foods.
colon Fermentation
The colon is the area of the large intestines that reaches from the end of the small intestines to the rectum. Its function is to clear away water from food that is been digested after it travels through the small intestine and holds the leftover stool until it is passed from the body. Eating fermented foods plays a large role in keeping the colon healthy, because good bacteria in these foods fights bad bacteria from overpopulating the colon which can then result in disease and other health conditions.
Crohns disease Fermentation
Crohn’s disease is a type of autoimmune disease that may manifest itself anywhere in the gastrointestinal tract. Symptoms of Crohn’s disease include on-going diarrhea, night sweats, weight loss, fever, constipation, abdominal pain and cramps, abnormal menstrual bleeding, fever, rectal bleeding, fatigue, lethargy and loss of appetite. Those suffering from Crohn’s disease are frequently helped by the daily consumption of lacto-fermented foods such as homemade yogurt, homemade kefir and sauerkraut due to the beneficial good bacteria in these food items. The good bacteria accomplishes a wide variety of functions, including fighting bad bacteria in the intestines, and creating an environment not compatible with pathogenic survival.
curing Fermentation
Curing involves a variety of food preservation and flavoring methods made possible by creating a mixture of sugar, nitrates, nitrate and/or salt. A number of curing methods include cooking, smoking and flavoring. Dehydrating food was one of the first methods of curing.
cytokines Fermentation
Cytokines are tiny protein molecules that are secreted by many cells and fit under the group of signaling molecules that are widely used in cellular communication.
douchi Fermentation
Douchi is a popular salt-fermented food in China made out of soy. The fermentation process turns the soybeans black and soft. Douchi features a salty, sweet, somewhat bitter taste; its smell is rather pungent and spicy.
dysbiosis Fermentation
Dysbiosis is an unhealthy balance of intestinal bacteria in the gut. Dr.Eli Metchnikoff popularized the term; he promoted the theory that all disease starts in one’s digestive tract due to an imbalance of good and bad bacteria in the gut. The term “symbiosis” is its opposite, which means things are living together in harmony with each other. Eating fermented foods such as homemade yogurt, kefir and sauerkraut aids in restoring a correct balance of bacteria in the intestines and prevents dysbiosis from occurring.
endotoxin Fermentation
Endotoxin are toxins released by particular bacteria. The term “endotoxin” was coined by Richard Friedrich Johannes Pfeiffer.
enzyme Fermentation
An enzyme is a substance that alters the rate of a chemical reaction without itself changing during the process. Enzymes are essential in the correct functioning of organisms and cells. Lacking a particular enzyme can result in a host of problems due to the lack of chain reactions that the enzyme is responsible for starting. An example of the importance an enzyme plays is when someone is lactose intolerant; such a person lacks the enzyme in his/her stomach to break down milk sugar, causing uncomfortable symptoms to result.
essential fatty acid Fermentation
Essential fatty acids are fatty acids that animals and humans must obtain through their food. These acids cannot be manufactured in the body; they are called “essential” due to their necessity for maintaining good health.
fatty acids Fermentation
A fatty acid is an organic acid molecule made up of a carboxylic acid group and a chain of carbon molecules. They can be obtained in oil, fat and as parts in a variety of essential lipids such as triglycerides. The body can use fatty acids to create energy.
art of fermentation Fermentation
Fermentation is a kind of anaerobic process that releases energy; it breaks down carbohydrates and other substances into simpler substances. Many microorganisms such as bacteria, yeasts and some molds access their energy through the process of fermentation. The end result of each fermentation process is based upon which type of microorganism is active and the actual item being fermented. Antibiotics are made from mold and bacterial fermentation for example. Beer is made from the fermentation of yeast in grain, while wine is the result of yeast fermentation from fruit juice. There are various methods of fermentation, and the process is often associated with products that are beneficial for the intestinal tract, such as kefir, yogurt and fermented pickles. The art of fermentation has been growing in popularity in recent years as scientists and laypeople alike learn about the health benefits of consuming fermented foods to aid digestion, boost the immune system and prevent disease.
fibromyalgia Fermentation
Fibromyalgia is a painful, chronic, widespread condition that is intensified by pressure on the body. It is often associated with poor memory, lack of sleep, mood disorders, fatigue and lethargy. Statistically, more women than men suffer from this medical condition. As with many health conditions, fibromyalgia can be helped by a healthy diet, including the consumption of fermented foods such as yogurt and kefir to foster a healthy balance of gut flora in the intestines. Maintaining healthy intestinal flora are essential for those suffering from chronic health conditions because over 80% of the immune system is found in the gut. Boosting the immune system can assist a person fighting any health condition or disease.
prebiotic Fermentation
A prebiotic is a non-digestible fermented food substance that fosters the proliferation and activity of good bacteria in the intestinal tract. When a prebiotic and a probiotic are put together, they create a “symbiotic.” Kefir and yogurt are considered to be symbiotic because not only do they host live, beneficial bacteria, but they also contain the fuel or food that the probiotic bacteria needs in order to survive and thrive in the digestive tract.
fructooligosaccharide Fermentation
A kind of fiber that functions as a prebiotic in the intestines to provide food for the good microflora.
probiotic Fermentation
Probiotics are live microorganisms that can benefit the health of their host. They control the overgrowth of bad bacteria in the intestinal tract and promote healthy microflora. The term “probiotics” was coined by Stillwell and Lilly in 1965. Probiotics can be found in fermented items such as kefir, yogurt and sauerkraut.
synbiotic Fermentation
A synbiotic is a product that contains both prebiotics and probiotics. Yogurt is an example of a synbiotic.
Dirck van der Aa Artists/Craftpersons
(1731 - 1809) Dirck van der Aa was one of the most known persons from a family of Dutch painters from The Hague. He specialized in grisaille decorative panels for the interior of buildings.
Hans von Aachen Artists/Craftpersons
(1552 -1615) Hans was a German painter who primarily painted in the Netherlands, Italy and especially Prague where he eventulaly lived in 1596. There, he worked under the emperor Rudolf II as a court painter and later for the emperor Matthias. His artwork contained long, elegant figures and he was noted for his playful nudes. He influenced engravings being made from his artwork and became a well-known artist from his time period.
Alvar Aalto Artists/Craftpersons
(1898 - 1976) Aalto was a painter, sculptor, designer and Finnish architect. His wife, Aino Marsio, was his main collaborator until she died in 1949. One of their major collaborations was the Artek furniture whose techniques of jointing, bending and novel graceful lines eventually gained popularity and had a big impact on future furniture design. Between the years of 1927 and 1954 Aalto took part in experiments to create free abstract sculptures and abstract reliefs made out of laminated wood which later served as inspiration for his architecture work. He is known in particular for his memorial for the Battle of Suomussalmi. Aalto is also known for his influence in promoting modern art.
Waino Aaltonen Artists/Craftpersons
(1894 - 1966) After the years following the declaration of independence from Russia in 1917, Aaltonen became the icon of the patriotic spirit of Finland. He was a sculptor who is known especially for his bronze monument to the runner Paavo Nurmi and for his bust of the musical composer, Sibelius.
Magdalena Abakanowicz Artists/Craftpersons
Abakanowicz is a Polish sculptor who has made breakthroughs in creating sculptures created from woven fabrics. Work from her efforts have been imitated both in the United States and in Europe.
Niccolo dell Abbate Artists/Craftpersons
Abbate (1510 - 1571) was an Italian painter trained in Modena and in Bologna. He was influenced by Correggio and Parmigianino. Abbate worked to decorate palaces with his elegant style. He is particularly known for his landscapes from mythological stories, becoming a precursor of sorts to Poussin and Claude.
Edwin Austin Abbey Artists/Craftpersons
(1852 - 1911) Abbey was a successful American book illustrator, etcher, and painter. He is known for his historical scenes and murals such as his commission piece, "The Quest of the Holy Grail" and another of his commission pieces made in honor of Edward VII's coronation in 1902. He also worked for Harper's Weekly from 1870 until he died. His book illustrations were especially well-liked.
Francis Abbot Artists/Craftpersons
(1760 - 1802) Abbot was a painter from England. Many of his customers were naval officers. His portrayals of Lord Nelson are the most-known of his art. Tragically, in 1798 he went crazy and was unable to finish his work; it was eventually finished by other artists.
declaration block Computer
A declaration block is the second part of a CSS rule. It consists of one or more declarations made up of a CSS property and a value associated with that particular property. Each declaration ends with a semi-colon with the last semi-colon of the last declaration being optional.
receding parallel lines Art Perspective
Receding parallel lines are lines parallel to each other that gradually move away from the viewer. There are a number of rules that receding parallel lines follow in nature. First, all lines in nature that are parallel to each other appear to converge at the same point as they recede from the viewer. Second, all level lines that recede in nature appear to converge on the horizon. Thirdly, inclining parallel lines in nature that recede appear to converge at a point immediately over the point they would have converged IF they had been level lines. Fourthly, parallel lines in nature that recede when inclined downward appear to meet at a point immediately beneath the point they would have converged had they been level lines.
depths of receding surfaces Art Perspective
The depth of a receding surface refers to the z-axis of an object, as opposed to the object’s x-axis or y-axis, ( its width and height). There are two main ways to discover the depth of a recediing surface. One way is to use diagonal lines with a scale that recedes. The second way is through the use of a scale on the base-line or parallel to it. The first method is often used to free-hand sketch things such as a foreshortened row of fence posts.
inline styles Computer
The use of inline styles is one method in which HTML and XHTML can be stylized with CSS. The style information can be designated for an element through the use of the style attribute. A style attribute’s value is a declaration block minus the curly braces. Just the content of a single declaration can be applied to a style attribute value; an entire style sheet may not be inserted into a style attribute.
rule structure Computer
Rule structure is the correct syntax of how to apply styles to HTML and XHTML with CSS. Each rule contains two distinct parts; these parts include the selector and the declaration block. p {color:black; font-family:serif;} is an example of the rule structure. P is called the selector. The other items are part of the declaration block. Color is the property and black is the value of that property. And font-family is the property and serif is the value of that property.
CSS comments / comment Computer
CSS comments are notes or code made a programmer in a stylesheet that do not affect the rest of the code in a stylesheet. Comments are created in CSS by opening the comment with /* and closing the comment with */. Multiple lines of comments are allowed and can be inserted at any location in a stylesheet with the exception of being placed within a property name or value.
style precedence Computer
Style precedence refers to the determination of which styles are ultimately selected and applied to the html elements of a website. An XHTML or HTML document may include inline styles, import and link to several external style sheets, and include embedded stylesheets. Rules from all these style sources may differ from one another, thus CSS uses the method of the cascade to determine which style takes precedence among these rules. Specificity and inheritance are the main parts of the cascade system that determine style precedence.
specificity calculations Computer
Specificity refers to the weight of a selector ( its importance), along with the declarations related to the selector. The values of specificity are cumulative with the values organized from right-to-left in importance. A declaration is given more weight with the !important directive as opposed to non-important declarations. The declaration keeps the specificity of its selectors; it is taken into account only as it relates to other important declarations.
inheritance Computer
A document’s elements create a hierarchy with the root element located at the top and the remaining document parts sprawled out beneath it. Within an HTML document, the body and head elements are located beneath the html element. Ancestor elements are located higher in the tree-like structure and their descendents are located below them. CSS refers to the document structure to determine inheritance (refers to how a style is inherited by the descendents of an element). Inheritance can be overruled by a style rule that is immediately applied to an element. Values that are inherited do not possess specificity. It is important to realize that some elements are not inherited. A property will define if it is inherited; examples of elements that are not inherited include such elements such as background, margin, border and padding.
the cascade Computer
The cascade refers to how CSS determines which styles are used in a website when styles conflict with one another. To determine the case 1) Locate the declarations that include a selector that pairs up with an element 2) Organize by weight (importance) the declarations associated to the element 3) Remember that rules containing !important are weighted more than rules that are not marked with it. Therefore organize by origin the declarations associated with the element. The three origins are user agent, reader and author. Typically an author’s styles overrule the reader’s styles. However, !important reader styles overrule !important author styles. A user agent’s default styles are overruled by both author and reader styles. 3) Organize by specificity the declarations associated to the element. Elements with a lower specificity have less weight than those elements with a higher specificity. 4) Lastly, organize by order the declarations associated with the element. A declaration has more weight when it is located further down in a stylesheet. If declarations are located in an imported style sheet, they are given the status of coming before other declarations in the style sheet that imports. They therefore do not possess as much weight as other rules in the stylesheet that imports them.
element classification Computer
Elements can be classified into two main CSS groups; these two groups are replaced and non-replaced. Elements can differ substantially in how they are presented depending on which group they belong to. Most HTML and XHTML elements belong to the nonreplaced group; in this group, an element’s content is viewed by the user agent within a box created by the element itself. Most elements in HTML and XHTML are nonreplaced elements, such as paragraphs, lists, table cells and headings.
nonreplaced elements Computer
An element can be classified as either a nonreplaced element or a replaced element. A nonreplaced element is an element whose content is viewed by the user agent within a box created by the element itself. Most elements in HTML and XHTML are nonreplaced elements, such as paragraphs, lists, table cells and headings.
replaced elements Computer
An element can be classified as either a nonreplaced element or a replaced element. Replaced elements are elements whose content is replaced by an item not immediately portrayed by the content of the document. In other words, the element does not contain any content - just the element’s name and attributes are present. Such an element can only be presented by inserting content through other methods since no content is contained in the element. The img element is an example of a replaced element; it contains no content, but by inserting an external image through the use of a src attribute the image can be viewed by the user.
element display roles Computer
There are two main kinds of element display roles in CSS3; inline-level and block-level. Every CSS3 display values land in either one of these two types. Because not all properties are applied to both types of roles, it is essential to learn which role a box is associated with.
block-level / block level Computer
A block-level box is one in which an element box takes over the full width of a parent’s content area and pushes other elements away from its sides. A break exists before and after a block-level element. A div is an example of a block-level element. Display values that make block-boxes include all CSS Advanced Layout templates and: block, list-item, table-caption, table-cell, table-column-group, table-row, table-footer-group, table-header-group, table-row-group, table, list-item, and block.
inline level box Computer
An inline-level box is one in which an element’s box is created in a line of text and keeps the flow of the line. Span, em and a are all examples of inline-level elements. They do not cause a line break before or after their code, so they never disrupt the flow of content they are inserted into. Display values that make inline boxes include: ruby, inline-table, inline-block and inline.
run-in, run in Computer
In CSS, a run-in creates either an inline box or block box, and this is determined by the circumstances. It is defined by display: run-in. The outcome is determined by the rules of: 1) If the run-in includes a block-box, the run-in will create a block box. 2) If a sibling block box directly follows a run-in and it is not absolutely positioned or floated, then the run-in box turns into the sibling block box’s first inline box. 3) The run-in will create a block box if both conditions are not applicable.
basic visual layout Computer
In CSS, algorithms are defined for presenting all elements in a document. The two main types of layout in CSS are block-level and inline-level layout; they manifest contrasting behaviors from one another.
block-level layout / block level layout Computer
In CSS, a block-level box in CSS creates an “element box” - a rectangular box. The box designates the degree of space surrounding an element. The content, padding and border areas of an element make up the background area. Any transparency of the border (such as if it was dashed) will be seen through those sections. The margin area is not included in the background portion of an element. Important to note is that just the width, height and margins of an element box can be set to auto. Margins may contain negative values. The default of an element box for its border and padding widths are none and 0 (zero). Also, the property width determines just the width of the content area if the box-sizing is content-box. The property width determines the full width of the content, borders and padding if the box-sizing is border-box. If there are margins, they are placed in addition to it. This same principle applies to the height in regards to the height of the element.
inline layout Computer
In CSS, inline boxes are rectangular boxes created from an inline-level box. The height and width are not applicable to nonreplaced inline boxes. Any value of auto is changed to 0 (zero) for the following properties: margin-right, margin-top, margin-left, top, bottom, left and right.
floating, float Computer
Floating an element in CSS allows the element to be positioned to the right or left of its containing block and for other content to flow around it with respect to its edges. Each floated element creates a block box despite any kind of box that would have been created if it was not floated. A floated element is positioned depending on certain rules such as: 1) The right outer edge (or left) can not be to the right inner edge (or left) of the element’s containing block. 2) The top of a floating element can not be above the top of any previous block-level or floating element. 3) The top of a floating element can not be higher than the inner top of the element’s block container. 4) An element that is floated needs to be positioned as high as it can be placed. 5) An element that is floated left needs to be placed to the left as much as it can be (and the same principle applies to a right floated element).
positioning elements Computer
Elements may be positioned several ways in CSS, and several rules are enforced that govern the containing block of the element and how it is presented in that element. There are 4 kinds of positioning, including: 1) static positioning 2) relative positioning 3) absolute positioning and 4) fixed positioning
static positioning Computer
Static positioning is one way that an element can be positioned with CSS. If an element is positioned statically, the box of the element is created as normal. Block-level elements create a rectangular box that is part of the flow of the document. Inline-level boxes create one or multiple line boxes that flow inside the element’s of their par
relative positioning Computer
Relative positioning is one way that an element can be positioned with CSS. If an element is positioned relatively, the box of an element is offset by some measurement. The space the element would take over if it was not positioned is thought of as its containing block. The element keeps the space it would have possessed if it had not been positioned, and the area is retained that the element would usually occ
absolute positioning Computer
Absolute positioning is one way that an element can be positioned with CSS. If an element is positioned absolutely, the box of an element is taken out completely from the document’s flow; it is placed in relation to its containing block. This containing block can be the original containing block or another element. The area the element would have occupied in the document is taken over as if the element were never there. The positioned element creates a block box despite the kind of box it would have created had it been in the regular flow of the documen
fixed positioning Computer
Fixed positioning is one way that an element can be positioned with CSS. If an element is in a fixed position, the box of the element acts like it is set to absolute; however the element’s box container is actually the viewpo
containing block Computer
A containing block is a rectangular shape in which lies an element. The size and placement of the boxes of an element are frequently defined in relation to a containing block. The containing block varies in regards to what it includes. For example: 1) If a containing block contains the root element it is called an initial containing block. 2) If the element’s position is either static or relative, the containing block is created by the edge of the content closest to the block container ancestor block. 3) If the element’s position is fixed, the viewport creates the containing block in regards to continuous media or, in the case of paged media, it is established by the page area. 4) If the element is positioned absolutely (position: absolute) the containing block is created by the closest ancestor with a position of fixed, relative or absolute. A) The containing block is the bounding box that surrounds the padding boxes of the last and first inline boxes created for that particular element when the ancestor is an inline element. B) If this is not the case, then the containing block is created by the padding edge of the ancestor. And if there is no ancestor, then the containing block is the initial containing block. Also, an absolutely positioned element is placed relative to the block that contains it without regard to page breaks. And the element may be broken amid many pages.
shrink-to-fit / shrink to fit Computer
Shrink-to-fit refers to a method of laying out absolutely positioned elements. It closely resembles figuring out a table cell’s width through the use of automatic table layout algorithms. Frequently, the user agent tries to discover the minimum element width that will envelop the content and wrap several lines only if the wrapping is unavoidable.
static position Computer
Static position refers to one type of layout of absolutely positioned elements. If an element is in a ‘static position’ it is placed where its edge would normally be positioned.
vertical scrollbar Computer
A vertical scrollbar is a bar that can be manipulated to go up or down to reveal content not otherwise seen on a webpage. The width of a vertical scrollbar is not affected by CSS and is defined by the user agent.
equation of horizontal layout of absolutely positioned elements Computer
Refers to the equation that governs the horizontal layout of absolutely positioned elements. The equation that determines the width of the containing block is as follows: vertical scrollbar width + left + margin-left + border-left-width + width + padding-right + padding-left + border-right-width + margin-right + right.
equation of vertical layout of absolutely positioned elements Computer
Refers to the equation that governs the vertical layout of absolutely positioned elements. The equation that determines the height of the containing block is as follows: horizontal scrollbar height + top + margin-top + border-top-width + height + padding-bottom + padding-top + border-bottom-width + margin-bottom + bottom.
table arrangement rules Computer
Refers to the rules that determine how a table is arranged using CSS. Usually a table in CSS is created based on the following rules: 1) A row group’s box surrounds the exact grid cells as the row boxes inside of it. 2) Every row box includes an individual row of grid cells. And every row box in a table makes up the table from top to bottom following the order they occur in the source document. Therefore, there are as many row elements as there are grid rows. 3) A column box surrounds one or multiple columns of grid cells. These column boxes are positioned by one another following the order they occur. The 1st column box is positioned on the left side for languages that are left-to-right (and right for right-to-left languages). 4) The box of a column group surrounds the exact grid cells as the column boxes it surrounds. 5) The document language defines the spanning of cells of rows or columns. 6) The box of a cell may not go past the last row box of a row group or table. A cell needs to be cut short to fit in the row group or table that surrounds it if the table structure causes a cell box to reach past the last row box.
fixed table layout Computer
Refers to a quick type of table layout using CSS that is not reliant on the contents of table cells. This type of layout relies instead on the width values of the cells, columns and table located in the 1st row of the table. This layout uses these steps: 1) A column element with a width property set to any value except to auto creates a width for itself. 2) A cell creates the width for its column if it has a width value other than auto, and the column contains an auto width. If the cell spans several columns, the width is separated evenly amidst the columns. 3) All the columns that remain auto-sized are sized so their widths are evenly sized as much as possible. 4) The table width is fixed at the table’s width value or the total value of the column widths, depending on which value is greater. If the column widths are less than the table width, then the amount between them is divided by the number of columns and added to each one.
automatic table layout Computer
Refers to a table layout method of using CSS that resembles a long-used model by authors to create HTML tables. This method can be used in the following matter: 1) The minimum and maximum cell width for each cell in a column is calculated. 2) The minimum width needed to view the content is determined. If a cells contains a width value bigger than the minimum possible width, a value of width is set for the minimum cell width. And the minimum cell width is set to the minimum content width if the cell’s width value is auto. 3) Calculate the width needed to show the content minus any line-breaking for the maximum width. The maximum cell width is this value. 4) Determine both the minimum and maximum column width. 5) The total of the minimum column widths needs to be equal to the minimum cell width for the spanning cell. Moreover, the total of the maximum column widths needs to be equal to the spanning cell’s maximum width. Any differences in the column widths should be divided equally amid the spanned columns. Also, one needs to take into consideration that when a column width has a % value for the width, the % is determined as it relates to the table’s width - though the width may not be given. This percentage value needs to be used in the next part of the algorithm. A user agent can determine the width of a width once he/she has figured out how narrow or wide each column may be. This process is figured out in the following manner: A) The computed table width is contrasted to the total of all the column widths, as well as any cell-spacing or borders. The bigger of the two values is chosen as the width of the table. All the widths of the columns are expanded by an equal measurement so they take up the width of the table if the table’s computed width is bigger than the total of the column’s cell-spacing, borders and widths. However, if the computed width of the table is auto, then a table’s width is found by totaling the cell-spacing, borders and column widths. So, like traditional HTML tables, this signifies that a table will remain as wide as possible to have its content viewed - but no more as necessary. After these steps are completed, a user agent can commence with laying out the table.
fluidity of line Drawing
Fluidity of line refers to the quality of smoothness, pliability, and gracefulness of a line. Such lines may be full of curves, twists, soft edges and trailing ends. Fluid lines are dissimilar from hard lines which may contain rough edges, sharp angles and abrupt ends.
visual movement / flow Art Materials and General Art Terms
Visual movement is employed by artists to guide their viewers’ eyes along a specific path throughout their piece of artwork. It is an important part of many piecse of artwork because it ensures viewers see the artwork in the intended order of events - which in turn may influence the overall impact and understanding of the piece. Moreover, visual movement can significantly influence whether a viewer lingers over a piece or quickly glances at it and then dismiss it. Visual movement can be achieved by utilizing elements such as color, shapes, lines, edges and changing the size of objects. For example, since people’s eyes usually follow a line from start to finish, by incorporating definite or implied lines in an artwork, an artist can effectively direct the visual movement of the piece. In graphic design, visual movement is frequently referred to as flow.
visual thinking / picture thinking / right brained learning Art Materials and General Art Terms
Visual thinking refers to the method of thinking through the use of visual processing or understanding. It is a method employed by numerous companies and individuals to easily communicate concepts and ideas in a short amount of time using visual stimuli. Visual thinking allows people to organize thoughts in a non-linear and non-verbal way. One of the main benefits of visual thinking is that people can communicate often complex relationships and abstract thoughts that might otherwise take a long time to effectively share. Diagrams, maps, geometric shapes combined with lines and arrows, illustrations, photographs, doodles and sketches are all examples of ways in which people can use visual thinking to communicate their ideas.
rule of thirds Art Materials and General Art Terms
The rule of thirds is based upon the Golden ratio. It is a principle many visual artists follow when designing a pleasing composition. The aim of the rule is to position the composition’s main areas of interest along lines that separate the image into three equal rows and columns - most preferably at or near the intersection of the lines.
limiting focus Photography
Limiting focus is a technique in which photographers and other artists can limit the area of their pictorial compositions that are in focus. It is a method of simplification, helping the viewer to focus on exactly what the artist wishes the viewer to look at in a picture. A typical example is a close-up of a flower with the background behind it being blurry. This technique can be achieved in photography by using a wide aperature when taking a picture to limit the depth of field. Everything that is not the main focus of the shot will be blurry.
visual rhythm Art Materials and General Art Terms
Visual rhythm is a principle in art in that involves the rhythm of visual perception. It occurs when positive shapes are repeatedly positioned in a composition while being separated by negative space. There are several different kinds of visual rhythm, including random rhythm, flowing rhythm, regular rhythm, alternating rhythm, progressive rhythm and flowing rhythm.
regular rhythm Art Materials and General Art Terms
Regular rhythm is one of the five types of visual rhythm. It occurs when positive and negative shapes have the same visual beats. In other words, the shapes contain the same amount of space between them and are predictable once the pattern of the rhythm is established. An example of the use of regular rhythm can be found on brick walls and parking spaces.
alternating rhythm Art Materials and General Art Terms
Alternating rhythm is one of the five types of visual rhythm. It occurs when positive and negative shapes change design at regular intervals. An example of alternating rhythm can be found on chessboards with their black and white squares.
random rhythm Art Materials and General Art Terms
Random rhythm is one of the five types of visual rhythm. It occurs when positive and negative shapes are repeated in a manner without order or any planned arrangement. The random rhythm involves design that cannot be predicted. An example of the use of random rhythm can be seen in paintings created with a splattering of paint.
flowing rhythm Art Materials and General Art Terms
Flowing rhythm is one of the five types of visual rhythm. It occurs when curvy positive and negative shapes are repeated and when wavy lines are repeated. Examples of flowing rhythm are found on many wallpapers that contain flowers, leaves and stems.
progressive rhythm Art Materials and General Art Terms
Progressive rhythm is one of the five types of visual rhythm. It occurs when the positive and negative shapes in a design are changed every single time the design is repeated. An example of progressive rhythm is found in the cloud formations in the sky.
logarithmic spiral Animation
The logarithmic spiral is a spiral frequently sighted in nature and that was analyzed first by Descartes. Later, another man named Jacob Bernoulii researched the spiral, and dubbed it the “Spira mirabilis” - the marvelous spiral. Jacob was so taken with the spiral he wanted it engraved on his tombstone. One of the reasons he was so interested by the spiral was because of its unusual mathematical property of retaining its shape despite the size of the spiral increasing.
The spiral is related to the golden ratio, the Fibonacci numbers and the golden rectangles. The spiral can be created by spacing rays equally at a point along a ray and placing a perpendicular line to the nearby ray. The more the rays increase, the smooth the logarithmic spiral becomes. It is also called the equiangular spiral and the growth spiral. It is different than another type of spiral called the Archimedean spiral because the revolving of a logarithmic spiral grows in geometric progression, whereas in an Archimedean spiral those same distances remain the same.
abend Computer
When a task or program ends unexpectedly, an “abend” occurs. When this happens, the computer program should automatically create an error message to show what the program just did, the file that caused the error or indicate the location of the error in the memory.
absolute address Computer
An absolute address is an exact memory address. The term may also be called a “real address,” “machine address” or “direct address.”
absolute coding Computer
Absolute coding is a kind of computer programing in which the computer programmer uses absolute addressing, rather than indirect addressing. For instance, an exact memory address may be used to store data rather than use an indirect address by a computer programmer in an assembly language.
action statement Computer
In computer programming, an action statement is a command that completes actions such as copying and pasting text.
ActiveX Computer
ActiveX is a branch of Microsoft’s COM and OLE technologies that is incorporated in applications and on the Internet. A browser can perform more tasks with one’s computer than what is possible with just HTML with the use of ActiveX. For example, people using ActiveX can easily check for Windows updates.
Ada Computer
Ada (known previously as DoD-1) is a high-level Pascal-based programming language named after Augusta Ada Byron. It was created by the United States Department of Defense.
ASPI Computer
ASPI is an abbreviation for Advanced SCSI Programming Interface - an interface specification. It sends commands to a SCSI host adapter created by Adaptec. It is now the unofficial standard for computer programmers who desire to make drivers that operate with all ASPI-compatible SCSI adapters.
aggregate (computer) Computer
The term “aggregate” can refer to a number of things, including data that is made up of smaller segments of information that come together to create a greater whole. The term may also refer to a software program created to gather data from several sources. For instance, a computer user could employ a RSS aggregator that gathers common web pages RSS gives and immediately view all the latest details on the pages without needing to go to every site individually. In computer programming, the term “aggregate” refers to a kind of object composition in which only some of the containing objects will be eradicated when the owning object is eradicated.
link aggregation Computer
Link aggregation in networking is connecting several network connections to allow more data to be dispatched or create a backup connection in the event there is a connection failure.
packet aggregation Computer
Packet aggregation in networking is the combining of several packets together in the efforts to reduce the number of server requests by the transmission of packets.
route aggregation Computer
Route aggregation in networking is the creating of two or more networks combined into a single routing prefix.
ALGOL Computer
ALGOL (an abbreviation for ALGOrithmic Language) is a portable language for scientific computations. It broke into the public scene in the late 1950’s as ALGOL 58 and was later developed into ALGOL 68 in the 1960’s.
Computer
An algorithm is a number of procedures, formulas, or instructions employed to fix a problem. They are employed daily by people around the world to solve a variety of problems. For instance, an algorithm can be employed to analyze a person’s emails to decide whether incoming mail is legitimate or just spam. The first person to create an algorithm for a machine was Ada Lovelace.
algorithm (computer) Computer
An algorithm is a number of procedures, formulas, or instructions employed to fix a problem. They are employed daily by people around the world to solve a variety of problems. For instance, an algorithm can be employed to analyze a person’s emails to decide whether incoming mail is legitimate or just spam. The first person to create an algorithm for a machine was Ada Lovelace.
AOP Computer
AOP (an abbreviation for Aspect-Oriented Programming) was created by Xerox PARC. It aids a computer programer in determining how a program will be compiled. The term may also refer to Auto OP - a chanserv IRC chat feature that allows a user immediate access to OP in a chat channel they can use once they are registered with nickserv.
API Computer
API (an abbreviation for application program interface) is a number of tools, routines and protocols for creating software applications. APIs permit programmers to access other company’s services and programs with greater ease. For example, Twitter permits website developers/programmers to more easily take part in their services through the use of APIs.
applet Computer
A applet is a small program that can complete a task that a bigger program is not capable of doing. An example of an applet is Sun Java applet - it is a file located on the Internet that administers more functions not possible through the use of HTML.
argument / arg Computer
Also known as an “arg,” an argument in computer programming or when referencing the command line, is a value that is placed into a routine, command or function.
arithmetic operator Computer
Arithmetic operators refer to the symbols that act as the arithmetic math operations. The addition operator is +, the subtraction operator is -, the multiplication operator is *, and the division operator is /.